R&S®FSC

Spectrum Analyzer
Operating Manual

1173.0966.12 – 07
Operating Manual
Test & Measurement
The Operating Manual describes the following models and options:
®
● R&S FSC3 (1314.3006K03)
®
● R&S FSC6 (1314.3006K06)
®
● R&S FSC13 (1314.3006K13)
®
● R&S FSC16 (1314.3006K16)

© 2014 Rohde & Schwarz GmbH & Co. KG

Muehldorfstr. 15, 81671 Munich. Germany
Phone: +49 89 4129-0
Fax: +49 89 4129-12 164
E-mail: [email protected]
Internet: http://www.rohde-schwarz.com

81671 Munich, Germany

Subject to change – Data without tolerance limits is not binding.
R&S® is a registered trademark of Rohde & Schwarz GmbH & Co. KG.
Trade names are trademarks of the owners.

The following abbreviations are used throughout this manual:

R&S®FSC is abbreviated as R&S FSC
R&S®FSCView is abbreviated as R&SFSCView
 Basic Safety Instructions
Always read through and comply with the following safety instructions!
All plants and locations of the Rohde & Schwarz group of companies make every effort to keep the safety
standards of our products up to date and to offer our customers the highest possible degree of safety. Our
products and the auxiliary equipment they require are designed, built and tested in accordance with the
safety standards that apply in each case. Compliance with these standards is continuously monitored by
our quality assurance system. The product described here has been designed, built and tested in
accordance with the EC Certificate of Conformity and has left the manufacturer’s plant in a condition fully
complying with safety standards. To maintain this condition and to ensure safe operation, you must
observe all instructions and warnings provided in this manual. If you have any questions regarding these
safety instructions, the Rohde & Schwarz group of companies will be happy to answer them.
Furthermore, it is your responsibility to use the product in an appropriate manner. This product is designed
for use solely in industrial and laboratory environments or, if expressly permitted, also in the field and must
not be used in any way that may cause personal injury or property damage. You are responsible if the
product is used for any purpose other than its designated purpose or in disregard of the manufacturer's
instructions. The manufacturer shall assume no responsibility for such use of the product.
The product is used for its designated purpose if it is used in accordance with its product documentation
and within its performance limits (see data sheet, documentation, the following safety instructions). Using
the product requires technical skills and, in some cases, a basic knowledge of English. It is therefore
essential that only skilled and specialized staff or thoroughly trained personnel with the required skills be
allowed to use the product. If personal safety gear is required for using Rohde & Schwarz products, this
will be indicated at the appropriate place in the product documentation. Keep the basic safety instructions
and the product documentation in a safe place and pass them on to the subsequent users.
Observing the safety instructions will help prevent personal injury or damage of any kind caused by
dangerous situations. Therefore, carefully read through and adhere to the following safety instructions
before and when using the product. It is also absolutely essential to observe the additional safety
instructions on personal safety, for example, that appear in relevant parts of the product documentation. In
these safety instructions, the word "product" refers to all merchandise sold and distributed by the Rohde &
Schwarz group of companies, including instruments, systems and all accessories. For product-specific
information, see the data sheet and the product documentation.

Safety labels on products

The following safety labels are used on products to warn against risks and dangers.

Symbol Meaning Symbol Meaning

Notice, general danger location ON/OFF supply voltage

Observe product documentation

Caution when handling heavy equipment Standby indication

Danger of electric shock Direct current (DC)

1171.0000.42 - 07 Page 1
 Basic Safety Instructions

Symbol Meaning Symbol Meaning

Warning! Hot surface Alternating current (AC)

Protective conductor terminal Direct/alternating current (DC/AC)

Ground Device fully protected by double (reinforced)

insulation

Ground terminal EU labeling for batteries and accumulators

For additional information, see section "Waste

disposal/Environmental protection", item 1.

Be careful when handling electrostatic sensitive EU labeling for separate collection of electrical
devices and electronic devices

For additonal information, see section "Waste

disposal/Environmental protection", item 2.

Warning! Laser radiation

For additional information, see section

"Operation", item 7.

Signal words and their meaning

The following signal words are used in the product documentation in order to warn the reader about risks
and dangers.
Indicates a hazardous situation which, if not avoided, will result in death or
serious injury.
Indicates a hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in death or
serious injury.
Indicates a hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in minor or
moderate injury.
Indicates information considered important, but not hazard-related, e.g.
messages relating to property damage.
In the product documentation, the word ATTENTION is used synonymously.

These signal words are in accordance with the standard definition for civil applications in the European
Economic Area. Definitions that deviate from the standard definition may also exist in other economic
areas or military applications. It is therefore essential to make sure that the signal words described here
are always used only in connection with the related product documentation and the related product. The
use of signal words in connection with unrelated products or documentation can result in misinterpretation
and in personal injury or material damage.

1171.0000.42 - 07 Page 2
 Basic Safety Instructions

Operating states and operating positions

The product may be operated only under the operating conditions and in the positions specified by the
manufacturer, without the product's ventilation being obstructed. If the manufacturer's specifications are
not observed, this can result in electric shock, fire and/or serious personal injury or death. Applicable local
or national safety regulations and rules for the prevention of accidents must be observed in all work
performed.
1. Unless otherwise specified, the following requirements apply to Rohde & Schwarz products:
predefined operating position is always with the housing floor facing down, IP protection 2X, use only
indoors, max. operating altitude 2000 m above sea level, max. transport altitude 4500 m above sea
level. A tolerance of ±10 % shall apply to the nominal voltage and ±5 % to the nominal frequency,
overvoltage category 2, pollution severity 2.
2. Do not place the product on surfaces, vehicles, cabinets or tables that for reasons of weight or stability
are unsuitable for this purpose. Always follow the manufacturer's installation instructions when
installing the product and fastening it to objects or structures (e.g. walls and shelves). An installation
that is not carried out as described in the product documentation could result in personal injury or
even death.
3. Do not place the product on heat-generating devices such as radiators or fan heaters. The ambient
temperature must not exceed the maximum temperature specified in the product documentation or in
the data sheet. Product overheating can cause electric shock, fire and/or serious personal injury or
even death.

Electrical safety
If the information on electrical safety is not observed either at all or to the extent necessary, electric shock,
fire and/or serious personal injury or death may occur.
1. Prior to switching on the product, always ensure that the nominal voltage setting on the product
matches the nominal voltage of the AC supply network. If a different voltage is to be set, the power
fuse of the product may have to be changed accordingly.
2. In the case of products of safety class I with movable power cord and connector, operation is
permitted only on sockets with a protective conductor contact and protective conductor.
3. Intentionally breaking the protective conductor either in the feed line or in the product itself is not
permitted. Doing so can result in the danger of an electric shock from the product. If extension cords
or connector strips are implemented, they must be checked on a regular basis to ensure that they are
safe to use.
4. If there is no power switch for disconnecting the product from the AC supply network, or if the power
switch is not suitable for this purpose, use the plug of the connecting cable to disconnect the product
from the AC supply network. In such cases, always ensure that the power plug is easily reachable and
accessible at all times. For example, if the power plug is the disconnecting device, the length of the
connecting cable must not exceed 3 m. Functional or electronic switches are not suitable for providing
disconnection from the AC supply network. If products without power switches are integrated into
racks or systems, the disconnecting device must be provided at the system level.
5. Never use the product if the power cable is damaged. Check the power cables on a regular basis to
ensure that they are in proper operating condition. By taking appropriate safety measures and
carefully laying the power cable, ensure that the cable cannot be damaged and that no one can be
hurt by, for example, tripping over the cable or suffering an electric shock.

1171.0000.42 - 07 Page 3
 Basic Safety Instructions

6. The product may be operated only from TN/TT supply networks fuse-protected with max. 16 A (higher
fuse only after consulting with the Rohde & Schwarz group of companies).
7. Do not insert the plug into sockets that are dusty or dirty. Insert the plug firmly and all the way into the
socket provided for this purpose. Otherwise, sparks that result in fire and/or injuries may occur.
8. Do not overload any sockets, extension cords or connector strips; doing so can cause fire or electric
shocks.
9. For measurements in circuits with voltages Vrms > 30 V, suitable measures (e.g. appropriate
measuring equipment, fuse protection, current limiting, electrical separation, insulation) should be
taken to avoid any hazards.
10. Ensure that the connections with information technology equipment, e.g. PCs or other industrial
computers, comply with the IEC60950-1/EN60950-1 or IEC61010-1/EN 61010-1 standards that apply
in each case.
11. Unless expressly permitted, never remove the cover or any part of the housing while the product is in
operation. Doing so will expose circuits and components and can lead to injuries, fire or damage to the
product.
12. If a product is to be permanently installed, the connection between the protective conductor terminal
on site and the product's protective conductor must be made first before any other connection is
made. The product may be installed and connected only by a licensed electrician.
13. For permanently installed equipment without built-in fuses, circuit breakers or similar protective
devices, the supply circuit must be fuse-protected in such a way that anyone who has access to the
product, as well as the product itself, is adequately protected from injury or damage.
14. Use suitable overvoltage protection to ensure that no overvoltage (such as that caused by a bolt of
lightning) can reach the product. Otherwise, the person operating the product will be exposed to the
danger of an electric shock.
15. Any object that is not designed to be placed in the openings of the housing must not be used for this
purpose. Doing so can cause short circuits inside the product and/or electric shocks, fire or injuries.
16. Unless specified otherwise, products are not liquid-proof (see also section "Operating states and
operating positions", item 1). Therefore, the equipment must be protected against penetration by
liquids. If the necessary precautions are not taken, the user may suffer electric shock or the product
itself may be damaged, which can also lead to personal injury.
17. Never use the product under conditions in which condensation has formed or can form in or on the
product, e.g. if the product has been moved from a cold to a warm environment. Penetration by water
increases the risk of electric shock.
18. Prior to cleaning the product, disconnect it completely from the power supply (e.g. AC supply network
or battery). Use a soft, non-linting cloth to clean the product. Never use chemical cleaning agents such
as alcohol, acetone or diluents for cellulose lacquers.

Operation
1. Operating the products requires special training and intense concentration. Make sure that persons
who use the products are physically, mentally and emotionally fit enough to do so; otherwise, injuries
or material damage may occur. It is the responsibility of the employer/operator to select suitable
personnel for operating the products.

1171.0000.42 - 07 Page 4
 Basic Safety Instructions

2. Before you move or transport the product, read and observe the section titled "Transport".
3. As with all industrially manufactured goods, the use of substances that induce an allergic reaction
(allergens) such as nickel cannot be generally excluded. If you develop an allergic reaction (such as a
skin rash, frequent sneezing, red eyes or respiratory difficulties) when using a Rohde & Schwarz
product, consult a physician immediately to determine the cause and to prevent health problems or
stress.
4. Before you start processing the product mechanically and/or thermally, or before you take it apart, be
sure to read and pay special attention to the section titled "Waste disposal/Environmental protection",
item 1.
5. Depending on the function, certain products such as RF radio equipment can produce an elevated
level of electromagnetic radiation. Considering that unborn babies require increased protection,
pregnant women must be protected by appropriate measures. Persons with pacemakers may also be
exposed to risks from electromagnetic radiation. The employer/operator must evaluate workplaces
where there is a special risk of exposure to radiation and, if necessary, take measures to avert the
potential danger.
6. Should a fire occur, the product may release hazardous substances (gases, fluids, etc.) that can
cause health problems. Therefore, suitable measures must be taken, e.g. protective masks and
protective clothing must be worn.
7. Laser products are given warning labels that are standardized according to their laser class. Lasers
can cause biological harm due to the properties of their radiation and due to their extremely
concentrated electromagnetic power. If a laser product (e.g. a CD/DVD drive) is integrated into a
Rohde & Schwarz product, absolutely no other settings or functions may be used as described in the
product documentation. The objective is to prevent personal injury (e.g. due to laser beams).
8. EMC classes (in line with EN 55011/CISPR 11, and analogously with EN 55022/CISPR 22,
EN 55032/CISPR 32)
Class A equipment:
Equipment suitable for use in all environments except residential environments and environments
that are directly connected to a low-voltage supply network that supplies residential buildings
Note: Class A equipment is intended for use in an industrial environment. This equipment may
cause radio disturbances in residential environments, due to possible conducted as well as
radiated disturbances. In this case, the operator may be required to take appropriate measures to
eliminate these disturbances.
Class B equipment:
Equipment suitable for use in residential environments and environments that are directly
connected to a low-voltage supply network that supplies residential buildings

Repair and service

1. The product may be opened only by authorized, specially trained personnel. Before any work is
performed on the product or before the product is opened, it must be disconnected from the AC supply
network. Otherwise, personnel will be exposed to the risk of an electric shock.

1171.0000.42 - 07 Page 5
 Basic Safety Instructions

2. Adjustments, replacement of parts, maintenance and repair may be performed only by electrical
experts authorized by Rohde & Schwarz. Only original parts may be used for replacing parts relevant
to safety (e.g. power switches, power transformers, fuses). A safety test must always be performed
after parts relevant to safety have been replaced (visual inspection, protective conductor test,
insulation resistance measurement, leakage current measurement, functional test). This helps ensure
the continued safety of the product.

Batteries and rechargeable batteries/cells

If the information regarding batteries and rechargeable batteries/cells is not observed either at all or to the
extent necessary, product users may be exposed to the risk of explosions, fire and/or serious personal
injury, and, in some cases, death. Batteries and rechargeable batteries with alkaline electrolytes (e.g.
lithium cells) must be handled in accordance with the EN 62133 standard.
1. Cells must not be taken apart or crushed.
2. Cells or batteries must not be exposed to heat or fire. Storage in direct sunlight must be avoided.
Keep cells and batteries clean and dry. Clean soiled connectors using a dry, clean cloth.
3. Cells or batteries must not be short-circuited. Cells or batteries must not be stored in a box or in a
drawer where they can short-circuit each other, or where they can be short-circuited by other
conductive materials. Cells and batteries must not be removed from their original packaging until they
are ready to be used.
4. Cells and batteries must not be exposed to any mechanical shocks that are stronger than permitted.
5. If a cell develops a leak, the fluid must not be allowed to come into contact with the skin or eyes. If
contact occurs, wash the affected area with plenty of water and seek medical aid.
6. Improperly replacing or charging cells or batteries that contain alkaline electrolytes (e.g. lithium cells)
can cause explosions. Replace cells or batteries only with the matching Rohde & Schwarz type (see
parts list) in order to ensure the safety of the product.
7. Cells and batteries must be recycled and kept separate from residual waste. Rechargeable batteries
and normal batteries that contain lead, mercury or cadmium are hazardous waste. Observe the
national regulations regarding waste disposal and recycling.

Transport
1. The product may be very heavy. Therefore, the product must be handled with care. In some cases,
the user may require a suitable means of lifting or moving the product (e.g. with a lift-truck) to avoid
back or other physical injuries.
2. Handles on the products are designed exclusively to enable personnel to transport the product. It is
therefore not permissible to use handles to fasten the product to or on transport equipment such as
cranes, fork lifts, wagons, etc. The user is responsible for securely fastening the products to or on the
means of transport or lifting. Observe the safety regulations of the manufacturer of the means of
transport or lifting. Noncompliance can result in personal injury or material damage.
3. If you use the product in a vehicle, it is the sole responsibility of the driver to drive the vehicle safely
and properly. The manufacturer assumes no responsibility for accidents or collisions. Never use the
product in a moving vehicle if doing so could distract the driver of the vehicle. Adequately secure the
product in the vehicle to prevent injuries or other damage in the event of an accident.

1171.0000.42 - 07 Page 6
 Instrucciones de seguridad elementales

Waste disposal/Environmental protection

1. Specially marked equipment has a battery or accumulator that must not be disposed of with unsorted
municipal waste, but must be collected separately. It may only be disposed of at a suitable collection
point or via a Rohde & Schwarz customer service center.
2. Waste electrical and electronic equipment must not be disposed of with unsorted municipal waste, but
must be collected separately.
Rohde & Schwarz GmbH & Co. KG has developed a disposal concept and takes full responsibility for
take-back obligations and disposal obligations for manufacturers within the EU. Contact your
Rohde & Schwarz customer service center for environmentally responsible disposal of the product.
3. If products or their components are mechanically and/or thermally processed in a manner that goes
beyond their intended use, hazardous substances (heavy-metal dust such as lead, beryllium, nickel)
may be released. For this reason, the product may only be disassembled by specially trained
personnel. Improper disassembly may be hazardous to your health. National waste disposal
regulations must be observed.
4. If handling the product releases hazardous substances or fuels that must be disposed of in a special
way, e.g. coolants or engine oils that must be replenished regularly, the safety instructions of the
manufacturer of the hazardous substances or fuels and the applicable regional waste disposal
regulations must be observed. Also observe the relevant safety instructions in the product
documentation. The improper disposal of hazardous substances or fuels can cause health problems
and lead to environmental damage.
For additional information about environmental protection, visit the Rohde & Schwarz website.

Instrucciones de seguridad elementales

¡Es imprescindible leer y cumplir las siguientes instrucciones e informaciones de seguridad!
El principio del grupo de empresas Rohde & Schwarz consiste en tener nuestros productos siempre al día
con los estándares de seguridad y de ofrecer a nuestros clientes el máximo grado de seguridad. Nuestros
productos y todos los equipos adicionales son siempre fabricados y examinados según las normas de
seguridad vigentes. Nuestro sistema de garantía de calidad controla constantemente que sean cumplidas
estas normas. El presente producto ha sido fabricado y examinado según el certificado de conformidad
de la UE y ha salido de nuestra planta en estado impecable según los estándares técnicos de seguridad.
Para poder preservar este estado y garantizar un funcionamiento libre de peligros, el usuario deberá
atenerse a todas las indicaciones, informaciones de seguridad y notas de alerta. El grupo de empresas
Rohde & Schwarz está siempre a su disposición en caso de que tengan preguntas referentes a estas
informaciones de seguridad.
Además queda en la responsabilidad del usuario utilizar el producto en la forma debida. Este producto
está destinado exclusivamente al uso en la industria y el laboratorio o, si ha sido expresamente
autorizado, para aplicaciones de campo y de ninguna manera deberá ser utilizado de modo que alguna
persona/cosa pueda sufrir daño. El uso del producto fuera de sus fines definidos o sin tener en cuenta las
instrucciones del fabricante queda en la responsabilidad del usuario. El fabricante no se hace en ninguna
forma responsable de consecuencias a causa del mal uso del producto.

1171.0000.42 - 07 Page 7
 Instrucciones de seguridad elementales

Se parte del uso correcto del producto para los fines definidos si el producto es utilizado conforme a las
indicaciones de la correspondiente documentación del producto y dentro del margen de rendimiento
definido (ver hoja de datos, documentación, informaciones de seguridad que siguen). El uso del producto
hace necesarios conocimientos técnicos y ciertos conocimientos del idioma inglés. Por eso se debe tener
en cuenta que el producto solo pueda ser operado por personal especializado o personas instruidas en
profundidad con las capacidades correspondientes. Si fuera necesaria indumentaria de seguridad para el
uso de productos de Rohde & Schwarz, encontraría la información debida en la documentación del
producto en el capítulo correspondiente. Guarde bien las informaciones de seguridad elementales, así
como la documentación del producto, y entréguelas a usuarios posteriores.
Tener en cuenta las informaciones de seguridad sirve para evitar en lo posible lesiones o daños por
peligros de toda clase. Por eso es imprescindible leer detalladamente y comprender por completo las
siguientes informaciones de seguridad antes de usar el producto, y respetarlas durante el uso del
producto. Deberán tenerse en cuenta todas las demás informaciones de seguridad, como p. ej. las
referentes a la protección de personas, que encontrarán en el capítulo correspondiente de la
documentación del producto y que también son de obligado cumplimiento. En las presentes
informaciones de seguridad se recogen todos los objetos que distribuye el grupo de empresas
Rohde & Schwarz bajo la denominación de "producto", entre ellos también aparatos, instalaciones así
como toda clase de accesorios. Los datos específicos del producto figuran en la hoja de datos y en la
documentación del producto.

Señalización de seguridad de los productos

Las siguientes señales de seguridad se utilizan en los productos para advertir sobre riesgos y peligros.

Símbolo Significado Símbolo Significado

Aviso: punto de peligro general Tensión de alimentación de PUESTA EN

MARCHA / PARADA
Observar la documentación del producto

Atención en el manejo de dispositivos de peso Indicación de estado de espera (standby)

elevado

Peligro de choque eléctrico Corriente continua (DC)

Advertencia: superficie caliente Corriente alterna (AC)

Conexión a conductor de protección Corriente continua / Corriente alterna (DC/AC)

Conexión a tierra El aparato está protegido en su totalidad por un

aislamiento doble (reforzado)

Conexión a masa Distintivo de la UE para baterías y

acumuladores

Más información en la sección

"Eliminación/protección del medio ambiente",
punto 1.

1171.0000.42 - 07 Page 8
 Instrucciones de seguridad elementales

Símbolo Significado Símbolo Significado

Aviso: Cuidado en el manejo de dispositivos Distintivo de la UE para la eliminación por

sensibles a la electrostática (ESD) separado de dispositivos eléctricos y
electrónicos

Más información en la sección

"Eliminación/protección del medio ambiente",
punto 2.

Advertencia: rayo láser

Más información en la sección

"Funcionamiento", punto 7.

Palabras de señal y su significado

En la documentación del producto se utilizan las siguientes palabras de señal con el fin de advertir contra
riesgos y peligros.
Indica una situación de peligro que, si no se evita, causa lesiones
graves o incluso la muerte.
Indica una situación de peligro que, si no se evita, puede causar
lesiones graves o incluso la muerte.
Indica una situación de peligro que, si no se evita, puede causar
lesiones leves o moderadas.
Indica información que se considera importante, pero no en relación
con situaciones de peligro; p. ej., avisos sobre posibles daños
materiales.
En la documentación del producto se emplea de forma sinónima el
término CUIDADO.

Las palabras de señal corresponden a la definición habitual para aplicaciones civiles en el área
económica europea. Pueden existir definiciones diferentes a esta definición en otras áreas económicas o
en aplicaciones militares. Por eso se deberá tener en cuenta que las palabras de señal aquí descritas
sean utilizadas siempre solamente en combinación con la correspondiente documentación del producto y
solamente en combinación con el producto correspondiente. La utilización de las palabras de señal en
combinación con productos o documentaciones que no les correspondan puede llevar a interpretaciones
equivocadas y tener por consecuencia daños en personas u objetos.

Estados operativos y posiciones de funcionamiento

El producto solamente debe ser utilizado según lo indicado por el fabricante respecto a los estados
operativos y posiciones de funcionamiento sin que se obstruya la ventilación. Si no se siguen las
indicaciones del fabricante, pueden producirse choques eléctricos, incendios y/o lesiones graves con
posible consecuencia de muerte. En todos los trabajos deberán ser tenidas en cuenta las normas
nacionales y locales de seguridad del trabajo y de prevención de accidentes.

1171.0000.42 - 07 Page 9
 Instrucciones de seguridad elementales

1. Si no se convino de otra manera, es para los productos Rohde & Schwarz válido lo que sigue:
como posición de funcionamiento se define por principio la posición con el suelo de la caja para
abajo, modo de protección IP 2X, uso solamente en estancias interiores, utilización hasta 2000 m
sobre el nivel del mar, transporte hasta 4500 m sobre el nivel del mar. Se aplicará una tolerancia de
±10 % sobre el voltaje nominal y de ±5 % sobre la frecuencia nominal. Categoría de sobrecarga
eléctrica 2, índice de suciedad 2.
2. No sitúe el producto encima de superficies, vehículos, estantes o mesas, que por sus características
de peso o de estabilidad no sean aptos para él. Siga siempre las instrucciones de instalación del
fabricante cuando instale y asegure el producto en objetos o estructuras (p. ej. paredes y estantes). Si
se realiza la instalación de modo distinto al indicado en la documentación del producto, se pueden
causar lesiones o, en determinadas circunstancias, incluso la muerte.
3. No ponga el producto sobre aparatos que generen calor (p. ej. radiadores o calefactores). La
temperatura ambiente no debe superar la temperatura máxima especificada en la documentación del
producto o en la hoja de datos. En caso de sobrecalentamiento del producto, pueden producirse
choques eléctricos, incendios y/o lesiones graves con posible consecuencia de muerte.

Seguridad eléctrica
Si no se siguen (o se siguen de modo insuficiente) las indicaciones del fabricante en cuanto a seguridad
eléctrica, pueden producirse choques eléctricos, incendios y/o lesiones graves con posible consecuencia
de muerte.
1. Antes de la puesta en marcha del producto se deberá comprobar siempre que la tensión
preseleccionada en el producto coincida con la de la red de alimentación eléctrica. Si es necesario
modificar el ajuste de tensión, también se deberán cambiar en caso dado los fusibles
correspondientes del producto.
2. Los productos de la clase de protección I con alimentación móvil y enchufe individual solamente
podrán enchufarse a tomas de corriente con contacto de seguridad y con conductor de protección
conectado.
3. Queda prohibida la interrupción intencionada del conductor de protección, tanto en la toma de
corriente como en el mismo producto. La interrupción puede tener como consecuencia el riesgo de
que el producto sea fuente de choques eléctricos. Si se utilizan cables alargadores o regletas de
enchufe, deberá garantizarse la realización de un examen regular de los mismos en cuanto a su
estado técnico de seguridad.
4. Si el producto no está equipado con un interruptor para desconectarlo de la red, o bien si el
interruptor existente no resulta apropiado para la desconexión de la red, el enchufe del cable de
conexión se deberá considerar como un dispositivo de desconexión.
El dispositivo de desconexión se debe poder alcanzar fácilmente y debe estar siempre bien accesible.
Si, p. ej., el enchufe de conexión a la red es el dispositivo de desconexión, la longitud del cable de
conexión no debe superar 3 m).
Los interruptores selectores o electrónicos no son aptos para el corte de la red eléctrica. Si se
integran productos sin interruptor en bastidores o instalaciones, se deberá colocar el interruptor en el
nivel de la instalación.
5. No utilice nunca el producto si está dañado el cable de conexión a red. Compruebe regularmente el
correcto estado de los cables de conexión a red. Asegúrese, mediante las medidas de protección y
de instalación adecuadas, de que el cable de conexión a red no pueda ser dañado o de que nadie
pueda ser dañado por él, p. ej. al tropezar o por un choque eléctrico.

1171.0000.42 - 07 Page 10
 Instrucciones de seguridad elementales

6. Solamente está permitido el funcionamiento en redes de alimentación TN/TT aseguradas con fusibles
de 16 A como máximo (utilización de fusibles de mayor amperaje solo previa consulta con el grupo de
empresas Rohde & Schwarz).
7. Nunca conecte el enchufe en tomas de corriente sucias o llenas de polvo. Introduzca el enchufe por
completo y fuertemente en la toma de corriente. La no observación de estas medidas puede provocar
chispas, fuego y/o lesiones.
8. No sobrecargue las tomas de corriente, los cables alargadores o las regletas de enchufe ya que esto
podría causar fuego o choques eléctricos.
9. En las mediciones en circuitos de corriente con una tensión Ueff > 30 V se deberán tomar las medidas
apropiadas para impedir cualquier peligro (p. ej. medios de medición adecuados, seguros, limitación
de tensión, corte protector, aislamiento etc.).
10. Para la conexión con dispositivos informáticos como un PC o un ordenador industrial, debe
comprobarse que éstos cumplan los estándares IEC60950-1/EN60950-1 o IEC61010-1/EN 61010-1
válidos en cada caso.
11. A menos que esté permitido expresamente, no retire nunca la tapa ni componentes de la carcasa
mientras el producto esté en servicio. Esto pone a descubierto los cables y componentes eléctricos y
puede causar lesiones, fuego o daños en el producto.
12. Si un producto se instala en un lugar fijo, se deberá primero conectar el conductor de protección fijo
con el conductor de protección del producto antes de hacer cualquier otra conexión. La instalación y
la conexión deberán ser efectuadas por un electricista especializado.
13. En el caso de dispositivos fijos que no estén provistos de fusibles, interruptor automático ni otros
mecanismos de seguridad similares, el circuito de alimentación debe estar protegido de modo que
todas las personas que puedan acceder al producto, así como el producto mismo, estén a salvo de
posibles daños.
14. Todo producto debe estar protegido contra sobretensión (debida p. ej. a una caída del rayo) mediante
los correspondientes sistemas de protección. Si no, el personal que lo utilice quedará expuesto al
peligro de choque eléctrico.
15. No debe introducirse en los orificios de la caja del aparato ningún objeto que no esté destinado a ello.
Esto puede producir cortocircuitos en el producto y/o puede causar choques eléctricos, fuego o
lesiones.
16. Salvo indicación contraria, los productos no están impermeabilizados (ver también el capítulo
"Estados operativos y posiciones de funcionamiento", punto 1). Por eso es necesario tomar las
medidas necesarias para evitar la entrada de líquidos. En caso contrario, existe peligro de choque
eléctrico para el usuario o de daños en el producto, que también pueden redundar en peligro para las
personas.
17. No utilice el producto en condiciones en las que pueda producirse o ya se hayan producido
condensaciones sobre el producto o en el interior de éste, como p. ej. al desplazarlo de un lugar frío a
otro caliente. La entrada de agua aumenta el riesgo de choque eléctrico.
18. Antes de la limpieza, desconecte por completo el producto de la alimentación de tensión (p. ej. red de
alimentación o batería). Realice la limpieza de los aparatos con un paño suave, que no se deshilache.
No utilice bajo ningún concepto productos de limpieza químicos como alcohol, acetona o diluyentes
para lacas nitrocelulósicas.

1171.0000.42 - 07 Page 11
 Instrucciones de seguridad elementales

Funcionamiento
1. El uso del producto requiere instrucciones especiales y una alta concentración durante el manejo.
Debe asegurarse que las personas que manejen el producto estén a la altura de los requerimientos
necesarios en cuanto a aptitudes físicas, psíquicas y emocionales, ya que de otra manera no se
pueden excluir lesiones o daños de objetos. El empresario u operador es responsable de seleccionar
el personal usuario apto para el manejo del producto.
2. Antes de desplazar o transportar el producto, lea y tenga en cuenta el capítulo "Transporte".
3. Como con todo producto de fabricación industrial no puede quedar excluida en general la posibilidad
de que se produzcan alergias provocadas por algunos materiales empleados Slos llamados
alérgenos (p. ej. el níquel)S. Si durante el manejo de productos Rohde & Schwarz se producen
reacciones alérgicas, como p. ej. irritaciones cutáneas, estornudos continuos, enrojecimiento de la
conjuntiva o dificultades respiratorias, debe avisarse inmediatamente a un médico para investigar las
causas y evitar cualquier molestia o daño a la salud.
4. Antes de la manipulación mecánica y/o térmica o el desmontaje del producto, debe tenerse en cuenta
imprescindiblemente el capítulo "Eliminación/protección del medio ambiente", punto 1.
5. Ciertos productos, como p. ej. las instalaciones de radiocomunicación RF, pueden a causa de su
función natural, emitir una radiación electromagnética aumentada. Deben tomarse todas las medidas
necesarias para la protección de las mujeres embarazadas. También las personas con marcapasos
pueden correr peligro a causa de la radiación electromagnética. El empresario/operador tiene la
obligación de evaluar y señalizar las áreas de trabajo en las que exista un riesgo elevado de
exposición a radiaciones.
6. Tenga en cuenta que en caso de incendio pueden desprenderse del producto sustancias tóxicas
(gases, líquidos etc.) que pueden generar daños a la salud. Por eso, en caso de incendio deben
usarse medidas adecuadas, como p. ej. máscaras antigás e indumentaria de protección.
7. Los productos con láser están provistos de indicaciones de advertencia normalizadas en función de la
clase de láser del que se trate. Los rayos láser pueden provocar daños de tipo biológico a causa de
las propiedades de su radiación y debido a su concentración extrema de potencia electromagnética.
En caso de que un producto Rohde & Schwarz contenga un producto láser (p. ej. un lector de
CD/DVD), no debe usarse ninguna otra configuración o función aparte de las descritas en la
documentación del producto, a fin de evitar lesiones (p. ej. debidas a irradiación láser).
8. Clases de compatibilidad electromagnética (conforme a EN 55011 / CISPR 11; y en analogía con EN
55022 / CISPR 22, EN 55032 / CISPR 32)
Aparato de clase A:
Aparato adecuado para su uso en todos los entornos excepto en los residenciales y en aquellos
conectados directamente a una red de distribución de baja tensión que suministra corriente a
edificios residenciales.
Nota: Los aparatos de clase A están destinados al uso en entornos industriales. Estos aparatos
pueden causar perturbaciones radioeléctricas en entornos residenciales debido a posibles
perturbaciones guiadas o radiadas. En este caso, se le podrá solicitar al operador que tome las
medidas adecuadas para eliminar estas perturbaciones.
Aparato de clase B:
Aparato adecuado para su uso en entornos residenciales, así como en aquellos conectados
directamente a una red de distribución de baja tensión que suministra corriente a edificios
residenciales.

1171.0000.42 - 07 Page 12
 Instrucciones de seguridad elementales

Reparación y mantenimiento
1. El producto solamente debe ser abierto por personal especializado con autorización para ello. Antes
de manipular el producto o abrirlo, es obligatorio desconectarlo de la tensión de alimentación, para
evitar toda posibilidad de choque eléctrico.
2. El ajuste, el cambio de partes, el mantenimiento y la reparación deberán ser efectuadas solamente
por electricistas autorizados por Rohde & Schwarz. Si se reponen partes con importancia para los
aspectos de seguridad (p. ej. el enchufe, los transformadores o los fusibles), solamente podrán ser
sustituidos por partes originales. Después de cada cambio de partes relevantes para la seguridad
deberá realizarse un control de seguridad (control a primera vista, control del conductor de
protección, medición de resistencia de aislamiento, medición de la corriente de fuga, control de
funcionamiento). Con esto queda garantizada la seguridad del producto.

Baterías y acumuladores o celdas

Si no se siguen (o se siguen de modo insuficiente) las indicaciones en cuanto a las baterías y
acumuladores o celdas, pueden producirse explosiones, incendios y/o lesiones graves con posible
consecuencia de muerte. El manejo de baterías y acumuladores con electrolitos alcalinos (p. ej. celdas de
litio) debe seguir el estándar EN 62133.
1. No deben desmontarse, abrirse ni triturarse las celdas.
2. Las celdas o baterías no deben someterse a calor ni fuego. Debe evitarse el almacenamiento a la luz
directa del sol. Las celdas y baterías deben mantenerse limpias y secas. Limpiar las conexiones
sucias con un paño seco y limpio.
3. Las celdas o baterías no deben cortocircuitarse. Es peligroso almacenar las celdas o baterías en
estuches o cajones en cuyo interior puedan cortocircuitarse por contacto recíproco o por contacto con
otros materiales conductores. No deben extraerse las celdas o baterías de sus embalajes originales
hasta el momento en que vayan a utilizarse.
4. Las celdas o baterías no deben someterse a impactos mecánicos fuertes indebidos.
5. En caso de falta de estanqueidad de una celda, el líquido vertido no debe entrar en contacto con la
piel ni los ojos. Si se produce contacto, lavar con agua abundante la zona afectada y avisar a un
médico.
6. En caso de cambio o recarga inadecuados, las celdas o baterías que contienen electrolitos alcalinos
(p. ej. las celdas de litio) pueden explotar. Para garantizar la seguridad del producto, las celdas o
baterías solo deben ser sustituidas por el tipo Rohde & Schwarz correspondiente (ver lista de
recambios).
7. Las baterías y celdas deben reciclarse y no deben tirarse a la basura doméstica. Las baterías o
acumuladores que contienen plomo, mercurio o cadmio deben tratarse como residuos especiales.
Respete en esta relación las normas nacionales de eliminación y reciclaje.

Transporte
1. El producto puede tener un peso elevado. Por eso es necesario desplazarlo o transportarlo con
precaución y, si es necesario, usando un sistema de elevación adecuado (p. ej. una carretilla
elevadora), a fin de evitar lesiones en la espalda u otros daños personales.

1171.0000.42 - 07 Page 13
 Instrucciones de seguridad elementales

2. Las asas instaladas en los productos sirven solamente de ayuda para el transporte del producto por
personas. Por eso no está permitido utilizar las asas para la sujeción en o sobre medios de transporte
como p. ej. grúas, carretillas elevadoras de horquilla, carros etc. Es responsabilidad suya fijar los
productos de manera segura a los medios de transporte o elevación. Para evitar daños personales o
daños en el producto, siga las instrucciones de seguridad del fabricante del medio de transporte o
elevación utilizado.
3. Si se utiliza el producto dentro de un vehículo, recae de manera exclusiva en el conductor la
responsabilidad de conducir el vehículo de manera segura y adecuada. El fabricante no asumirá
ninguna responsabilidad por accidentes o colisiones. No utilice nunca el producto dentro de un
vehículo en movimiento si esto pudiera distraer al conductor. Asegure el producto dentro del vehículo
debidamente para evitar, en caso de un accidente, lesiones u otra clase de daños.

Eliminación/protección del medio ambiente

1. Los dispositivos marcados contienen una batería o un acumulador que no se debe desechar con los
residuos domésticos sin clasificar, sino que debe ser recogido por separado. La eliminación se debe
efectuar exclusivamente a través de un punto de recogida apropiado o del servicio de atención al
cliente de Rohde & Schwarz.
2. Los dispositivos eléctricos usados no se deben desechar con los residuos domésticos sin clasificar,
sino que deben ser recogidos por separado.
Rohde & Schwarz GmbH & Co.KG ha elaborado un concepto de eliminación de residuos y asume
plenamente los deberes de recogida y eliminación para los fabricantes dentro de la UE. Para
desechar el producto de manera respetuosa con el medio ambiente, diríjase a su servicio de atención
al cliente de Rohde & Schwarz.
3. Si se trabaja de manera mecánica y/o térmica cualquier producto o componente más allá del
funcionamiento previsto, pueden liberarse sustancias peligrosas (polvos con contenido de metales
pesados como p. ej. plomo, berilio o níquel). Por eso el producto solo debe ser desmontado por
personal especializado con formación adecuada. Un desmontaje inadecuado puede ocasionar daños
para la salud. Se deben tener en cuenta las directivas nacionales referentes a la eliminación de
residuos.
4. En caso de que durante el trato del producto se formen sustancias peligrosas o combustibles que
deban tratarse como residuos especiales (p. ej. refrigerantes o aceites de motor con intervalos de
cambio definidos), deben tenerse en cuenta las indicaciones de seguridad del fabricante de dichas
sustancias y las normas regionales de eliminación de residuos. Tenga en cuenta también en caso
necesario las indicaciones de seguridad especiales contenidas en la documentación del producto. La
eliminación incorrecta de sustancias peligrosas o combustibles puede causar daños a la salud o
daños al medio ambiente.
Se puede encontrar más información sobre la protección del medio ambiente en la página web de
Rohde & Schwarz.

1171.0000.42 - 07 Page 14
Customer Support
Technical support – where and when you need it
For quick, expert help with any Rohde & Schwarz equipment, contact one of our Customer Support
Centers. A team of highly qualified engineers provides telephone support and will work with you to find a
solution to your query on any aspect of the operation, programming or applications of Rohde & Schwarz
equipment.

Up-to-date information and upgrades

To keep your instrument up-to-date and to be informed about new application notes related to your
instrument, please send an e-mail to the Customer Support Center stating your instrument and your wish.
We will take care that you will get the right information.

Europe, Africa, Middle East Phone +49 89 4129 12345

[email protected]

North America Phone 1-888-TEST-RSA (1-888-837-8772)

[email protected]

Latin America Phone +1-410-910-7988

[email protected]

Asia/Pacific Phone +65 65 13 04 88

[email protected]

China Phone +86-800-810-8228 /

+86-400-650-5896
[email protected]

1171.0200.22-06.00
R&S FSC Table of Contents

Table of Contents

Documentation Overview ................................................................... 6

Conventions Used in the Documentation ......................................... 7

1 Operating the R&S FSC ...................................................................... 8

1.1 Screen Layout and Elements......................................................................................8
1.2 Means of Input..............................................................................................................9
1.2.1 Using the Alphanumeric Keys ........................................................................................9
1.2.2 Confirming and Cancelling Entries ..............................................................................10
1.2.3 Using the Rotary Knob .................................................................................................10
1.2.4 Using the Cursor Keys .................................................................................................11
1.2.5 Remote Operation........................................................................................................11
1.3 Presetting the R&S FSC ............................................................................................12
1.4 Configuring Measurements ......................................................................................12
1.5 Configuring the Instrument ......................................................................................12
1.6 Taking Screenshots ...................................................................................................13
1.7 Managing Datasets ....................................................................................................14
1.7.1 Saving Datasets ...........................................................................................................15
1.7.2 Restoring Datasets ......................................................................................................19
1.7.3 Deleting Datasets.........................................................................................................20
1.8 Updating the Firmware ..............................................................................................21

2 Spectrum Analyzer Mode ................................................................. 22

2.1 Performing Spectrum Measurements ......................................................................22
2.1.1 Measuring the Channel Power of Continuously Modulated Signals ............................22
2.1.2 Measuring the Occupied Bandwidth ............................................................................26
2.1.3 Power Measurements on TDMA Signals .....................................................................30
2.1.4 Measuring the Adjacent Channel Leakage Ratio (ACLR) ...........................................33
2.1.5 Measuring the Spectrum Emission Mask ....................................................................41
2.1.6 Measuring the Harmonic Distortion .............................................................................44
2.1.7 Measuring the AM Modulation Depth ..........................................................................46
2.2 Configuring Spectrum Measurements ....................................................................48

Operating Manual 1173.0966.12 - 07 1

R&S FSC Table of Contents

2.2.1 Configuring the Horizontal Axis ...................................................................................48

2.2.2 Configuring the Vertical Axis ........................................................................................51
2.2.3 Setting Bandwidths ......................................................................................................55
2.2.4 Configuring and Triggering the Sweep ........................................................................58
2.2.5 Working with Traces ....................................................................................................63
2.2.6 Using Markers ..............................................................................................................68
2.2.7 Using Display Lines .....................................................................................................76
2.2.8 Using Limit Lines..........................................................................................................77
2.3 Working with Channel Tables ...................................................................................80
2.4 Using Transducer Factors ........................................................................................81
2.4.1 Unit for Measurements with Transducers ....................................................................82
2.4.2 Setting the Reference Level ........................................................................................82
2.4.3 Frequency Range of Transducer .................................................................................83
2.4.4 Data Sets Containing Transducer Factors ..................................................................83

3 Power Sensors .................................................................................. 84

3.1 Using a Power Sensor ...............................................................................................84
3.1.1 Connecting a Power Sensor ........................................................................................85
3.1.2 Performing and Configuring Measurements ................................................................86

4 Network Analyzer Mode ................................................................... 89

4.1 Calibrating Measurements ........................................................................................90
4.2 Performing Scalar Measurements............................................................................93
4.2.1 Measuring the Transmission ....................................................................................93
4.3 Evaluating the Results ..............................................................................................94
4.3.1 Configuring the Vertical Axis ........................................................................................94
4.3.2 Using Markers ..............................................................................................................96
4.3.3 Working with Channel Tables ......................................................................................96
4.3.4 Using Limit Lines..........................................................................................................97
4.3.5 Using Trace Mathematics ............................................................................................97

5 Menu and Softkey Overview ............................................................ 98

5.1 General Functions .....................................................................................................98
5.1.1 General R&S FSC Setup .............................................................................................98
5.1.2 File Management .........................................................................................................99

Operating Manual 1173.0966.12 - 07 2

R&S FSC Table of Contents

5.1.3 Operating Mode Selection ...........................................................................................99

5.2 Functions of the Spectrum Analyzer .....................................................................100
5.2.1 Measurement Selection .............................................................................................100
5.2.2 Frequency Parameters ..............................................................................................102
5.2.3 Span Selection ...........................................................................................................102
5.2.4 Amplitude Parameters ...............................................................................................102
5.2.5 Sweep Configuration .................................................................................................103
5.2.6 Bandwidth Selection ..................................................................................................103
5.2.7 Trace Functionality.....................................................................................................103
5.2.8 Display and Limit Lines ..............................................................................................103
5.2.9 Markers ......................................................................................................................104
5.3 Functions of the Network Analyzer........................................................................105
5.3.1 Measurement Configuration ......................................................................................105
5.3.2 Frequency Parameters ..............................................................................................105
5.3.3 Span Selection ...........................................................................................................105
5.3.4 Amplitude Parameters ...............................................................................................106
5.3.5 Sweep Configuration .................................................................................................106
5.3.6 Bandwidth Selection ..................................................................................................106
5.3.7 Trace Functionality.....................................................................................................106
5.3.8 Limit Lines ..................................................................................................................107
5.3.9 Markers ......................................................................................................................107
5.4 Functions of the Power Meter ................................................................................108
5.4.1 Power Meter Measurements ......................................................................................108
5.4.2 Frequency Parameters ..............................................................................................108
5.4.3 Amplitude Parameters ...............................................................................................108

6 How a Spectrum Analyzer Works .................................................. 109

7 Remote Control ............................................................................... 114

7.1 Interfaces and Protocols .........................................................................................114
7.1.1 LAN Interface .............................................................................................................115
7.1.2 USB Interface.............................................................................................................115
7.1.3 Protocols ....................................................................................................................115
7.2 Setting Up the Remote Control Connection .........................................................117
7.2.1 Preparing for Remote Control ....................................................................................117

Operating Manual 1173.0966.12 - 07 3

R&S FSC Table of Contents

7.3 Instrument Model and Command Processing ......................................................118

7.3.1 Input Unit ....................................................................................................................118
7.3.2 Command Recognition ..............................................................................................119
7.3.3 Data Base and Instrument Hardware ........................................................................119
7.3.4 Status Reporting System ...........................................................................................119
7.3.5 Output Unit .................................................................................................................120
7.4 SCPI Command Structure and Syntax ..................................................................120
7.4.1 Structure of a Command ............................................................................................120
7.4.2 Parameters ................................................................................................................125
7.4.3 Structure of a Program Message ...............................................................................128
7.4.4 Responses to Queries ...............................................................................................129
7.5 Command Sequence and Command Synchronization ........................................130

8 Remote Control – Commands ....................................................... 131

8.1 Common Commands ...............................................................................................132
8.2 Remote Commands of the Spectrum Analyzer ....................................................135
8.2.1 Configuring the Horizontal Axis .................................................................................135
8.2.2 Configuring the Vertical Axis ......................................................................................140
8.2.3 Setting the Bandwidths ..............................................................................................146
8.2.4 Performing and Triggering Measurements ................................................................148
8.2.5 Working with Traces ..................................................................................................154
8.2.6 Using Markers ............................................................................................................159
8.2.7 Using Display Lines and Limit Lines ..........................................................................174
8.2.8 Configuring and Using Measurement Functions .......................................................180
8.3 Remote Commands of the Network Analyzer Mode ............................................206
8.3.1 Configuring the Horizontal Axis .................................................................................206
8.3.2 Configuring the Vertical Axis ......................................................................................206
8.3.3 Setting the Bandwidths ..............................................................................................209
8.3.4 Performing and Triggering the Measurement ............................................................209
8.3.5 Working with Traces ..................................................................................................209
8.3.6 Using Markers and Deltamarkers ..............................................................................210
8.3.7 Configuring the Measurement ...................................................................................214
8.4 Remote Commands of the Power Meter ................................................................216
8.4.1 Setting the Frequency ................................................................................................216

Operating Manual 1173.0966.12 - 07 4

R&S FSC Table of Contents

8.4.2 Configuring Power Level Readout .............................................................................216

8.4.3 Performing Measurements with the Power Sensor ...................................................218
8.5 File Management ......................................................................................................220
8.6 Making and Storing Screenshots ...........................................................................227
8.7 Configuring Data Capture .......................................................................................228
8.8 Configuring the Instrument ....................................................................................230
8.8.1 Mode Selection ..........................................................................................................230
8.8.2 Display Configuration .................................................................................................231
8.8.3 Audio Settings ............................................................................................................232
8.8.4 Setting up a Network Connection ..............................................................................233
8.8.5 System Settings .........................................................................................................236
8.9 Status Reporting System ........................................................................................245
8.9.1 Structure of an SCPI Status Register ........................................................................245
8.9.2 Overview of the Status Register ................................................................................247
8.9.3 Status Byte (STB) & Service Request Enable Register (SRE) .................................248
8.9.4 Event Status Register (ESR) and Event Status Enable Register (ESE) ...................249
8.9.5 Application of the Status Reporting Systems ............................................................252
8.9.6 Reset Values of the Status Reporting System ..........................................................254
8.9.7 Remote Commands of the Status Reporting System ................................................255

Alphabetical List of Remote Commands ...................................... 260

Index ................................................................................................ 267

Operating Manual 1173.0966.12 - 07 5

R&S FSC Documentation Overview

Documentation Overview
The user documentation for the R&S FSC is divided as follows:

Quick Start Guide

The Quick Start Guide provides basic information on the instrument's functions.
It covers the following topics:
● overview of all elements of the front and rear panels
● basic information on how to set up the R&S FSC
● information on how to operate the R&S FSC in a network
● instructions on how to perform measurements

Operating Manual
The Operating Manual provides a detailed description on the instrument's functions
It covers the following topics:
● instructions on how to set up and operate the R&S FSC in its various operating
modes
● instructions on how to perform measurements with the R&S FSC
● instructions on how to work with the available software options and applications

Service Manual
The Service Manual provides information on maintenance.
It covers the following topics:
● instructions on how to perform a performance test
● instructions on how to repair the R&S FSC including a spare parts list
● mechanical drawings

Release Notes
The release notes describe the installation of the firmware, new and modified
functions, eliminated problems, and last minute changes to the documentation. The
corresponding firmware version is indicated on the title page of the release notes. The
current release notes are provided on the internet.

Internet Site
The internet site at: http://www.rohde-schwarz.com/product/fsc.html provides the most
up to date information on the R&S FSC. The most recent manuals are available as
printable PDF files in the download area.
Also provided for download are firmware updates including the corresponding release
notes, instrument drivers, current data sheets, application notes and image versions.

Operating Manual 1173.0966.12 - 07 6

R&S FSC Conventions Used in the Documentation

Conventions Used in the Documentation

The following conventions are used throughout the R&S R&S FSC Operating Manual:

Typographical conventions

Convention Description

“Graphical user interface elements” All names of graphical user interface elements both on the screen
and on the front and rear panels, such as dialog boxes, softkeys,
menus, options, buttons etc., are enclosed by quotation marks.

“KEYS” Key names are written in capital letters and enclosed by quotation
marks.

Input Input to be entered by the user is displayed in italics.

File names, commands, File names, commands, coding samples and screen output are
program code distinguished by their font.

"Links" Links that you can click are displayed in blue font.

"References" References to other parts of the documentation are enclosed by

quotation marks.

Other conventions
● Remote commands: Remote commands may include abbreviations to simplify
input. In the description of such commands, all parts that have to be entered are
written in capital letters. Additional text in lower-case characters is for information
only.

Operating Manual 1173.0966.12 - 07 7

R&S FSC Table of Contents

1 Operating the R&S FSC

This chapter provides information about basic functionality and about the user interface
of the R&S FSC.

1.1 Screen Layout and Elements

The following figure shows the screen layout in cable and antenna test operating
mode. It shows all elements that are the same for all operating modes of the R&S FSC.
Screen layouts that show specifics for each operating mode or measurement are
provided in the corresponding sections of this manual.

1 Measurement information 11 Active menu item

2 Date and time 12 Unavailable menu item

3 Hardware settings 13 Selectable menu item

4 Marker information 14 Currently selected menu item

5 Reference position 15 Input field

6 Invalid trace indicator and 16 Vertical axis labeling

overload information

7 Diagram 17 Selectable softkey

8 Marker 18 Active softkey function

9 Trace 19 Unavailable softkey

10 Horizontal axis labeling 20 Currently selected softkey

Operating Manual 1173.0966.12 - 07 8

R&S FSC Table of Contents

1.2 Means of Input

The user interface of the R&S FSC provides several elements for you to input data.

1 Alphanumeric keys
2 Unit keys
3 Enter key
4 Cancel key
5 Back key

1.2.1 Using the Alphanumeric Keys

Using the alphanumeric keys, you can enter numeric values or characters. The
alphanumeric keys include the numbers from 0 to 9, the alphabet, a minus sign and
dot.
If you have to enter a numeric value, press the corresponding key. In case of numeric
values, each key covers just the number that's printed on it.
You can enter negative values with the minus sign key and enter values that contain
decimal places with the dot key.
If the R&S FSC asks you to enter a character or you need to enter a character (e.g. file
names), the key assignment changes. Each key covers one number and more than
one character with the first choice being a character. If you need to enter a character,
press the key several times until the character you require is selected. The following
table shows an overview of character assignment.
You can correct entries with the BACK key. The BACK key moves the cursor one
position backwards and deletes the character that was in that place.

Operating Manual 1173.0966.12 - 07 9

R&S FSC Table of Contents

1.2.2 Confirming and Cancelling Entries

Depending on the input you have made, there are several ways to confirm entries.
● Values without unit or values that have a fixed unit that you enter in an input field
can be confirmed with the ENTER key or by pressing the center of the rotary knob.
Alternatively, you can confirm such an entry by pressing the softkey that has
opened the input field in question.
● Values that have flexible units, like frequency or time, can be confirmed with one of
the unit keys.
If you confirm a such a value with the ENTER key, the R&S FSC always uses the
smallest possible unit (e.g. Hz).
● If you have opened a submenu or input field by accident, you can close it without
making any changes with the CANCEL key.

1.2.3 Using the Rotary Knob

Using the rotary knob, you can do several things.

● The rotary knob works like a cursor key in dialog boxes or softkey submenus. In
that case you can navigate to one of the items with the rotary knob. If the dialog
box covers more than one screen page, it also scrolls through the dialog box.
Turning it to the right corresponds to a downward movement. Moving it to the left to
an upward movement.
● The rotary knob increases or decreases any kind of numeric value if an input field
is active.
Turning it to the right corresponds to an increase, turning it to the left to a decrease
of a numeric value.
In most cases, the rotary knob changes numeric values with a fixed step size.
● The rotary knob moves markers around.
Again the step size is fixed.
● Pressing the rotary knob has the same effect as pressing the ENTER key as it
confirms an entry or selection.

Operating Manual 1173.0966.12 - 07 10

R&S FSC Table of Contents

1.2.4 Using the Cursor Keys

Using the cursor keys, you can do several things.

● The cursor keys navigate through dialog boxes or softkey submenus.
● The up and down keys increase or decrease any kind of numeric value if an input
field is active.
The cursor keys change numeric values with a fixed step size.
● The up and down keys move markers around.
The step size is fixed.
● The left and right keys move the cursor in an input field in the corresponding
direction.

1.2.5 Remote Operation

Remote operation is a way to control the R&S FSC from another device like a PC. To
use the R&S FSC this way, you have to establish a connection between both devices
via the LAN or USB interfaces of the R&S FSC.
The product range of the R&S FSC provides several tools for remote operation.

Remote control
The R&S FSC-K40 is a firmware option to control the R&S FSC with remote control
commands that are compatible to the SCPI standard.
You can download the user manual for the R&S FSC-K40 from the R&S website.

Remote desktop with R&S FSCView

The remote desktop is an application provided by the R&S FSCView software. You can
use it to access and control the R&S FSC in the R&S FSCView environment.
While the R&S FSC is running and connected to the control computer, the screen
contents and control elements (keys, softkeys etc.) are displayed. Thus, you can
operate the R&S FSC just like the hardware itself.
► Connect the R&S FSC to the control computer.
► Start the R&S FSCView software.
► Press the "Remote Display" button ( ) in the user interface.
The software opens the remote display to operate the R&S FSC remotely.

Operating Manual 1173.0966.12 - 07 11

R&S FSC Table of Contents

1.3 Presetting the R&S FSC

Before you prepare a measurement, it is recommended to preset the R&S FSC. During
a preset, the R&S FSC resets all settings to their default state. Restoring the default
configuration has the advantage that old settings do not affect measurements.
The default setup is specific to the operating mode.
► Press the PRESET key.
The R&S FSC restores its default setup.
You can also define your own default settings via a dataset. These are then loaded
after pressing the PRESET key instead of the factory default.
► Press the SETUP key.
► Press the "User Preferences" softkey.
► Select the "Preset Dataset" menu item.
The R&S FSC opens a dialog box to select the dataset that contains the settings
you would like to have as the preset settings.
► Select the dataset with the settings you want.
► Select the "Preset Mode" menu item in the "User Preferences" dialog box.
► Select the "User Defined" item from the dropdown menu.
The R&S FSC now loads the settings of the dataset after you press PRESET.

1.4 Configuring Measurements

The "Measurement Setup" dialog box provides an overview of the current configuration
of the R&S FSC. In addition, you can also change the configuration in this dialog box.
► Press the SETUP key.
► Press the "Measurement Setup" softkey.
► Select one of the menu items and change the settings as you like.
Note that the contents of the "Measurement Setup" dialog box are customized for each
operating mode of the R&S FSC. Therefore, the order and number of displayed
settings is different in each mode.

1.5 Configuring the Instrument

The "Instrument Setup" dialog box contains functionality that is independent of the
operating mode.

Operating Manual 1173.0966.12 - 07 12

R&S FSC Table of Contents

1.6 Taking Screenshots

You can take and store a screenshot of the current screen anytime with the HCOPY
key.
► Press the HCOPY key.
The R&S FSC takes a screenshot.
If available, the R&S FSC stores the screenshot on an external storage device (USB
memory stick or SD card). If both are connected, the R&S FSC uses the SD card.
If no external device is available, the R&S FSC stores the screenshot in its internal
memory (if there is enough left). In that case you can transfer the pictures with the
R&S FSCView software to your computer.

Saving screenshot and dataset at the same time

Depending on the "Capture" settings available in the "User Preference" menu, using
the HCOPY key also saves a dataset in addition to the screenshot.
For more information see "Managing Datasets" on page 14.

Screenshot file name

All screenshots get a default file name "Screenshot####". The files also get numbers
(####) in ascending order, beginning with 0000. You can select a default file name and
start number in the "User Preference" menu.
► Press the SETUP key.
► Press the "User Preference" softkey.
► Select the "Default Filename" and "File Name Counter Starts At" items and assign
a file name and number as you wish.

Screenshot file format

The file format of screenshots is either *.png or *.jpg, depending on your configuration
in the "User Preference" menu.
► Press the SETUP key.
► Press the "User Preference" softkey.
► Select the "Capture Screen Format" item to select the screenshot file format.

Previewing screenshots
If you want to make sure if a screenshot you took contains the wanted information, you
can preview screenshots on the R&S FSC.
► Press the SAVE/RECALL key.
► Press the "Recall Screenshot" softkey.
The R&S FSC opens a dialog box to select a screenshot for the preview.

Operating Manual 1173.0966.12 - 07 13

R&S FSC Table of Contents

1.7 Managing Datasets

The R&S FSC provides functionality to manage (save, restore etc.) datasets available
in its internal memory or an external storage device.

Datasets
Basically, the R&S FSC supports various types of datasets. The instructions below
primarily describe managing datasets that you create on the R&S FSC during
measurements, for example measurement results and configurations. Note that these
datasets have the file extension .set.
Datasets with the file extension .set are an image of measurement results and
configurations. Thus, you can subsequently reproduce the context of the
measurement.
You can use datasets for documentation, for example, or use them for a more detailed
analysis later on (for example with the R&S FSCView software). Note that datasets
also contain calibration data if calibration has been performed.

Templates
The R&S FSC also supports various other types of datasets (or templates). Such
templates mainly contain additional requirements for a particular measurement, like
limit lines or channel tables.
Creating and editing these templates is only possible with the functionality provided by
the R&S FSCView software package. Note that the file extension depends on the
application of the template. For example, a template containing a channel table has the
extension .chntab.
For more information on working with templates refer to the documentation of the
R&S FSCView software package.

Data synchronization
The R&S FSCView features a data synchronization that matches the data available on
the R&S FSC and that on the computer with the R&S FSCView installation.
► Press the "Synchronization Control" ( ) button.
The software opens another dialog box to control synchronization.
By default, the software synchronizes a selected set of data, depending on the
synchronization direction.
● Synchronization from PC to R&S FSC: button
Updates all files on the R&S FSC that have been created or edited with the
R&S FSCView software package (cable models, limit lines, transducers, channel
tables etc.).
● Synchronization from R&S FSC to PC: button
Updates all files on the PC that have been created on the R&S FSC (datasets,
screenshots and wizard results).

Operating Manual 1173.0966.12 - 07 14

R&S FSC Table of Contents

Removing outdated files

When you turn on "Remove Orphans", the software removes all files from the
R&S FSC that it cannot find on the PC.

Alternatively, you can synchronize all files at the same time

(templates and datasets) in one direction (PC to R&S FSC
or R&S FSC to PC), regardless of the file type.
► Turn on "Synchronize All".

► Press either the "FSH ← PC" button to update all files on the R&S FSC based on
the data available on the PC or the "FSH → PC" button to update the files on the
PC based on the data available on the R&S FSC.

1.7.1 Saving Datasets

The R&S FSC allows you to save the data that is currently analyzed at any time.
► Press the SAVE/RECALL key.
The R&S FSC opens the file manager.
► Press the "Save" softkey.
The R&S FSC opens the "Save Dataset" dialog box.

1 Available datasets and folder structure

2 Dataset name input field
3 Remaining memory on selected data storage device
4 File manager softkey menu

Operating Manual 1173.0966.12 - 07 15

R&S FSC Table of Contents

The folder structure shows all available data storage devices. Possible storage devices
are the internal memory of the R&S FSC or a memory stick.
The default storage device depends on which devices are connected to the R&S FSC.
● If a memory stick is connected, datasets are always stored there first.
● The internal memory is used only if no memory stick is connected.
The internal memory provides approximately 20 MB of data, therefore the number of
datasets you save on the R&S FSC is limited. Each dataset needs about 100 kB of
memory, but this value can vary.
If you are using an external storage device, the number of datasets you can save is
limited only by the size of the storage device.
The R&S FSC shows the remaining memory on the storage device in the dialog box.
► Select the storage device you want to save the data to.
► Select the folder you want to save the data to.
► Enter a file name in the corresponding input field.
The default file name for datasets is "Dataset###.set" with a new number in
ascending order for each new dataset. The file extension for datasets is .set.
If you enter another name, the R&S FSC uses that name and assigns a new
number to the file name if you save the data set the next time. This function allows
you to assign consecutive dataset file names without entering a new name every
time you want to save a dataset.
You can enter the file name with the alphanumeric keypad. Each key covers more
than one character. To get the character you want, press the key in question the
appropiate number of times.
► Press the "Save" softkey.
The R&S FSC saves the dataset.

1.7.1.1 Alternative Ways to Save Datasets

The R&S FSC provides alternative and more comfortable ways to save datasets.

Using the HCOPY key

You can configure the HCOPY key to take a screenshot as well as saving a dataset.
► Press the SETUP key.
► Press the "User Preference" softkey.
► Select the "Capture Mode" item.
● Select "Screen" to capture only the screenshot.
● Select "Dataset" to capture only the dataset.
● Select "Screen + Dataset" to capture both screenshot and dataset.
Pressing the HCOPY key saves the selected data of the current measurement.

Operating Manual 1173.0966.12 - 07 16

R&S FSC Table of Contents

1.7.1.2 Renaming File Names

If necessary, you can rename files or file directories directly on the R&S FSC.
► Enter the "File Manager".
► Select the file or directory you want to rename.
► Press the "Select Action" softkey.
► Select the "Rename" menu item.
The R&S FSC opens an input field to change the name of the file.

1.7.1.3 Quick Naming of Datasets

The R&S FSC provides a quick naming feature that speeds up the process of naming
a file.

Putting together a file name

Basically, using the quick naming feature is a way of compiling a file name by putting
one or more predefined text modules or terms together in a logical way.
The various terms are combined in a table, each cell of which contains one term. The
table consists of 120 cells. You can define the contents of each cell freely.
► Press the SAVE/RECALL key.
► Press the "Save" softkey.
► Press the "Quick Naming" softkey.
The R&S FSC opens a dialog box that contains the terms.
► Select the term you want to add with the cursor keys.
► Press ENTER to add the term to
the file name.
The current file name is displayed
in the line above the table.
So, if you perform, for example, an
ACLR measurement of an uplink
LTE signal at a certain location,
you might want that information in
the file name:
'Site_LTE_UL_ACLR'

► Press the "OK" softkey to exit the quick naming table.

After you have exited the table, the file name appears in the "Save as:" field in the
"Save Dataset" dialog box. If necessary, you can then add additional characters.

Operating Manual 1173.0966.12 - 07 17

R&S FSC Table of Contents

Note that by default, the R&S FSC adds a term without separators between each term.
If you need a separator between the term, you can add a blank space or an
underscore.
► After having added a term, press the "_" softkey or the "Space" softkey.
Or to add a separator automatically upon adding a term.
► Press the "Auto Insert" softkey.
► Select the "Off" menu item to add no separator, the "_" menu item to add an
underscore or the "Space" menu item to add a blank space.

Designing a quick naming table

The firmware of the R&S FSC already has some basic mobile communication terms in
the table. However, you can add up to 120 terms to the table.
► Press the SAVE/RECALL key.
► Press the "Save" softkey.
► Press the "Quick Naming" softkey.
► Select one of the table cells with the cursor keys.
► Press the "Change Table Item" softkey.
The R&S FSC opens an input field to define a term for the cell.
► Define a term with the number keys and confirm the term with ENTER.
The R&S FSC adds the term to the table.
You can create and edit quick naming tables with the R&S FSCView software package
and then transfer them into the internal memory of the R&S FSC.
► In the "Quick Naming" softkey menu, press the "Import" softkey.
► Select the "Import Quick Naming Table" menu item.
The R&S FSC opens a dialog box to select a file to import.
The same way, you can also export a quick naming table.
► In the "Quick Naming" softkey menu, press the "Export" softkey.
► Select the "Export Quick Naming Table" menu item.

1.7.1.4 Converting Dataset File Types

The functionality of the R&S FSCView software allows you to convert a dataset of the
file type *.set into the *.csv format.
The conversion is possible with a command line option for the FSCView.exe file.
The general syntax you have to use is:
FSCView.exe -csv "<InputDataset.set>" "<DestinationFile.csv>"
Note that you have to use quotation marks for the file name if it contains blank spaces.

Operating Manual 1173.0966.12 - 07 18

R&S FSC Table of Contents

Example:
FSCView.exe -csv 'Dataset.set' 'Dataset.csv'
Renames the file Datset.set into Dataset.csv.

Environment variables
The command line option only works if you execute the command from the installation
folder of R&S FSCView software.
Otherwise, you have to set a "Path" environment variable to the destination of the
location of the .exe file.
You can access the environment variable via the MS Windows control panel.
"Start Menu"  "Control Panel"  "System"  "Advanced System Settings"
 "Advanced" tab
 "Environment Variables" button  "System Variables"  "Path"
► Add a new variable with the installation path of the software.
The default installation path is
● C:\Program Files\Rohde-Schwarz\FSC View\ (for Windows XP, Vista and 7 (32-bit)
● C:\Program Files (x86)\Rohde-Schwarz\FSC View\ (for Windows 7 64-bit)
If necessary, change the path as required.

1.7.2 Restoring Datasets

You can preview and load previously saved measurement results with the recall
function of the R&S FSC. This function also provides easy access to previous
measurement settings so that you do not have to set up the R&S FSC again.
► Press the SAVE/RECALL key.
The R&S FSC opens the file manager.
► Select the dataset you want to use.
The R&S FSC restores the configuration that the dataset contains.
By default, the most recently saved dataset is highlighted. If you need another dataset,
navigate to the folder or storage device that contains the dataset you need.

1.7.2.1 Previewing a Dataset

The R&S FSC provides a preview of datasets. The preview is like a screenshot and
lets you take a quick look at that measurement and its settings. The R&S FSC does
not yet activate the measurement settings of that dataset.

Operating Manual 1173.0966.12 - 07 19

R&S FSC Table of Contents

► Browse through the available datasets and select the one you want.
► Press the "Recall" softkey.
The R&S FSC shows a preview of the measurement contained in the selected
dataset. The preview shows the measurement results as well as the measurement
settings.
► Use the rotary knob to browse the previews of all datasets available in the selected
folder.
► Press the "Exit" softkey to return to the "Recall Dataset" dialog box.

1.7.2.2 Loading a Dataset

If you find a dataset whose settings you need for your current measurement task, you
can load it.
► Press the "Activate" softkey.
The R&S FSC loads the dataset in question and adjusts its measurement settings
to those of the dataset.

1.7.3 Deleting Datasets

If you have to delete a dataset, you can do so with the file manager.
► Press the SAVE/RECALL key.
► Press the "File Manager" softkey.
The R&S FSC opens the file manager.
► In order to delete a single dataset, press the "Select Action" softkey. Select
"Delete" and the dataset currently selected is deleted after your confirmation.
In order to delete multiple data sets, the respective datasets have to be marked first.
► Press the "Mark" softkey to mark files for deletion
► Select the dataset you'd like to delete.
► Mark the data sets with the ENTER key.
The selected data sets should be checked in the "Status" column.
Repeat the selection by moving the cursor with the rotary knob or the cursor key
and marking more data sets with the ENTER key.
► Press the "Select Action" softkey.
► Select the "Delete" menu item and confirm with the ENTER key or the "Select
Action" softkey.
Before deleting the data set, the R&S FSC shows a warning message that you
need to confirm. After confirming the deletion process the R&S FSC deletes the
selected data sets from its memory.

Operating Manual 1173.0966.12 - 07 20

R&S FSC Table of Contents

1.8 Updating the Firmware

You can download new firmware versions from the R&S FSC website.
http://www.rohde-schwarz.com/product/fsc.html
The website also provides release notes for each new firmware version. The release
notes include instructions on how to perform a firmware update.

Operating Manual 1173.0966.12 - 07 21

R&S FSC Table of Contents

2 Spectrum Analyzer Mode

The default operating mode of the R&S FSC is the spectrum analyzer. The spectrum
analyzer provides the functionality to perform measurements in the frequency domain,
e.g. to identify the power of signals.

2.1 Performing Spectrum Measurements

In addition to basic spectrum measurements, the R&S FSC provides several specific
measurements. These measurements, also in combination with one of the available
accessories, allow you to perform advanced and more complex measurement tasks.

2.1.1 Measuring the Channel Power of Continuously Modulated Signals

The channel power measurement selectively measures the power of modulated

signals. Unlike a power meter that performs measurements over its entire frequency
range, the channel power measurement measures the power of a specific transmission
channel. Other signals in the frequency spectrum don't show in the results.
When measuring the spectrum within a channel, the R&S FSC uses a resolution
bandwidth that is small compared to the channel bandwidth. It then determines the
total power of the channel by integrating the results on the trace. The R&S FSC takes
the following parameters into account:
● display mode (absolute or relative)
● detector
● resolution bandwidth
That means that you can compare the result to the result that would have been
obtained from a thermal power meter. The small resolution bandwidth acts like a
narrow channel filter and so prevents out-of-channel emissions from affecting the
result.
► Press the MEAS key.
► Press the "Meas Mode" softkey.
► Select the "Channel Power" menu item.
The R&S FSC starts to measure the channel power.
By default, the 3GPP WCDMA standard is active. Two vertical lines show the
channel bandwidth.

Operating Manual 1173.0966.12 - 07 22

R&S FSC Table of Contents

Screen layout for channel power measurements

1 Standard
2 Channel bandwidth
3 Channel power numerical
4 Channel bandwidth graphical (blue lines)
5 Channel power measurement softkey menu

2.1.1.1 Selecting the Standard

If you need to perform measurements that are conform to a telecommunications

standard, you can activate one of the predefined standards that are already stored in
the R&S FSC memory. However, you can create new configurations to perform
measurements on other standards as well.
► Press the MEAS key.
► Press the "Standard" softkey.
The R&S FSC opens a dialog box to select the standard.
► Select one of the available standards.
► Confirm the selection with the "Select" softkey.
The R&S FSC loads the configuration of the selected standard. It automatically
sets the optimal span, resolution bandwidth, video bandwidth, sweep time and
detector for the standard.
If the measurement is not according to the selected standard anymore (e.g. if you
make changes to a parameter), the R&S FSC puts a red dot in front of the
standard display ( ).
You can create and edit standards with the R&S FSCView software and transfer them
to the R&S FSC via the USB or the LAN interface. The number of standards the
R&S FSC can store in its memory depends on the number of other data sets stored on
the R&S FSC.
For more information see "Managing Datasets" on page 14.

Operating Manual 1173.0966.12 - 07 23

R&S FSC Table of Contents

2.1.1.2 Setting the Reference Level

The reference level is the power level that the R&S FSC expects at the RF input. When
selecting the reference level, make sure that you do not overload the R&S FSC by
applying a signal whose power exeeds the maximum reference level.
As the power is measured with a small resolution bandwidth compared to the signal
bandwidth, it is still possible to overload the R&S FSC, even if the trace is within the
measurement diagram. To prevent an overload, perform the measurement with the
largest resolution bandwidth possible using the peak detector. If you set these
parameters, it is not possible for the trace to exceed the reference level.
To simplify operation and to prevent incorrect measurements, the R&S FSC has an
automatic routine for setting the reference level.
► Press the AMPT key.
► Press the "Level Adjust" softkey.
The R&S FSC performs a
measurement to determine the
optimal reference level.

It uses a resolution bandwidth of 1 MHz, a video bandwidth of 1 MHz and the peak
detector. After finishing the automatic measurement, the R&S FSC sets the optimal
reference level.

2.1.1.3 Setting the Channel Bandwidth

The channel bandwidth specifies the frequency range around the center frequency,
over which the R&S FSC performs the power measurement.
► Press the MEAS key.
► Press the "Chan BW" softkey.
The R&S FSC opens an input field to specify the channel bandwidth.
► Enter the channel bandwidth you need.
The R&S FSC sets the appropriate span for the channel bandwidth that you have
entered (span = 1.2 x channel bandwidth). This ensures that no incorrect channel
power measurements are made.
The minimum channel bandwidth that you can set is 833 Hz at a span of 1 kHz.

2.1.1.4 Changing the Span

Usually, the span the R&S FSC sets yields optimal results. But sometimes you also
need to see the spectrum outside the current span to detect other signal components
that you need to include in the measurement. Therefore, you can adjust the span to up
to ten times the channel bandwidth and hence still be able to see the spectrum outside
the measurement channel.

Operating Manual 1173.0966.12 - 07 24

R&S FSC Table of Contents

► Press the SPAN key.

In the default configuration, "Auto Span" is active. The R&S FSC automatically sets
the optimal span for the channel power measurement.
► Press the "Manual Span" softkey.
The R&S FSC opens an input field to define the span manually.
► Enter the span you need.
The largest possible span for the channel power measurement is ten times the
channel bandwidth. At larger spans, the result of the channel power measurement
would be increasingly imprecise, because too few points of the trace would be in
the channel you are measuring.
► Press the "Auto Span" softkey.
The R&S FSC again calculates the span automatically.

2.1.1.5 Measuring the Maximum Channel Power

If signal levels fluctuate significantly, you can define the maximum channel power with
the Max Hold function.
► Press the MEAS key.
► Press the "Power Display" softkey.
► Select the "Max Hold" menu item.
The power display switches from "Power" to "Max Power".
If you want to deactivate the Max Hold function and return to the normal power display,
activate Clear/Write.
► To deactivate the Max Hold function, press the "Power Display" softkey.
► Select the "Clear/Write" menu item.
The power display returns to "Power" display.

2.1.1.6 Unit for Power Display

The R&S FSC can apply different units to the power output. The default unit is dBm.
► Press the MEAS key.
► Press the "Power Unit" softkey.
► Select the unit you want from the submenu.
The R&S FSC displays the power level in the selected unit.

Operating Manual 1173.0966.12 - 07 25

R&S FSC Table of Contents

2.1.2 Measuring the Occupied Bandwidth

The proper operation of a transmission network requires that all transmitters adhere to
the bandwidths assigned to them. The occupied bandwidth is defined as the bandwidth
that contains a specified percentage of the entire power of the transmitter.
Numerous standards require a occupied bandwidth of 99 %. Therefore this is the
default setting. If you need another percentage for the occupied bandwidth you can set
values from 10 % to 99.9 %.
After entering the channel bandwidth, the R&S FSC automatically selects the
measurement parameters so that you can attain the best result.
► Press the MEAS key.
► Press the "Meas Mode" softkey.
The R&S FSC opens the measurement menu.
► Select the "Occupied BW" menu item.
The R&S FSC starts to measure the occupied bandwidth.
Two vertical lines show the occupied bandwidth.

Screen layout for the occupied bandwidth

1 Standard
2 Occupied bandwidth numerical
3 Channel bandwidth
4 Power percentage
5 Occupied bandwidth graphical (blue lines)
5 Occupied bandwidth measurement softkey menu

Operating Manual 1173.0966.12 - 07 26

R&S FSC Table of Contents

2.1.2.1 Selecting a Standard

If you need to perform measurements that are conform to a telecommunications

standard, you can activate one of the predefined standards that are already stored in
the R&S FSC memory. However, you can create new configurations to perform
measurements on other standards as well.
► Press the MEAS key.
► Press the "Standard" softkey.
The R&S FSC opens a dialog box to select the standard.
► Select one of the available standards.
► Confirm the selection with the "Select" softkey.
The R&S FSC loads the configuration of the selected standard. It automatically
sets the optimal span, resolution bandwidth, video bandwidth, sweep time and
detector for the standard.
You can create and edit standards with the R&S FSCView software and transfer them
to the R&S FSC via the USB or the LAN interface. The number of standards the
R&S FSC can store in its memory depends on the number of other data sets stored on
the R&S FSC.
For more information see "Managing Datasets" on page 14.
If you make changes to the settings or create datasets, note that
● the span is always coupled to the channel bandwidth. Changes to either of those
automatically adjust the other (= 5 x channel bandwidth).
● the resolution bandwidth should be between 1 % and 4 % of the channel
bandwidth. This ensures that the occupied bandwidth is measured with high
accuracy.
● the video bandwidth must be at least three times the resolution bandwidth. This
prevents incorrect results due to the compression of signal peaks by the video
filter.
● you use the RMS detector if possible. This ensures that the power measurement is
always correct irrespective of the waveform being investigated.
● the sweep time must be set so that the result is stable. If you increase the sweep
time, the R&S FSC also increases the integration time for the RMS detector and
thus ensures more stable measured values.

Operating Manual 1173.0966.12 - 07 27

R&S FSC Table of Contents

2.1.2.2 Setting the Reference Level

The reference level is the power level that the R&S FSC expects at the RF input. When
selecting the reference level, make sure that you do not overload the R&S FSC by
applying a signal whose power exeeds the maximum reference level.
As the power is measured with a small resolution bandwidth compared to the signal
bandwidth, it is still possible to overload the R&S FSC, even if the trace is within the
measurement diagram.
To prevent an overload, perform the measurement with the largest resolution
bandwidth possible using the peak detector. If you set these parameters, it is not
possible for the trace to exceed the reference level.
To simplify operation and to prevent incorrect measurements, the R&S FSC has an
automatic routine for setting the reference level.
► Press the AMPT key.
► Press the "Level Adjust" softkey.
The R&S FSC performs a measurement to determine the ideal reference level.
It uses a resolution bandwidth of 1 MHz, a video bandwidth of 1 MHz and the peak
detector. After finishing the automatic measurement, the R&S FSC sets the ideal
reference level.

2.1.2.3 Setting the Channel Bandwidth

The channel bandwidth specifies the frequency range around the center frequency,
over which the R&S FSC performs the power measurement.
► Press the MEAS key.
► Press the "Chan BW" softkey.
The R&S FSC opens an input field to specify the channel bandwidth.
► Enter the channel bandwidth you need.
The R&S FSC sets the appropriate span for the channel bandwidth that you have
entered (span = 5 x channel bandwidth). This ensures that no incorrect channel
power measurements are made.
The minimum channel bandwidth that you can set is 2 kHz at a span of 1 kHz.

Operating Manual 1173.0966.12 - 07 28

R&S FSC Table of Contents

2.1.2.4 Defining the Percentage of Occupied Bandwidth

By default, the power percentage inside the occupied bandwidth is 99 %, a number

most standards require. If you measure standards that specify another power
percentage you can change that value.
► Press the MEAS key.
► Press the "% Power BW" softkey.
The R&S FSC opens an input field to define the power percentage.
► Enter the power percentage you need.
The value you enter here is the power percentage that has to be inside the channel
bandwidth relative to the power over the total span (the percentage of the total
power).
The R&S FSC now displays the occupied bandwidth graphically in the trace
window and numerically above the trace window.

2.1.2.5 Changing the Span

Usually, the span the R&S FSC sets yields optimal results. But sometimes you also
need to see the spectrum outside the current span to detect other signal components
that you need to include in the measurement. Therefore, you can adjust the span to up
to ten times the channel bandwidth and still be able to see the spectrum outside the
measurement channel.
► Press the SPAN key.
In the default configuration, "Auto Span" is active. The R&S FSC automatically sets
the optimal span for the channel power measurement.
► Press the "Manual Span" softkey.
The R&S FSC opens an input field to define the span manually.
► Enter the span you need.
The largest possible span for the channel power measurement is ten times the
channel bandwidth. At larger spans, the result of the channel power measurement
would be increasingly imprecise, because too few points of the trace occur in the
channel to be measured.
► Press the "Auto Span" softkey.
The R&S FSC again calculates the span automatically.

Operating Manual 1173.0966.12 - 07 29

R&S FSC Table of Contents

2.1.3 Power Measurements on TDMA Signals

When TDMA (time division multiple access) methods are used, e.g. for GSM, several
users share a channel. Each user is assigned a period of time or timeslot. With the
TDMA power measurement, you can determine the power over one of the timeslots.
The TDMA power measurement is a measurement in the time domain (span = 0 Hz).
You can start it on an external or video trigger and specify the power measurement
time.
To prevent incorrect power measurements in the time domain, make sure that the
whole signal is within the selected resolution bandwidth. If the resolution bandwidth is
too small, the displayed power will be lower than the actual power.
► Press the MEAS key.
► Press the "Meas Mode" softkey.
The R&S FSC opens the measurement menu.
► Select the "TDMA Power" menu item.
The R&S FSC starts to measure the TDMA power.
Two vertical lines define the measurement range.

Screen layout for TDMA power measurements

1 Standard
2 TDMA power
3 Measurement limits
4 Trigger delay
5 Trigger level
6 Measurement time
7 TDMA power measurement softkey menu

Operating Manual 1173.0966.12 - 07 30

R&S FSC Table of Contents

2.1.3.1 Selecting a Standard

If you need to perform measurements that are conform to a telecommunications

standard, you can activate one of the predefined standards that are already stored in
the R&S FSC memory. When starting the measurement in the default configuration,
the R&S FSC automatically activates the GSM/EDGE standard. However, you can
create new configurations to perform measurements on other standards as well.
► Press the MEAS key.
► Press the "Standard" softkey.
The R&S FSC opens a dialog box to select the standard.
► Select one of the available standards.
► Confirm the selection with the "Select" softkey.
The R&S FSC loads the configuration of the selected standard. It automatically
sets the optimal settings for the selected standard.
You can create and edit standards with the R&S FSCView software and transfer them
to the R&S FSC via the USB or the LAN interface. The number of standards the
R&S FSC can store in its memory depends on the number of other data sets stored on
the R&S FSC. For more information see "Managing Datasets" on page 14.

2.1.3.2 Setting the Burst Length

The burst length is the measurement time that the R&S FSC performs measurements
with. The burst length can be equal or less than the sweep time.
► Press the MEAS key.
► Press the "Burst Length" softkey.
The R&S FSC opens an input field to define the burst length.
► Enter the length of the burst you need.
The R&S FSC performs the measurement over the time you have entered.
If the measurement time you have entered was greater than the sweep time, the
R&S FSC sets a burst length equal to the sweep time. To work with a greater burst
length, you have to increase the sweep time first.
The minimum burst length is the time corresponding to one trace pixel (= sweep
time / 631).

2.1.3.3 Setting the Reference Level

The reference level is the power level that the R&S FSC expects at the RF input. When
selecting the reference level, make sure that you do not overload the R&S FSC by
applying a signal whose power exeeds the maximum reference level.
Because the resolution bandwidths of the R&S FSC are implemented digitally after the
A/D converter, the signal level at the A/D converter can be higher than the level
indicated by the trace, depending on the selected resolution bandwidth.

Operating Manual 1173.0966.12 - 07 31

R&S FSC Table of Contents

To prevent the A/D converter from being overloaded, the signal must be measured at
the widest resolution bandwidth and video bandwidth with the peak detector. The trace
maximum then determines the best reference level.
To simplify operation and to prevent incorrect measurements, the R&S FSC has an
automatic routine for setting the reference level.
► Press the AMPT key.
► Press the "Level Adjust" softkey.
The R&S FSC performs a measurement to determine the ideal reference level.
It uses a resolution bandwidth of 3 MHz, a video bandwidth of 3 MHz and the peak
detector. After finishing the automatic measurement, the R&S FSC sets the ideal
reference level.

2.1.3.4 Using a Trigger

Usually you will apply a trigger when measuring bursts.

If a trigger is active, the R&S FSC uses the video trigger for TDMA measurements by
default. The video trigger level is at 50 % of the range of the vertical axis but is
variable. This means, the R&S FSC triggers a measurement if the rising edge of the
burst exceeds this 50 % line.
If the DUT features some sort of trigger equipment, you can also use an external
trigger to trigger measurements.
► Connect the DUT trigger output to the R&S FSC trigger input.
► Press the SWEEP key.
► Press the "Trigger" softkey.
► Select either the "External Rise" or "External Fall" menu item (rising or falling
edge).
The R&S FSC activates the trigger and shows the results of the measurement.
It may be that the burst is not completely visible on the display. To correct that and
make the whole burst visible, you can set a trigger delay.
► Press the "Trigger" softkey.
► Select the "Trigger Delay" menu item.
The R&S FSC opens an input field to define the trigger delay.
► Adjust the trigger delay until the burst is visible inside the vertical lines that show
the measurement range.

Operating Manual 1173.0966.12 - 07 32

R&S FSC Table of Contents

2.1.4 Measuring the Adjacent Channel Leakage Ratio (ACLR)

The Adjacent Channel Leakage Ratio (ACLR) measurement is a method to measure

the power over more than one transmission channel and also evaluate the power of
the adjacent (or alternate) channels of the transmission channel. The ACLR performs
measurements according to a specific channel configuration, e.g. a particular radio
communications standard.
► Press the MEAS key.
► Press the "Meas Mode" softkey.
The R&S FSC opens the measurement menu.
► Select the "ACLR" menu item.
The R&S FSC starts to measure the adjacent channel leakage ratio.
In principle, the ACLR measurement works like the channel power measurement in
that it determines the spectrum within the channel using a resolution bandwidth that is
small compared to the channel bandwidth. In addition to the channel bandwidth, the
ACLR measurement is also defined by the channel spacing, the bandwidth of adjacent
channels and the adjacent channel spacing. The R&S FSC supports measurements on
up to 12 carrier channels and 12 adjacent channels to either side of the carrier. When
measuring more than one carrier or adjacent channels, the R&S FSC shows the
powers of each channel in a list below the marker list. The channel itself is marked by
red (transmission channels) or green (adjacent channels) vertical lines.

Screen Layout for ACLR measurements

1 Standard
2 Marker information
3 Limit check information
4 Channel information
5 TX channel (red line)
6 Adjacent channel (green line)
7 Alternate channels (green lines)
8 Marker (blue line)
9 ACLR softkey menu

Operating Manual 1173.0966.12 - 07 33

R&S FSC Table of Contents

The predefined standards are the same as for channel power measurements (3GPP
WCDMA, cdmaOne and CDMA2000 1x systems). However, you can also customize
the settings to set up the R&S FSC for other radio communication standards. You can
define the settings directly on the R&S FSC or define and manage them using the
R&S FSCView software.
When customizing settings, make sure to consider the following points to get valid and
accurate measurement results:
● Reference level
Make sure not to overload the R&S FSC as the power is measured with a
resolution bandwidth that is small in comparison with the signal bandwidth. As with
Channel Power measurements, automatically set the reference to an optimal level
with the "Level Adjust" softkey.
● Setting the span
The frequency span must at least cover the carriers and the adjacent channels
plus a measurement margin of about 10 % to get valid results.
If the span is automatically calculated by the R&S FSC with the "Auto Span"
function, the span is calculated as follows:
(No. of transmission channels - 1) x transmission channel spacing +
2 x transmission channel bandwidth + measurement margin
with the measurement margin being approx. 10 % of the value obtained by adding
the channel spacing and the channel bandwidth.

Selecting the frequency span

If the frequency span is too large in comparison to the channel bandwidth (or the
adjacent-channel bandwidths) being examined, only a few points on the trace are
available per channel. This reduces the accuracy of the waveform calculation for the
channel filter used, which has a negative effect on the measurement accuracy. It is
therefore strongly recommended that the formulas mentioned be taken into
consideration when selecting the frequency span.

● Setting the resolution bandwidth:

The RBW should not be too high or too small to get both an acceptable
measurement speed and a suppression of spectral components outside the
channels. As a rule of thumb, it is recommended to set it to about 1 % to 4 % of the
channel bandwidth.
You can select a larger resolution bandwidth if the spectrum within the channel to
be measured and around it has a flat characteristic. In the standard setting, e.g. for
standard cdmaOne at an adjacent channel bandwidth of 30 kHz, a resolution
bandwidth of 30 kHz is used. This yields correct results since the spectrum in the
neighborhood of the adjacent channels normally has a constant level.

Operating Manual 1173.0966.12 - 07 34

R&S FSC Table of Contents

For standard NADC/IS136 this would not be not possible, for example, since the
spectrum of the transmit signal penetrates into the adjacent channels and a too
large resolution bandwidth causes a too low selection of the channel filter. The
adjacent-channel power would thus be measured too high.
If the RBW is automatically calculated by the R&S FSC with the "Auto RBW"
function, the RBW is calculated as follows:
RBW ≤ 1/40 of channel bandwidth
The R&S FSC then selects the maximum possible resolution bandwidth resulting
from the available RBW steps (1, 3).
● Setting the video bandwidth
To obtain correct power measurements, the video signal must not be limited in
bandwidth. A restricted bandwidth of the logarithmic video signal would cause
signal averaging and thus result in a too low indication of the power (-2.51 dB at
very low video bandwidths). Therefore, the VBW should be at least three times the
resolution bandwidth.
If the VBW is automatically calculated by the R&S FSC with the "Auto VBW"
function, the VBW is calculated as follows:
VBW ≥ 3 x RBW
The R&S FSC then selects the smallest possible VBW with regard to the available
step size.
● Selecting the detector:
It is best to use the RMS detector. This detector correctly indicates the power
irrespective of the characteristics of the signal to be measured. The whole IF
envelope is used to calculate the power for each measurement point. The IF
envelope is digitized using a sampling frequency which is at least five times the
resolution bandwidth which has been selected. Based on the sample values, the
power is calculated for each measurement point using the following formula:

1 N 2
PRMS = ∑
⋅ si
N i =1

with
si = linear digitized video voltage at the output of the A/D converter
N = number of A/D converter values per measurement point
PRMS = power represented by a measurement point
When the power has been calculated, the power units are converted into decibels
and the value is displayed as a measurement point.
In principle, the sample detector would be possible as well. Due to the limited
number of measurement points used to calculate the power in the channel, the
sample detector would yield less stable results.

Operating Manual 1173.0966.12 - 07 35

R&S FSC Table of Contents

2.1.4.1 Selecting a Standard

If you need to perform measurements that are conform to a telecommunications

standard, you can activate one of the predefined standards that are already stored in
the R&S FSC memory. Those predefined standards have already been set up to yield
the best results. However, the R&S FSC provides functionality to create new
configurations to perform measurements on other test setups as well.
► Press the MEAS key.
► Press the "Standard" softkey.
The R&S FSC opens a dialog box to select the standard.
► Select one of the available standards.
► Confirm the selection with the "Select" softkey.
The R&S FSC loads the configuration of the selected standard. It automatically
sets the optimal span, resolution bandwidth, video bandwidth, sweep time and
detector for the standard.
You can create and edit standards with the R&S FSCView software and transfer them
to the R&S FSC via the USB or the LAN interface. The number of standards the
R&S FSC can store in its memory depends on the number of other data sets stored on
the R&S FSC. For more information see "Managing Datasets" on page 14.

2.1.4.2 Configuring the Measurement

In addition to creating and editing standards with the R&S FSCView software, the
R&S FSC also provides functionality to set up a measurement configuration.

Setting the number of transmission channels

► Press the MEAS key.
► Press the "Channel Settings" softkey.
► Select the "Tx Channels" menu item.
The R&S FSC opens an input field to define the number of transmission channels.
► Enter the number of transmission channels you need for the measurement.

Setting the number of adjacent channels

► Press the "Channel Settings" softkey.
► Select the "Adj Channels" menu item.
The R&S FSC opens an input field to define the number of adjacent channels.
► Enter the number of adjacent / alternate channels you need for the measurement.
The borders of Tx channels are displayed red in the trace diagram, the borders of
adjacent and alternate channels are displayed green.

Operating Manual 1173.0966.12 - 07 36

R&S FSC Table of Contents

Setting the channel bandwidth

The channel bandwidth specifies the frequency range around the center frequency,
over which the R&S FSC performs the power measurement.
► Press the MEAS key.
► Press the "Channel BW" softkey.
The R&S FSC opens a dialog box
to specify the channel bandwidth
for all channels.
► Select the channel you want to
change the bandwidth for.
► Activate the input by pressing the
ENTER key.

► Enter the channel bandwidth you need.

The R&S FSC sets the appropriate span for the channel bandwidth that you have
entered according to the criteria desribed above. This ensures that no incorrect
channel power measurements are made.
The minimum channel bandwidth that you can set is 833 Hz at a span of 1 kHz.

Setting the channel spacing

In case of the R&S FSC, the channel spacing is defined as the distance between the
center frequency of the transmission channel and the center frequency to the next
transmission channel or the distance between the center frequency of the transmission
channel and the center frequency of the adjacent channel.

Specific channel spacing definitions

Note that some some radio communication standards, e.g. CDMA2000 DS / MC1 /
MC3 and IS95 B / C, IS97 B / C, IS98 B / C, define the channel spacing differently,
namely the distance from the center of the transmission channel to the closest border
of the adjacent channel. The R&S FSC does not consider these specifics. It always
regards the channel spacing as the distance between the center of a channel and the
center of its neighboring channel.

► Press the MEAS key.

► Press the "Channel Settings" softkey.
► Select the "Channel Spacing" menu item.

Operating Manual 1173.0966.12 - 07 37

R&S FSC Table of Contents

The R&S FSC opens a dialog box

to define the spacings for all
transmission channels and
adjacent / alternate channels.
► Select the channel you want to
change the spacing for.
► Activate the input by pressing the
ENTER key.
► Enter the channel spacing you
need.

The R&S FSC now takes the new values into account for future measurements.
When performing measurements on multi-carrier signals, you can define the spacing of
the transmission (Tx) channels to one another. By default, the R&S FSC assumes
equal spacing between all Tx channels in the system. Therefore, the spacing you enter
for the first two Tx channels is automatically applied to all other Tx channels.
If you do measurements on systems with a different channel spacing for each Tx
channel, you can also set the channel spacing for each Tx channel separately by
entering the respective number in the fields.
If the spacings are not equal, the channel distribution according to the center frequency
is as follows:
● Odd number of TX channels
The middle TX channel is centered to center frequency.
● Even number of TX channels
The two TX channels in the middle are used to calculate the frequency between
those two channels. This frequency is aligned to the center frequency.
Adjacent or alternate channel spacing is also available for single-carrier
measurements. The R&S FSC can perform measurements on up to 12 adjacent
channels. Usually the first adjacent channel to the Tx channel is referred to as the
Adjacent Channel (ADJ). All others are called Alternate Channels (ALT1 to ALT11).
By default, the R&S FSC assumes that the distance of the adjacent channels to each
other is the same. In that case, you only have to enter the first spacing value. The
R&S FSC then calculates all higher adjacent channels from that value. If you change
the spacing of one of the higher channels, the R&S FSC only updates the channel
spacings above the one you have changed, but not those below.
So, for example, if you set the first adjacent channel spacing (ADJ) to 20 kHz, the
following spacings are 40 kHz (ALT1), 60 kHz (ALT2), 80 kHz (ALT3), 100 kHz (ALT4),
120 kHz (ALT5) and so on.
If you then change the spacing of the third alternate channel (ALT3) to 100 kHz, the
R&S FSC adjusts the alternate channels above the third one accordingly: 125 kHz
(ALT4), 150 kHz (ALT5) and so on.

Operating Manual 1173.0966.12 - 07 38

R&S FSC Table of Contents

2.1.4.3 Normalization of Measurement Results

By default, the power of the channels and adjacent channels is displayed in the unit
dBm. It is also possible to display the power density of the signal to, for example,
measure the signal/noise power density or obtain the signal to noise ratio.
► Press the MEAS key.
► Press the "Channel Settings" softkey.
► Select the "Channel Pwr/Hz" menu item.
The R&S FSC activates normalization and switches the unit from dBm to dBm/Hz.
The channel power density in dBm/Hz corresponds to the power inside a
bandwidth of 1 Hz and is calculated as follows:
channel power density = channel power - log10(channel bandwidth)

2.1.4.4 Displaying Absolute and Relative Results

You can set up the result display to either show the absolute power of the adjacent
channels or the power relative to one of the transmission channels.
► Press the MEAS key.
► Press the "Power Display" softkey.
► Select either the "Absolute" menu item to display the absolute results or the
"Relative" menu item to display the power relative to one of the transmission
channels.

2.1.4.5 Selecting the Reference Channel

When determining relative power values for the adjacent channels, you can set a
specific transmission channel as the reference channel.
► Press the MEAS key.
► Press the "Channel Settings" softkey.
► Select the "ACLR Ref Setting" menu item.
The R&S FSC opens a another submenu to select the reference channel.
► Select the method of determining the reference channel.
The following methods are available:
- Tx Channel
Select a specific transmission channel by entering its number as the reference.
- Min Power Tx Channel
The channel with the lowest power level is the reference channel.

Operating Manual 1173.0966.12 - 07 39

R&S FSC Table of Contents

- Max Power Tx Channel

The channel with the highest power level is the reference channel.
- Lowest Highest Channel
The outer left-hand transmission channel is the reference channel for the lower
adjacent channels. The outer right-hand transmission channel is the reference
channel for the upper adjacent channels.

2.1.4.6 Setting and Checking the Limits

Limit checks in ACLR measurement mode are independent of limit line handling. You
can define a limit for each of the adjacent channels. Limits for adjacent channels can
be set either in absolute or relative terms.

Defining relative limits

► Press the MEAS key.
► Press the "Channel Settings"
softkey.
► Select the "Channel Limit Relative"
menu item.
The R&S FSC opens a dialog box
to define the relative limits for each
adjacent channel.
► Select the channel you want to
define a limit for.
► Activate the input by pressing the "Select" softkey.
The channel turns green and the check box in the first column is marked.
► Enter the limit value you need.
The R&S FSC automatically activates the check flag, so that the limit is included in
future limit checks.
► To deactivate the limit check for a specific channel, move the cursor to the channel
in question with the rotary knob or the cursor keys and deselect it with the "Select"
softkey.

Operating Manual 1173.0966.12 - 07 40

R&S FSC Table of Contents

Defining absolute limits

► Press the "Channel Settings" softkey.
► Select the "Channel Limit Absolute" menu item.
The R&S FSC opens a dialog box to define the absolute limits for each adjacent
channel.
► The procedure of defining absolute limits is analogous to that of defining relative
limits.

Performing a limit check

► Press the "Channel Settings" softkey.
► Select the "Check Channel Limits" menu item.
The R&S FSC automatically
performs limit checks.
The results of the limit check are displayed in the table above the trace. If a result
fails the limit check, it turns red and has a star (*) in front of its power level.

2.1.5 Measuring the Spectrum Emission Mask

The Spectrum Emission Mask (SEM) measurement is a method to detect spurious

emissions or intermodulation products of a signal. When performing a SEM
measurement, the R&S FSC checks the signal against a spectral mask to see whether
the signal complies with a specific standard or not. Therefore, the R&S FSC provides
predefined spectrum emission masks for various telecomunications standards.
However, you can define your own spectral masks with the R&S FSCView software to
perform measurements in frequency ranges other than the predefined ones. To learn
how to define Spectrum Emission Masks, refer to the R&S FSCView manual.
► Press the MEAS key.
► Press the "Meas Mode" softkey.
The R&S FSC opens the measurement menu.
► Select the "Spectrum Emission Mask" menu item.
The R&S FSC starts to measure the spectrum emission mask.
Note that the frequency range of the actual measurement depends on the start and
stop frequency you have set on the R&S FSC. Correct measurement results are
therefore only possible if the frequency ranges of the SEM are inside the current span
of the R&S FSC.

Operating Manual 1173.0966.12 - 07 41

R&S FSC Table of Contents

Screen Layout for the SEM measurement

1 Standard
2 Marker information
3 SEM list
4 Limit check result
5 Spectrum emission mask (red line)
6 Trace (yellow line)
7 Marker (blue line)
8 SEM softkey menu

2.1.5.1 Selecting a Standard

If you need to perform measurements that are conform to a telecommunications

standard, you can activate one of the predefined standards that are already stored in
the R&S FSC memory. However, you can create new configurations to perform
measurements on other standards as well.
► Press the MEAS key.
► Press the "Standard" softkey.
The R&S FSC opens a dialog box to select the standard.
► Select one of the available standards.
► Confirm the selection with the "Select" softkey.
The R&S FSC loads the configuration of the selected standard. It automatically
sets the optimal span, resolution bandwidth, video bandwidth, sweep time and
detector for the standard.
You can create and edit standards with the R&S FSCView software and transfer them
to the R&S FSC via the USB or the LAN interface. The number of standards the
R&S FSC can store in its memory depends on the number of other data sets stored on
the R&S FSC. For more information see "Managing Datasets" on page 14.

Operating Manual 1173.0966.12 - 07 42

R&S FSC Table of Contents

2.1.5.2 Optimizing Measurement Settings

After selecting the standard and applying the signal to the R&S FSC, you can optimize
measurement settings to avoid overloading the R&S FSC.
► Press the "Adjust Settings" softkey.
The R&S FSC performs a measurement to determine the ideal reference level ans
span..

2.1.5.3 Viewing the Results in a Table

You can add a table to the display that shows the measurement results in numerical
form.
► Press the MEAS key.
► Press the "View List" softkey.
The R&S FSC shows a list above
the trace diagram.
If the list contains more than four entries, you can scroll through the list with the
rotary knob or the cursor keys to see the other results. Note that scrolling works
only if there is no active input field.
The list contains the following information:
● Tx Power
Power level of the transmission channel.
● Tx Bandwidth
Bandwidth of the transmission channel.
● PASS / FAIL information
If the signal is within the limits of the spectral mask, the R&S FSC shows ,
if not it shows .
● Range [Hz]
Frequency range. The first number is the start frequency, the second number the
stop frequency of each defined frequency range. The character following the
number indicates the unit (k = kHz, M = MHz, G = GHz)
● RBW [Hz]
Resolution bandwidth the corresponding frequency range is measured with.
● Freq [Hz]
● Power Abs
Absolute peak power in the corresponding frequency range.
● Power Rel
Relative peak power in relation to the channel power of the reference channel.

Operating Manual 1173.0966.12 - 07 43

R&S FSC Table of Contents

● Δ Limit
Minimum distance from the limit line to the trace in the corresponding frequency
range. Negative values or a zero indicate a passed SEM limit check, positive
values indicate a violation of the limit check.

2.1.6 Measuring the Harmonic Distortion

The Harmonic Distortion measurement is an easy way to identify the harmonics of a

DUT. In addition to the graphic display of the harmonics, this measurement mode also
calculates the Total Harmonic Distortion (THD) and shows the results.
You can perform a Harmonic Distortion measurement in frequency sweep (span > 0)
and zero span mode (span = 0). When starting the measurement, the R&S FSC looks
for the first harmonic of the signal (= the highest signal) in the defined frequency range.
It then adjusts the frequency axis so that all harmonics are visible. In zero span mode,
the center frequency remains the same.
► Press the MEAS key.
► Press the "Meas Mode" softkey.
► Select the "Harmonic Distortion" menu item.
The R&S FSC starts to measure the harmonic distortion.
The search for harmonics starts as soon as you enter the Harmonic Distortion
measurement. Upon entering the measurement, the R&S FSC automatically adjusts
the settings in order to display the selected number of harmonics (default = 2) on the
screen.

Screen layout for the harmonic distortion measurement

1 Harmonics list
2 Total harmonic distortion in %
3 Total harmonic distortion in dB
4 Trace
5 Markers indicating harmonics (blue lines)
6 Harmonic distortion softkey menu

Operating Manual 1173.0966.12 - 07 44

R&S FSC Table of Contents

2.1.6.1 Defining the Number of Harmonics

By default, the R&S FSC shows the signal and its first harmonic. Each harmonic is
indicated by a marker that the R&S FSC places on the harmonic (here M1 and M2).
Note that all of the markers that have been set are normal markers that show the
absolute frequency of the harmonic.
At the same time, the R&S FSC also calculates the values for the total harmonic
distortion (THD) and shows the results in a box above the trace diagram. The values
are output in % as well as dB.
If you want to see more than one harmonic, the R&S FSC can show up to six
harmonics.
► Press the MEAS key.
► Press the "Harmonics" softkey.
► Enter the number of harmonics you'd like to see.

2.1.6.2 Optimizing the Display of Harmonics

The R&S FSC places the markers on the other harmonics even if they are outside of
the display range.
► Press the MEAS key.
► Press the "Adjust Settings" softkey.
The R&S FSC performs a measurement to determine the ideal reference level,
frequency and span in order to display all harmonics.

2.1.6.3 Activating the Harmonics List

To see the exact frequency of the harmonic, you can activate the marker list that
shows the value for each harmonic or marker.
► Press the MKR key.
► Press the "View List" softkey.
The R&S FSC displays the marker list that contains the values for each harmonic.

Operating Manual 1173.0966.12 - 07 45

R&S FSC Table of Contents

2.1.7 Measuring the AM Modulation Depth

The AM Modulation Depth measurement analyzes AM modulated signals and

calculates the modulation depth of the signal using the measurement results. Note that
the measurement works properly only if you apply an AM modulated signal.
► Press the MEAS key.
► Press the "Meas Mode" softkey.
The R&S FSC opens the measurement menu.
► Select the "AM Modulation Depth" menu item.
The R&S FSC starts to measure the AM modulation depth.
After you have started the measurement, the R&S FSC places three markers on the
trace. The first marker is placed on the peak power level. The R&S FSC assumes that
position as the level of the carrier. The second and third markers are delta markers.
These are placed symmetrically on the adjacent peak values to the left and right of the
carrier.
By default, delta marker 2 is active for editing. If you move the delta marker to another
position, the other delta marker will be moved by the same distance relative to the
normal marker. Note that this happens only if you move delta marker 2 (D2). When
moving delta marker 3 (D3), only this marker is repositioned.
From the values of the markers, the R&S FSC then calculates the AM modulation
depth. The AM modulation depth is the ratio between the power values at the
reference marker and at the delta markers. When the powers of the two AM side bands
are not the same, the R&S FSC uses the mean value of the two sideband values.
If the R&S FSC is unable to find any AM modulated a carriers, it shows the message
.

Screen layout for the AM modulation depth measurement

Operating Manual 1173.0966.12 - 07 46

R&S FSC Table of Contents

1 Marker list
2 Modulation depth
3 Trace
4 Threshold line
5 Markers (blue lines)
6 AM modulation depth softkey menu

2.1.7.1 Setting a Threshold

You can set a threshold that defines the minimum power level the signal must have. If
the power of the signal is below the threshold, the R&S FSC will not set the markers
and therefore will not calculate the modulation depth.
► Press the MEAS key.
► Press the "Threshold" softkey
The R&S FSC opens an input field to set the threshold.
► Enter the threshold value you need.
The threshold is represented as a horizontal blue line in the diagram area.

2.1.7.2 Optimizing the Settings

In order to get the best results, you can use the automatic adjustment routine that the
R&S FSC offers.
► Press the MEAS key.
► Press the "Adjust Settings" softkey.
The R&S FSC performs a sweep and repeats the peak search sequence for the
three markers.

2.1.7.3 Activating the Marker List

To see the exact frequency of the carrier and its sidebands, you can activate the
marker list that shows the value for each marker.
► Press the MKR key.
► Press the "View List" softkey.
The R&S FSC displays the marker list that contains the values for carrier and
sideband.

Operating Manual 1173.0966.12 - 07 47

R&S FSC Table of Contents

2.2 Configuring Spectrum Measurements

2.2.1 Configuring the Horizontal Axis

The FREQ key contains all necessary functions to configure the horizontal axis for
spectrum measurements.
The contents of the menu depend on the currently selected measurement.
Usually, the horizontal axis contains frequency information in spectrum mode. You can
specify the frequency in terms of the center frequency or by defining a start and stop
frequency for a particular span.
If you know the frequency of the signal you are measuring, it is best to match the
center frequency to the signal's frequency. If you are investigating signals, e.g.
harmonics, that are within a particular frequency range, the best option is to enter a
start and stop frequency to define the span.

2.2.1.1 Defining the Center Frequency

The center frequency represents the frequency at the center of the horizontal axis in
the diagram area.
► Press the FREQ key.
The R&S FSC opens the frequency menu.
When you press the FREQ key, the R&S FSC automatically opens an input field to
define the center frequency. If the input field is inactive, you can open it with the
"Center Freq" softkey.
► Enter the center frequency you need.
The frequency you have entered becomes the new center frequency.
While adjusting the center frequency, you may obtain a value that is outside the
R&S FSC maximum span. If this happens, the R&S FSC automatically reduces the
span.

2.2.1.2 Defining a Frequency Step Size

If you set the center frequency with the rotary knob or the cursor keys, the distance of
each step that you take depends on the span. With the rotary knob, the smallest
possible step is a pixel. As the trace consists of 631 pixels, each step is equal to 1/630
of the span. With the cursor keys, the step is 10% of the span or one division of the
grid.
You can set another step size.
► Press the FREQ key.
► Press the "CF Step Size" softkey.
The R&S FSC opens a submenu that contains possible step sizes.

Operating Manual 1173.0966.12 - 07 48

R&S FSC Table of Contents

- 0.1 x Span
The step size equals 10% of the span or 1 division of the horizontal axis.
- =Center
The step size equals the center frequency.
This step size is ideal for measurements on harmonics. When you increase or
decrease the center frequency, the center frequency automatically moves to
the next harmonic.
- Manual…
Define any step size you want.
This step size makes it easy to investigate a spectrum with frequencies at
constant intervals.
► Select the step size you need from the menu.
The R&S FSC adjusts the step size accordingly.
If you set the step size to 10% of the span or to the center frequency, the R&S FSC
sets the step size internally. Manually defining the step size opens an input field to
define the step size.

2.2.1.3 Setting a Frequency Offset

For measurements on frequency converters such as satellite downconverters, it is

often convenient to reference the results to the frequency prior to conversion. For this
purpose, the R&S FSC offers a frequency offset that arithmetically shifts the center
frequency to higher or lower frequencies. Thus, the R&S FSC displays the input
frequency of the DUT.
Positive frequency offset is possible in the range from 1 Hz to 100 GHz, in steps of
1 Hz. The maximum negative frequency offset depends on the start frequency you
have set. The start frequency, taking into account the frequency offset, is always
≥ 0 Hz.
► Press the FREQ key.
► Press the "Freq Offset" softkey.
The R&S FSC opens an input field to set the frequency offset.
► Enter the frequency offset you need.
The R&S FSC adds the frequency offset to the center frequency you have set. A
red dot at the center frequency display indicates that a frequency offset has been
set.

Operating Manual 1173.0966.12 - 07 49

R&S FSC Table of Contents

2.2.1.4 Defining a Start and Stop Frequency

Defining a start an stop frequency is best suited for example for measurements on
harmonics or signals whose exact frequency is unknown.
► Press the FREQ key.
► Press the "Start Freq" softkey.
The R&S FSC opens an input field to define the start frequency.
► Enter the start frequency you need.
► Set a stop frequency with the "Stop Freq" softkey.
The R&S FSC adjusts the horizontal axis according to your input, beginning with
the start frequency and ending with the stop frequency.
If you have entered a stop frequency that is outside the maximum frequency range,
the R&S FSC sets the stop frequency to the possible maximum.
The label of the horizontal axis changes from "Center" and "Span" to "Start" and
"Stop".

2.2.1.5 Setting the Span

The span is the frequency range around the center frequency that a spectrum analyzer
displays on the screen. The span you should select depends on the signal and the
measurement that you are performing. A rule of thumb is that it should be at least twice
the bandwidth occupied by the signal.
The available span for frequency domain measurements depends on the instrument
model.
● R&S FSC4: 100 Hz to 3.6 GHz
● R&S FSC6: 100 Hz to 6 GHz
If you set a span of 0 Hz (zero span), the R&S FSC performs measurements in the
time domain.
► Press the SPAN key.
When you press the SPAN key, the R&S FSC automatically opens an input field to
define the span. If the input field is inactive, you can open it with the "Manual
Span" softkey.
► Enter the span you need.
The R&S FSC adjusts the span of the horizontal axis.
If you have to switch between full span and a smaller span, you can do so without
having to enter the numeric values.
► Press the SPAN key.
► Press the "Full Span" softkey.
The R&S FSC displays the spectrum over its entire frequency range.

Operating Manual 1173.0966.12 - 07 50

R&S FSC Table of Contents

► Press the "Last Span" softkey.

The R&S FSC restores the span that you have set just before displaying the entire
frequency range.

Time domain measurements

You can also activate time domain measurements without having to enter the value
manually. When measuring in the time domain, the span is 0 Hz. In that state, the
R&S FSC measures the signal at the current center frequency only. Instead of
displaying the spectrum, the R&S FSC shows the signal power over a certain time
period. The horizontal axis becomes the time axis. The display always starts at 0 s and
stops after the currently set sweep time.
► Press the SPAN key.
► Press the "Zero Span" softkey.
The R&S FSC sets a span of 0 Hz and performs the measurement in the time
domain.

2.2.2 Configuring the Vertical Axis

All relevant settings to configure the vertical axis are available in the amplitude menu.
You can access it via the AMPT key.

2.2.2.1 Setting the Reference Level

The reference level is represented graphically by the grid line at the top of the diagram.
The reference level sets the input signal gain up to the display stage. If the reference
level is low, the gain is high. That means that even weak signals are displayed clearly.
If you are measuring strong signals, you have to set a high reference level in order to
prevent an overload of the signal path of the analyzer and to keep the signal within the
display range. If you are measuring the spectrum of a composite signal, make sure that
the reference level is high enough to cover all signals and that all signals are within the
measurement diagram.
► Press the AMPT key.
When you press the AMPT key, the R&S FSC automatically opens an input field to
define the center frequency. If the input field is inactive, you can open it with the
"Ref Level" softkey.
► Enter the reference level you require.
If you change the reference level, the R&S FSC adjusts the position of the trace as
you make the changes.
By default, the reference level corresponds to the grid line at the top of the diagram.

Operating Manual 1173.0966.12 - 07 51

R&S FSC Table of Contents

You can also change the position of the reference level to another grid line if you have
a signal that would otherwise overlap with the top of the diagram area. The R&S FSC
indicates the current reference level position with a triangle at the corresponding grid
line on the vertical axis ( ).
► Press the AMPT key.
► Press the "Range / Ref Pos" softkey.
The R&S FSC opens a submenu.
► Select the "Ref Position 10…" menu item.
The R&S FSC opens an input field to define the reference position.
► Enter the number of the grid line you want the reference level at.
The range is from 0 to 10. "0" corresponds to the lowest grid line, "10" corresponds
to highest grid line.

2.2.2.2 Setting a Display Range

The display range determines the scaling or resolution of the vertical axis. In the
default state, the display range is a logarithmic scaling over a 100 dB. This
corresponds to 10 dB per grid division. The R&S FSC provides other display ranges
that either increase or decrease the resolution of the vertical axis.
However, increasing resolution does not increase the accuracy of, for example, the
marker level readout, but only makes it easier to read values off the trace.
You can also select a linear scale for the vertical axis. In that case, the power levels
are expressed as a percentage of the reference level. Linear scaling is useful to
display AM modulated carriers in the time domain, for example.
► Press the AMPT key.
► Press the "Range / Ref Pos" softkey.
The R&S FSC opens a submenu to select the display range.
► Select the display range you need.
The R&S FSC adjusts the vertical axis accordingly.

Operating Manual 1173.0966.12 - 07 52

R&S FSC Table of Contents

2.2.2.3 Selecting the Display Unit

By default, the vertical axis (and therefore the reference level) is scaled in dBm.
However, the units dBmV, dBµV, Watt and Volt are also available. Selecting the right
unit is relevant for the marker level display because the unit of the marker level is the
same as that of the reference level.
► Press the AMPT key.
► Press the "Unit" softkey.
The R&S FSC opens a submenu to select the display unit.
► Select one of the available units.
The R&S FSC adjusts the labels of the vertical axis accordingly.

2.2.2.4 Setting a Reference Offset

You can define a reference offset for the reference level. With a reference offset, you
can increase the reference level by a certain amount. This is useful, for example, if an
attenuator or amplifier has been inserted before the RF input. The R&S FSC
automatically takes the loss or gain into account when the level is displayed and no
manual calculations are necessary. A loss introduced at the RF input must be entered
as a positive number and a gain as a negative number.
► Press the AMPT key.
► Press the "Ref Offset" softkey.
The R&S FSC open an input field to
► Enter the offset you need.
The R&S FSC includes the offset in the measurement.
To indicate an offset other than 0, the R&S FSC puts a red dot at the "Ref:"
hardware setting ( ).

2.2.2.5 Setting the RF Attenuation

RF attenuation adjusts the input range inside the analyzer. It is coupled directly to the
reference level. If you have set a high reference level, RF attenuation is turned on in
10 dB steps according to the table below so that the input mixer always remains in the
linear range.
The R&S FSC provides three attenuation modes.
● Auto Low Distortion
If this mode is active, the R&S FSC sets the RF attenuation 10 dB higher
according to the table below, making the stress of the input mixer 10 dB less at the
specified reference level. If the spectrum is densely occupied with signals, e.g. in a
television cable network, the input mixer reduces the R&S FSC inherent spurious
products. However, the inherent noise display of the R&S FSC increases due to
the increased attenuation in front of the input mixer.

Operating Manual 1173.0966.12 - 07 53

R&S FSC Table of Contents

● Auto Low Noise

If this mode is active, the R&S FSC sets the RF attenuation 10 dB lower. This
increases the sensitivity of the R&S FSC, which means that the inherent noise
display decreases due to the lower attenuation in front of the input mixer.
● Manual
Manual selection of the attenuation.
You can check the status of the RF attenuation and the preamplifier in the
measurement setup dialog and the hardware settings area of the display.

Preamplifier OFF Preamplifier ON

Reference Level RF Attenuation RF Attenuation

Low Noise Low Distortion Low Noise Low Distortion

≤-30 dBm 0 dB 0 dB 0 dB 0 dB

-29 to -25 dBm 0 dB 0 dB 0 dB 5 dB

-24 to -20 dBm 0 dB 0 dB 0 dB 10 dB

-19 to -15 dBm 0 dB 5 dB 5 dB 15 dB

-14 to -10 dBm 0 dB 10 dB 10 dB 20 dB

-9 to -5 dBm 5 dB 15 dB 15 dB 25 dB

-4 to 0 dBm 10 dB 20 dB 20 dB 30 dB

1 to 5 dBm 15 dB 25 dB 25 dB 35 dB

6 to 10 dBm 20 dB 30 dB 30 dB 40 dB

11 to 15 dBm 25 dB 35 dB 35 dB 40 dB

16 to 20 dBm 30 dB 40 dB 40 dB 40 dB

21 to 25 dBm 35 dB 40 dB 40 dB 40 dB

26 to 30 dBm 40 dB 40 dB 40 dB 40 dB

► Press the AMPT key.

► Press the "RF Att / Amp / Imp" softkey.
► Select either the "Auto Low Distortion" or the "Auto Low Noise" menu item.
The R&S FSC sets the attenuation according to the table above.
► Select the "Manual: 0 dB" menu item for manual selection of the RF attenuation.
The R&S FSC opens an input field to set the RF attenuation. You can set the
attenuation from 0 dB to 40 dB in 5 dB steps.
To indicate a manual attenuation, the R&S FSC puts a red dot at the "Att:"
hardware setting ( ).

Operating Manual 1173.0966.12 - 07 54

R&S FSC Table of Contents

2.2.2.6 Using the Preamplifier

To increase the input sensitivity, the R&S FSC provides an integrated 20 dB

preamplifier after the input mixer.
In the default state of the R&S FSC, the preamplifer is turned off. If you want to
measure signals with low powers, you can turn it on.
► Press the AMPT key.
► Press the "RF Att / Amp / Imp" softkey.
► Select either the "Preamp On" or "Preamp Off" menu item.
The R&S FSC turns the preamplifier on and off.

2.2.2.7 Setting the Input Impedance

In the default state, the input impedance is 50 Ω.

The R&S FSC can also handle 75 Ω systems. The R&S FSC does not select a 75 Ω
RF input per se. Instead it selects a 75 Ω matching pad connected at the RF input. The
50/75 Ω matching pad R&S RAZ is recommended for 75 Ω matching (see
recommended accessories). The R&S FSC automatically considers the conversion
factor when a value of 75 Ω is set.
Press the AMPT key.
► Press the "RF Att / Amp / Imp" softkey.
► Select the impedance you need.
You can also use other matching pads (e.g. R&S RAM or R&S FSH-Z38) by
activating transducer factors.

2.2.2.8 Using Transducer Factors

For more information see "Using Transducer Factors".

2.2.3 Setting Bandwidths

The bandwidth menu contains all settings to set up filter bandwidths available in the
R&S FSC. You can access it with the BW key.

2.2.3.1 Setting the Resolution Bandwidth

The resolution bandwidth in a spectrum analyzer determines the frequency resolution

for frequency domain measurements and therefore determines how well it can
separate adjacent frequencies. The results as you see them on the display depend on
the passband of a resolution filter.
The resolution bandwidth (RBW) has several effects on measurements.

Operating Manual 1173.0966.12 - 07 55

R&S FSC Table of Contents

● To be able to display two or more signals whose frequencies are close together
separately, you need a (resolution) filter whose bandwidth is small enough. The
frequency difference between two sinusoidal carriers can not be less than the
selected resolution bandwidth if the carriers are to be resolved, for example.
● The bandwidth of the resolution filter also affects the noise that is displayed by the
R&S FSC. The smaller the bandwidth, the less noisy the results are. The rule is,
that if you increase or decrease the bandwidth by a factor of 3, the noise goes
down or up by 5 dB. If you change the bandwidth by a factor of 10, the displayed
noise changes by 10 dB.
● The resolution bandwidth affects the speed of the measurement. If you want to
display the true spectrum, the resolution filters have to settle at all frequencies that
are of interest. Narrow bandfilters have a longer settling time compared to wide
ones. Therefore the sweep time increases the smaller the resolution bandwidth
gets. The rule is, that if you reduce the bandwidth by a factor of 3, the sweep time
goes up by a factor of 9. If you reduce the bandwidth by a factor of 10, the sweep
time goes up by a factor of 100.
The R&S FSC has resolution bandwidths from 1 Hz to 3 MHz in a 1-3-10 sequence.
Additionally, the R&S FSC provides a 200 kHz resolution bandwidth that you have to
select and enter manually.

Setting the 200 kHz resolution bandwidth

The 200 kHz bandwidth is not coupled to the span, so it will not be selected if
automatic selection of the RBW is on.
In fact, you have to enter the 200 kHz resolution bandwidth with the number keys.
When using the rotary knob or the cursor keys, the 200 kHz bandwidth will be skipped.

In the R&S FSC's default state, the resolution bandwidth is coupled to the span, i.e. if
you change the span, the R&S FSC adjusts the resolution bandwidth. Therefore, you
do not have to set the resolution bandwidth manually in many cases, because the
R&S FSC automatically sets the resolution bandwidth if you change the span.
► Press the BW key.
By default, the resolution bandwidth is coupled to the span.
► Press the "Manual RBW" softkey.
The R&S FSC opens an input field to define the resolution bandwidth.
► Enter the resolution bandwidth you need.
The R&S FSC uses the resolution bandwidth you have entered for the
measurement.
If the resolution bandwidth is no longer coupled to the span, the R&S FSC puts a
red dot at the "RBW" hardware setting ( ).
► Press the "Auto RBW" softkey to again couple the resolution bandwidth to the
span.

Operating Manual 1173.0966.12 - 07 56

R&S FSC Table of Contents

Automatic adjustment of the sweep time

In its default mode, the R&S FSC automatically adjusts the sweep time as soon as you
change the resolution bandwidth. This is to make sure that the settling time required for
the selected resolution filter is properly taken into account.The maximum allowed
sweep time is 1000 s. For narrow resolution filters this value would be exceeded for
large spans. In order to avoid this, the R&S FSC adjusts the span automatically as
soon as the maximum sweep time is reached.

2.2.3.2 Setting the Video Bandwidth

The video bandwidth (VBW) basically smoothes the trace by reducing the noise and
therefore making power levels easier to see.
The noise reduction is a result of the video filter. This lowpass filter defines the video
bandwidth and filters the higher frequency parts of the voltage from the signal. Video
voltage is the (DC) voltage that results from the IF signal passing through the envelope
detector which removes the IF components and outputs the envelope only. This output
is also known as the video signal.
The figure below shows that process on an AM modulated signal in the time domain.
In case of an AM modulated signal, the envelope (or video) signal contains a DC
component that corresponds to the level of the carrier. The video signal also contains
an AC component whose frequency is the same as the AM frequency.

If the bandwidth of the video filter is less than the frequency of the AC component, it is
suppressed depending on its maximum frequency. If the AM component should be
displayed truly, the cutoff frequency of the filter has to be greater than the modulation
frequency.
If there is noise on the sine signal, the modulation signal can be thought of as noise. If
the video bandwidth is reduced, the high-frequency noise components above the cutoff
frequency of the video filter will be rejected. The smaller the video bandwidth, the
smaller the noise amplitude at the video filter output.

Operating Manual 1173.0966.12 - 07 57

R&S FSC Table of Contents

The R&S FSC provides video bandwidths from 1 Hz to 3 MHz in a 1-3-10 sequence. In
its default state, the video bandwidth is coupled to the resolution bandwidth and is the
same as the resolution bandwidth. If you change the resolution bandwidth, the
R&S FSC adjusts the video bandwidth accordingly.
The effects of the video bandwidth on measurements are as follows.
● if you are performing measurements on modulated signals, the video bandwidth
must be sufficiently large so that significant modulation components are not
rejected (≥ RBW)
● if you want to keep signals free of noise, you should select the smallest video
bandwidth possible (≤ 0.1 x RBW)
● if you are performing measurements on pulsed signals, the video bandwidth should
be at least three times greater than the resolution bandwidth so that the pulse
edges are not distorted
Like the resolution bandwidth, the video bandwidth has an effect on sweep speed.
Before each measurement, the video filter has to settle.
► Press the BW key.
► Press the "Manual VBW" softkey.
The R&S FSC opens an input field to define the video bandwidth.
► Enter the video bandwidth you need.
The R&S FSC uses the video bandwidth you have entered for the measurement.
If the video bandwidth is no longer coupled to the resolution bandwidth, the
R&S FSC puts a red dot at the "VBW" hardware setting ( ).
► Press the "Auto VBW" softkey to again couple the video bandwidth to the RBW.

2.2.4 Configuring and Triggering the Sweep

You can find all necessary settings to configure the sweep itself in the sweep menu. To
access it, press the SWEEP key.

2.2.4.1 Setting the Sweep Time

The sweep time is the time it takes the R&S FSC to get the results that are contained
in one trace.
In the frequency domain (span > 0), the sweep time is the time it takes the R&S FSC to
measure the spectrum in the specified span. To avoid the display of spurs in the
spectrum, the sweep time has to meet some conditions.
● The sweep time depends on the resolution bandwidth. If the sweep time is too
short, the resolution filter has no time to settle. In that case, the displayed levels
will be too low. For more information see "Setting the Resolution Bandwidth".
● The sweep depends on the span. If you increase the span, you also have to
increase the sweep time.

Operating Manual 1173.0966.12 - 07 58

R&S FSC Table of Contents

In its default state, the R&S FSC couples the sweep time to the span and the
resolution bandwidth to avoid invalid settings. If the coupling is active, the R&S FSC
always sets the shortest possible sweep time to make sure that the display of the
spectrum is correct and valid.
The R&S FSC requires a minimum sweep time of 20 ms for every 600 MHz of span. If
you increase the span, the R&S FSC will also increase the sweep time.
In the time domain (span = 0), the R&S FSC shows the video voltage over time. The
horizontal axis becomes a time axis that starts at 0 s and ends at the sweep time that
you selected. The range of the sweep time in the time domain is from 200 µs to 1000 s.
► Press the SWEEP key.
In the default state, "Auto SWP Time" is active.
► Press the "Manual SWP Time" softkey.
The R&S FSC opens an input field to set the sweep time.
► Enter the sweep time you need.
If the video bandwidth is no longer coupled to the span or the resolution bandwidth,
the R&S FSC puts a red dot at the "SWT" hardware setting ( ).

2.2.4.2 Selecting the Sweep Mode

The sweep mode is the way the R&S FSC performs the measurement.
In its default state, the R&S FSC measures continuously. In this mode, the R&S FSC
automatically repeats the sweep in the defined range of the horizontal axis (frequency
or time) and updates the trace accordingly after it has finished with one sweep.
In some cases it may be sufficient to get the results over a single sweep only, e.g. if a
particular trigger condition is met. In single sweep mode, the R&S FSC performs the
sweep a certain number of times (depending on the number of averages you have set)
over the defined range of the horizontal axis (frequency or time) and then stops
measuring. It performs another sweep only after you tell it to. For more information on
setting the number of sweeps included in a single sweep see "Selecting the Trace
Mode (Average)".
► Press the SWEEP key.
► Press the "Single Sweep" softkey.
The R&S FSC activates single sweep mode.
► Press the "Cont Sweep" softkey.
The R&S FSC again starts to measure continuously.

Operating Manual 1173.0966.12 - 07 59

R&S FSC Table of Contents

2.2.4.3 Working with Trigger Functionality

If you have to perform measurements according to certain signal conditions, you can
use a trigger. A trigger responds to certain events. If a trigger is active, the R&S FSC
starts to measure if the trigger conditions are met. The trigger can be generated either
externally or internally.
The R&S FSC provides the following trigger functions.
● Free Run
A new sweep starts on completion of the previous sweep. This is the default state
of the R&S FSC.
● Video Trigger
A sweep starts when the video voltage exceeds a particular level. The video trigger
is available only in the time domain (span = 0).
In the frequency domain, the R&S FSC would never start a measurement with the
video trigger because there is no guarantee that there is a signal that generates
video voltage present at the start frequency.
● External Trigger (rising or falling slope)
A sweep starts on the rising edge (RISE) or on the falling edge (FALL) of an
external trigger signal. The external trigger signal is fed in via the BNC connector
"Ext Trigger". The switching threshold is 1.4 V, i.e. a TTL signal level.
● Gated Trigger
When the gated trigger is active, a gate signal that is applied to the R&S FSC
trigger input controls the sweep. The R&S FSC starts measuring when the applied
gate signal becomes active and the set gate delay has expired, and it interrupts the
measurement as soon as the defined gate length is reached. With the gate signal
becoming active the next time the measurement is resumed etc.
Pulsed signals can be measured by this method, if the gate delay and gate length
are selected in a way that the measurement is only performed while the pulse is
active. Gated measurements are possible in the frequency domain (span > 0) and
the time domain (span = 0), but it is available only in combination with an external
gate signal.
► Press the SWEEP key.
► Press the "Trigger" softkey.
The R&S FSC opens a submenu to select the trigger source.
► Select the trigger source you need.
The R&S FSC activates the trigger.

Operating Manual 1173.0966.12 - 07 60

R&S FSC Table of Contents

Including a Delay Time

When you are using a video trigger in the time domain or an external trigger, you can
delay the start of the measurement with respect to the trigger event by entering a delay
time. In this way, you can include time differences between the trigger event and the
measurement.
The range of the trigger delay is from 0 µs to 100 s. The resolution depends on the
subrange.

Trigger delay Resolution

0 to 1 ms 10 µs

1 ms to 10 ms 100 µs

10 ms to 100 ms 1 ms

100 ms to 1 s 10 ms

1 s to 10 s 100 ms

10 s to 100 s 1s

► Press the SWEEP key.

► Press the "Trigger" softkey.
► Select the "Trigger Delay…" menu item.
The R&S FSC opens an input field to define the trigger delay.
► Enter the delay time you need.

Defining the Trigger Level

When you are using the video trigger, you have to define a trigger level. The trigger
level is a percentage of the reference level. A trigger level of 100 % is the same as the
reference level. A trigger level of, e.g. 50% corresponds to the middle of the vertical
axis. The R&S FSC indicates the video trigger level with a triangle.
► Press the SWEEP key.
► Press the "Trigger" softkey.
► Select the "Trace Video" menu item.
The R&S FSC opens an input field to define the trigger level.
► Enter the trigger level.
The R&S FSC shows the trigger level by adding a horizontal line to the diagram
area.

Performing Gated Sweeps

When the external trigger is active, it is possible to perform a gated sweep.
► Press the SWEEP key.
► Press the "Trigger" softkey.

Operating Manual 1173.0966.12 - 07 61

R&S FSC Table of Contents

► Activate an external trigger.

Now that the external trigger is active, the "Gated Trigger" menu item becomes
available.
► Press the "Trigger" softkey again.
► Select the "Gated Trigger" menu item.
In order to get appropriate results, you have to set the gate delay and gate length in a
way that the measurement is active during the interesting part of the signal. You can
also modify the sweep time in order to match the horizontal axis to the length of the
signal and thus set the gate delay and gate length parameters more accurately.
The gate delay parameter defines the time between the trigger event and the
beginning of the actual measurement. The gate length defines the duration of the
measurement, before it is interrupted and the next gate signal is anticipated to resume
the measurement.
► Press the SWEEP key.
► Press the "Trigger" softkey.
► Select the "Gate Settings" menu item.
The R&S FSC opens a softkey submenu to control the gate settings. At the same time,
the R&S FSC switches into time domain, as indicated in the display.
► Press the "Manual SWP Time" softkey and set the sweep time in a way that the
portion of interest of the signal is visible on the screen.
► Press the "Gate Delay" softkey.
The R&S FSC opens an input field to define the trigger delay.
► Enter the delay time you need.
The measurement now starts after the delay time has passed.
► Press the "Gate Length" softkey.
The R&S FSC opens an input field to define the gate length.
► Enter the length of the gate.
The R&S FSC now measures over the period of the gate length. After the gate has
closed, the R&S FSC waits with the measurement until the next gate signal
happens.
The delay time and gate length are represented by vertical red lines in the diagram
area.
► After setting the gate delay and gate length, exit the gate settings menu with the
"Exit" softkey.
The R&S FSC returns to the frequency domain provided it was active before
setting up the gated trigger. The original span is restored. The R&S FSC is ready
to perform measurements with an accurately set gate.

Operating Manual 1173.0966.12 - 07 62

R&S FSC Table of Contents

2.2.5 Working with Traces

The trace menu contains all functions available to customize the trace display.

2.2.5.1 Selecting the Trace Mode

The R&S FSC provides several trace modes. The trace mode defines the way the
R&S FSC writes the trace.
● Clear/Write
In its default state, the R&S FSC overwrites the trace after each sweep.
You can apply all detectors in this mode.
● Average
The trace is the result of the moving average over several sweeps.
The R&S FSC calculates the (moving) average of the power levels for each pixel
over a particular number of sweeps in the range from 2 to 999.
Averaging reduces the effects of noise, but has no effects on sine signals. Using
the trace averaging therefore is a good way to detect signals in the vicinity of
noise.
You can apply all detectors in this mode.
● Max Hold
The trace shows the maximum power levels that have been measured at each
pixel.
To overwrite a max hold trace, change a parameter in a way that the results can
not be compared any more, e.g. the span. Using the max hold trace mode is a
good way to detect intermittent signals or the maximum values of fluctuating
signals, for example.
Using the max hold trace mode automatically activates the max peak detector.
● Min Hold
The trace shows the minimum power levels that have been measured at each
pixel.
To overwrite a min hold trace, change a parameter in a way that the results can not
be compared any more, e.g. the span. Using the min hold trace mode is a good
way to highlight signals within noise or suppress intermittent signals.
Using the min hold trace mode automatically activates the min peak detector.
● View
The view trace mode freezes the current trace and aborts the measurement.
Using the view trace mode is a good way to evaluate the trace, for example with
markers.

Operating Manual 1173.0966.12 - 07 63

R&S FSC Table of Contents

► Press the TRACE key.

► Press the "Trace Mode" softkey.
The R&S FSC opens a submenu to select the trace mode.
► Select the trace mode you want to work with.
If you have selected the average trace mode ("Average: 10" menu item), the
R&S FSC opens an input field to set the number of sweeps the R&S FSC includes
in the averaging.
► Enter the number of sweeps to include in the averaging.
In continuous sweep mode, the R&S FSC now calculates the moving average over
the number of sweeps you have specified. In single sweep mode, it stops the
measurement after finishing the sweeps and averages the traces.

2.2.5.2 Selecting the Detector

The number of measurement results collected in a single sweep usually is very high,
especially if the span is large. However, the display of the R&S FSC can display only
631 results in horizontal direction, as it is limited by the number of pixels that are
available on the display. Therefore, it has to combine measurement results to fit them
on the display. In that case, one pixel represents a frequency range = span/631.
The detector determines the way the R&S FSC combines and displays the results for
one pixel. The data base is the video voltage of the analyzer.
The R&S FSC provides several types of detectors.
● Auto Peak
If the auto peak detector is active, the R&S FSC displays both the maximum and
the minimum power levels that were measured in the frequency range covered by
a pixel.
Therefore, the auto peak detector loses no information. If a signal power level
fluctuates (e.g. noise), the width of the trace depends on the magnitude of the
signal fluctuation.
The auto peak detector is the default detector.
● Max Peak
If the max peak detector is active, the R&S FSC displays only the maximum power
levels that were measured in the frequency range covered by a pixel.
The max peak detector is useful for measurements on pulse or FM signals, for
example.
● Min Peak
If the max peak detector is active, the R&S FSC displays only the minimum power
level that were measured in the frequency range covered by a pixel.
The min peak detector displays sine signals with the correct level and suppresses
noise. Therefore it is useful to find sine signals in the vicinity of noise.

Operating Manual 1173.0966.12 - 07 64

R&S FSC Table of Contents

● Sample
If the sample detector is active, the R&S FSC shows one random power level that
was measured in the frequency range covered by a pixel.
The sample detector is useful for measurements in the time domain (span = 0 Hz)
as it provides the only way to represent the timing of the video signal correctly.
In the frequency domain, the sample detector is a good way to measure noise
power because noise usually has a uniform spectrum with a normal amplitude
distribution.
Signals may get lost if you are using the sample detector for measurements with a
span that is greater than "RBW*631".
● RMS
If the RMS detector is active, the R&S FSC measures the spectral power over one
pixel. In case of power measurements, the RMS detector always shows the true
power of a signal, regardless of the shape of the signal.
The RMS detector is best for measurements on digitally modulated signals
because it provides stable and true power readings. In combination with a high
sweep time you can increase the display stability even more because the
measurement time for each pixel increases.
Noise measurements also provide stable results if you apply the RMS detector in
combination with a high sweep time.
However, the bandwidth occupied by the signal to be measured should at least
equal the frequency covered by a trace pixel or the selected resolution bandwidth
(whichever is larger). Otherwise, the power the R&S FSC shows is too low
because there are spectral components within the frequency range covered by the
pixel that do not originate from the signal you want to observe (e.g. noise).
To get the true power, the video bandwidth (VBW) should also be greater than the
resolution bandwidth (RBW). Otherwise, an averaging effect caused by video
bandlimiting comes into play before the RMS value is calculated.
The R&S FSC provides automatic selection of the detector. In that case, the R&S FSC
selects the detector that is most suitable for the current trace mode.

Trace mode Detector

Clear/Write Auto Peak

Average Sample

Max Hold Max Peak

Min Hold Min Peak

Operating Manual 1173.0966.12 - 07 65

R&S FSC Table of Contents

If you select the detector manually, the detector is independent of the trace mode and
will not change.
► Press the TRACE key.
► Press the "Detector" softkey.
► Select the detector you want to use.
If you automatic detector selection is active, the corresponding menu item is
marked by an [X].

2.2.5.3 Working with a Second Trace

In spectrum mode, you can use two traces. Both traces are based on the same
settings, except the trace settings like the trace mode or the detector. You can use the
second trace to compare, for example, two different detector settings.
In the default state, only trace 1 is active.
► Press the TRACE key.
► Press the "Show" softkey.
► Select the "Trace 2" menu item.
The R&S FSC shows the second
trace. The second trace is in a
different color. To show that the
second trace is active, the
R&S FSC labels the "Trace 2"
menu item with an [X].
After you have activated the
second trace, this is also the
active one. All actions (like
changing the detector or trace
mathematics) apply to the active
trace.
The trace indicator shows the currently active trace with a white background.

► Press the "Select Trace" softkey.

Trace 1 becomes the active trace.
You can put both traces into the internal memory of the R&S FSC and restore them
later. Note that the memory trace 1 and memory trace 2 have the same color (i.e.
white).

Operating Manual 1173.0966.12 - 07 66

R&S FSC Table of Contents

2.2.5.4 Working with Memory Traces

You can save the image of both traces to the memory of the R&S FSC and later
restore it and compare it to a live trace. The memory trace is always colored white to
distinguish it from the live trace.

Measurement settings
Because the memory trace is just a bitmap, any modifications to measurement settings
like span or reference level are nor reflected in the memory trace.

When you save a data set, the R&S FSC also stores the associated trace in the trace
memory. If you restore it at a later time, you can display the memory trace as if it is a
normal memory trace.
► Press the TRACE key.
► Select the trace you want to store
in the trace memory with the
"Select Trace" softkey.
► Press the "TraceMemory"
softkey.
The R&S FSC saves the active
trace.
► Press the "Show" softkey.
► Select the "Memory <x>" menu
item.
The R&S FSC shows the corresponding memory trace. If active, it labels the
"Memory <x>" menu item with an [X].

2.2.5.5 Using Trace Mathematics

Trace mathematics substract the memory trace from the live trace and vice versa and
then display the results.
► Press the TRACE key.
► Press the "TraceMemory"
softkey.
► Press the "Show" softkey.
► Press the "Trace Math" softkey.
► Select the "Trace-Memory" or
"Memory-Trace" menu item.
The R&S FSC calculates and
shows the resulting trace.

► To turn off trace mathematics, select the "Off" menu item.

Operating Manual 1173.0966.12 - 07 67

R&S FSC Table of Contents

2.2.6 Using Markers

The spectrum analyzer mode provides marker and deltamarker functionality. In

addition, you can use several marker functions.

2.2.6.1 Using Markers and Deltamarkers

The R&S FSC has six markers, five of which can be used as either markers or delta
markers.
The markers cannot leave the trace and indicate the horizontal and vertical coordinates
of the point they are positioned on. The horizontal position of a marker is shown by a
vertical line which extends from the top to the bottom of the measurement diagram.
The marker list above the diagram area shows the exact coordinates of all markers in
use.
The position of a delta marker is indicated by a dashed line to distinguish it from a
normal marker. The delta marker level is always a relative to the main marker level and
so the delta marker level unit is always dB. The delta marker frequency is always
relative to the main marker – in other words, the delta marker frequency is the
frequency difference between the frequency at the point marked by the main marker
and the frequency at the point marked by the delta marker.
To measure complex signals, you can activate up to six markers. Marker 1 is always a
normal marker and the reference of all delta markers. Markers 2 to 6 are either
markers or delta markers depending on your set up.

Screen Layout with Active Markers

1 Marker list
2 Marker label: M(x)
3 Delta marker label: D(x)
4 Active marker label (red label)
5 Delta marker (blue dotted line)
6 Marker (blue line)
7 Marker input field
8 Marker menu

Operating Manual 1173.0966.12 - 07 68

R&S FSC Table of Contents

2.2.6.2 Positioning Markers

► Press the MARKER key.

The marker menu opens.
If, as yet, no marker has been activated, the R&S FSC automatically activates the
main marker and positions it on the maximum level that has been measured. In
addition, the marker frequency input field opens.
You can perform the following actions:
● Position the marker with the cursor keys.
When positioning the marker with the cursor keys, the step size is 10% of the
span.
● Position the marker with the rotary knob
When positioning the marker with the rotary knob, the step size is one pixel.
● Enter a marker position with the number keys and confirm the entry with one of the
unit keys.
► Confirm the marker position with the ENTER key.
The marker input field closes.
By default, the marker list above the diagram area is active. The marker list shows
the horizontal position of all markers and the corresponding vertical value. If
inactive, the list shows only the coordinates of markers 1 and 2.
You can turn it off and on again whenever you like.
► Press the "View List" softkey.
The marker list turns off or on, depending on its original state.

2.2.6.3 Positioning a Delta Marker

When a normal marker is already in use, you can add delta markers.
► Press the MARKER key.
► Press the "New Marker" softkey.
The R&S FSC activates a delta marker and positions it on the next maximum level
that has been measured. In addition, the delta marker input field opens.
The R&S FSC adds the delta marker to the marker list and shows the marker
position relative to the normal marker (M1).
You can perform the following actions:
● Enter a delta marker position with the number keys and confirm the entry with one
of the unit keys.
● Change the delta marker position with the rotary knob or the cursor keys.

Operating Manual 1173.0966.12 - 07 69

R&S FSC Table of Contents

► Confirm the delta marker position with the ENTER key.

The delta marker input field closes.
► To add more markers, press the "New Marker" softkey several times until you have
the number of markers you want in the display.

2.2.6.4 Selecting the Marker Type

When you add new markers, they will be delta markers by default. Their coordinates
are relative to the first marker (M1). You can turn delta markers into normal markers if
you need absolute information about the marker position.
► Press the MARKER key.
► Select the delta marker you want to convert with the "Select Marker" softkey.
The corresponding marker symbol turns red and the marker input field opens.
► Press the "Marker Type" softkey.
The delta marker turns into a normal marker. Its label changes accordingly (e.g. D2
to M2) and its coordinates are now absolute values.

2.2.6.5 Automatic Positioning of Markers

The R&S FSC offers functions that make setting the markers easier or allow to make
instrument settings on the basis of the current marker position:
● "Set to Peak"
The Peak function places the active marker or the delta marker on the highest level
value of the trace.
● "Set to Next Peak"
The Next Peak function places the active marker or delta marker on the next
highest level value of the trace, relative to its current position.
● "Set to Minimum"
The Minimum function places the active marker or delta marker on the lowest
value of the trace.
► Press the MKR key.
► Press the "Set to Peak", "Set to Next Peak" or "Set to Minimum" softkey.
The R&S FSC positions the marker accordingly.

Operating Manual 1173.0966.12 - 07 70

R&S FSC Table of Contents

2.2.6.6 Removing Markers

Remove markers any time you want.

Removing selected markers

► Select the marker you want to delete with the "Select Marker" softkey.
The corresponding marker symbol turns red and the marker input field opens.
► Press the MARKER key.
► Press the "Delete Marker" softkey.
► Select the "Delete Selected" menu item.
► Confirm the selection with the ENTER key.
The R&S FSC deletes the marker.

Deactivating markers
If you delete marker 1 (M1), all delta markers that are relative to that marker are also
deleted.

Removing delta markers only

► Press the MARKER key.
► Press the "Delete Marker" softkey.
► Select the "Delete All Delta" menu item.
► Confirm the selection with the ENTER key.
The R&S FSC deletes all delta markers.

Removing all markers at the same time.

► Press the MARKER key.
► Press the "Delete Marker" softkey.
► Select the "Delete All" menu item.
► Confirm the selection with the ENTER key.
The R&S FSC deletes all markers and delta markers.

Operating Manual 1173.0966.12 - 07 71

R&S FSC Table of Contents

2.2.6.7 Using Marker Search Limits

The R&S FSC allows you to use only a limited section of the trace for the "Set to
Peak", "Set to Next Peak" and "Minimum" functions.
► Press the MKR key.
► Press the "Search Limits" softkey.
► Select the "Search Limits On/Off" menu item.
► Confirm the selection with the ENTER key.
The R&S FSC activates the marker search limits.
An [X] indicates an active search limit. Two vertical red lines show the lower and upper
limits in the diagram.
By default, the search limit range is over the whole span.
► Press the "Search Limits" softkey
► Select the "Lower Limit" menu item.
► Confirm the selection with the ENTER key.
The R&S FSC opens an input field to define the lower limit of the search range.
► Enter the lower limit.
► Confirm the entry with one of the unit keys.
If the span is wide enough, the R&S FSC displays a red vertical line to indicate the
lower limit.
► Define the upper search limit the same way.

Deactivating marker search limits

► Press the "Search Limits" softkey.
► Select the "Search Limits On/Off" menu item.
► Confirm the selection.
The "Search Limits" softkey turns grey again and in the "Search Limits" menu, the
[X] is no longer displayed.

Operating Manual 1173.0966.12 - 07 72

R&S FSC Table of Contents

2.2.6.8 Using Marker Functions

In addition to the frequency and level readout, the R&S FSC provides several, more
complex, marker functions in spectrum analyzer mode.

Deactivating marker functions

Selecting a marker function again while it is still active turns that marker function off.

Measuring the Noise Power Density

The marker noise function calculates the noise power density at the marker position in
dBm/Hz. The R&S FSC includes several variables in the calculation of the noise power
density, including the trace pixel values, the resolution bandwidth, the detector and the
level display mode (absolute or relative). To stabilize the noise power display, the
R&S FSC uses the pixel the marker is on and four pixels to the right and four pixels to
the left of the marker pixel.
Noise power density can provide useful information when you are measuring noise or
digitally modulated signals. However, you will get valid results only if the spectrum in
the vicinity of the marker has a flat frequency response. When measuring the noise
power density on discrete signals, results are not valid.
► Press the MARKER key.
► Press the "Marker Function"
softkey.
► Select the "Noise" menu item.
The R&S FSC shows the level at
the marker frequency in dBm/Hz. If
you are using a delta marker for
the measurement, the results have
the unit dBc/Hz with marker 1
being the reference.

Measuring the Frequency

The R&S FSC provides a frequency counter. The frequency counter accurately
measures the frequency at the marker position.
When calculating the horizontal position of the marker, the R&S FSC includes the
current span, center frequency and the frequency of the pixel the marker is on. As the
trace only has 631 pixels, the marker position is just an approximation, especially if the
span is very wide.
With the frequency counter, however, you can get a more accurate result of the
horizontal marker position. If the frequency counter is active, the R&S FSC stops the
measurement at the marker position for a short time and measures the frequency
using the internal reference frequency.

Operating Manual 1173.0966.12 - 07 73

R&S FSC Table of Contents

The accuracy of the results therefore depends only on the accuracy of the internal
reference frequency (TCXO). The frequency counter has a resolution of 0.1 Hz and
therefore provides far more accurate results. Despite the accuracy, the measurement
is still fast (because of a special algorithm for the I/Q baseband signal).
The frequency counter only gives completely accurate readings for sine signals that
are at least 20 dB above the noise floor. If the S/N ratio is less, noise affects the
results.
► Press the MARKER key.
► Press the "Marker Function"
softkey.
► Select the "Frequency Count"
menu item
The R&S FSC displays the
counted marker frequency with a
resolution of 1 Hz. If the frequency
counter is on, the marker symbol
changes from M1 to C.

Measuring the Signal Bandwidth

The "n dB Down" marker function places two temporary markers to the left and to the
right of the reference marker and measures the bandwidth between the two temporary
markers. The function therefore is a good way to measure the bandwidth of a signal or
the bandwidth of a filter, for example. The temporary markers are represented as two
vertical lines.
The distance to the reference marker is by default 3 dB below the reference marker.
You can also adjust this value manually. Entering a positive value sets the temporary
markers below the reference marker. If it is, for any reason, not possible to calculate
the frequency spacing, dashes are displayed instead of a value.
Upon entering a negative value, the function turns into a n dB up function. You can use
a n dB up function, for example, for measurements on notch filters.
► Press the MARKER key.
► Press the "Marker Function"
softkey.
► Select the "n dB Down" menu item
The R&S FSC displays two
temporary markers on the left and
on the right of the reference
marker M1. It also shows the
bandwidth between the n dB down
markers.

Operating Manual 1173.0966.12 - 07 74

R&S FSC Table of Contents

You can then adjust the distance of the temporary markers.

► Press the "Marker Function" softkey.
► Select the "n dB Down" menu item
The R&S FSC opens an input field
► Enter a different distance (in this case 6 dB).
The R&S FSC again shows the temporary markers, this time with a broader bandwidth.

Demodulating Signals
The R&S FSC features an AM and FM demodulator to demodulate and monitor audio
signals. It demodulates the signal at the marker frequency.
You can listen to the demodulated signal with the internal speaker or headphones that
you can connect to the 3.5 mm headphone jack on the top of the R&S FSC.
When demodulating an AM modulated signal, the R&S FSC turns the video voltage
into an audible sound. You should therefore set the reference level to about the level of
the signal that you are demodulating.
If you perform measurements in the time domain, the R&S FSC demodulates
continuously. In the frequency domain, you can define a time period the R&S FSC
demodulates the signal at the marker frequency. The frequency sweep then stops at
the marker frequency for that time before finishing the sweep.
► Press the MARKER key.
► Press the "Marker Function" softkey.
► Select the demodulation scheme you require from the menu.
The R&S FSC starts to demodulate the signal.

Demodulating signals
If you turn on the demodulator, the R&S FSC automatically turns off the noise marker
or the frequency counter.

Defining the demodulation time period

► Press the MARKER key.
► Press the "Marker Function" softkey.
► Select the "Time…" menu item.
The R&S FSC opens an input field to define the demodulation time.
► Enter the demodulation time you need.
The range is from 100 ms to 500 s. In time domain the R&S FSC demodulates
continuously, i.e. the demodulation time is not relevant.

Operating Manual 1173.0966.12 - 07 75

R&S FSC Table of Contents

Controlling the volume

► Press the MARKER key.
► Press the "Marker Function" softkey.
► Select the "Volume…" menu item.
The R&S FSC opens an input field to define the demodulation volume.
► Enter the volume you are comfortable with.
The demodulation volume is a percentage (0 % to 100 %) with 100 % being full
volume.
For more information on general volume control see the Quick Start Guide.

2.2.7 Using Display Lines

Like markers, display lines help you to determine the level of the signal.
A display line is a straight line that runs horizontally and corresponds to a certain level
value. You can move the display line to each pixel in the display. This means that the
accuracy and exact vertical position of the display line depends on the resolution of the
vertical axis. With a display range of 100 dB, for example, each pixel corresponds to
0.3 dB. In that case, the accuracy of the display line is 0.3 dB. If you enter a value with
a higher resolution, the R&S FSC rounds that value.
You can also move the display line with the rotary knob or the cursor keys. The step
size for movement with the rotary knob is one pixel. The step size for the cursor keys is
10 % of the display range.
► Press the LINES key.
► Press the "Display Line" softkey.
The R&S FSC displays the display line as a blue horizontal line. It shows the
vertical position of the line in a table above the diagram area.
When you activate the display line, the R&S FSC also opens an input field to
define the vertical position of the line.
► Enter the level value you need.
The R&S FSC positions the display line accordingly.
Alternatively you can also move the display line with the rotary knob or the cursor
keys.

Operating Manual 1173.0966.12 - 07 76

R&S FSC Table of Contents

2.2.8 Using Limit Lines

Limit lines help you to identify if a signal complies with certain level characteristics.
A limit line is made up out of two or more points that are connected to a line. Each of
the points that define the shape of the limit line consists of two coordinates. One
coordinate defines the horizontal position (e.g. frequency), the other one the vertical
position. With the R&S FSC you can build limit lines that consist of up to 1000 points.
Values that define the horizontal characteristics of the limit line can be either absolute
values (e.g. frequency in MHz) or relative values whose reference is the center of the
measurement trace (e.g. the center frequency). Relative values are of advantage if
you, for example, measure modulated output signals and you change the center
frequency but need the limit line to remain the same. Absolute limit lines have the file
extension ".abslim" while relative limit lines have the file extension ".rellim"
Values that define the vertical characteristsics are always level values in dB. If the
scaling of the vertical axis is currently a linear one (units V or W), the R&S FSC
automatically switches to a logarithmic scaling after you turn on the limit line.
After turning on a limit line, the R&S FSC checks if the signal violates the shape of the
limit line. If one or more signal levels violate the limits, the R&S FSC features several
indicators that the limit check has failed.
● A general message in the diagram header that indicates if the signal violates the
limit line, including the trace that violates the limit:
● An audio signal that sounds every time a limit is violated
● The trace color turns red in areas of the spectrum that violate a limit
You can create and edit limit lines with the R&S FSCView software package and then
transfer them into the internal memory of the R&S FSC. The number of limit lines you
can store in the memory depends on other datasets available on the R&S FSC or, if
you are using an external storage device (e.g. memory stick), the size of it.
For more information see "Managing Datasets" on page 14.

Operating Manual 1173.0966.12 - 07 77

R&S FSC Table of Contents

2.2.8.1 Selecting a Limit Line

Before selecting a limit line, you need to decide if you want to use it as an upper or
lower limit line. In case of upper limit lines, the R&S FSC checks if the signal is above
the limit line. In case of lower limit lines, the R&S FSC checks if the signal is below the
limit line.
You also have to make sure that the limit line is compatible to the scale of the
horizontal axis.
► Press the LINES key.
► Depending on the application, press the "Upper Limit" or "Lower Limit" softkey.
The R&S FSC opens a dialog box to select the limit line.
► Select the "Load From File…" menu item.
► Press the "Sort/Show" softkey.
► Select the "Show Compatible" menu item.
The R&S FSC shows all limit lines that are compatible to the current settings.
► Select one of the available limit lines.
► Press the "Select" softkey.
The R&S FSC activates the limit line. In the diagram, the limit line is displayed as a
red line.
If you have already selected a limit line, you can turn the limit line on and off with
the "Limits On/Off" softkey.
Alternatively, you can define a threshold that works like a limit line. A threshold is a
simple horizontal limit line.
► Press the "Upper Limit" or "Lower Limit" softkey.
► Select the "Threshold" menu item.
The R&S FSC opens a input field to define the threshold.
► Enter the threshold you need.
The R&S FSC displays the line and performs a limit check for that threshold.

Threshold line and display line

Like the display line, a threshold line is a straight horizontal line. The difference is that
the R&S FSC performs a limit check for threshold lines, but not for display lines.
A failed limit check may be an issue if you want to create a measurement report,
because measurements with failed limits are not included in this report.
Using a display line, you can use a line and are able to create a measurement report at
the same time, regardless if any limits have been violated or not.

Operating Manual 1173.0966.12 - 07 78

R&S FSC Table of Contents

The process of turning off a limit line completely is similar to that of selecting a line.
► Press the "Upper Limit" or "Lower Limit" softkey
► Select the "Unselect Limit" menu item.
The R&S FSC deactivates the limit line.

2.2.8.2 Performing Limit Checks

If limit lines are active, the R&S FSC automatically checks the trace for limit violations
after each frequency sweep. As long as the signal does not violate the limit line, the
R&S FSC shows a "Pass" message in the measurement diagram. As soon as one
single value (i.e. one pixel) is outside of the limits, the R&S FSC displays a "Fail"
message in the diagram area and, in addition, sounds a beep.
A limit checks relates only to the frequency range defined by the limit line, not the
span.

Audio signal
You can turn the acoustic signal that sounds in case of a limit violation on and off.
► Press the "Options" softkey.
► Select the "Audio Beep" menu item.
An [X] in front of the "Audio Beep" menu item indicates that the beeper is active. If
the audio beep is active, the R&S FSC beeps each time a limit is violated.

Limit violation
Note that a limit check fails only if the signal exceeds the limit line.
If the signal level is the same as the limit value, the limit check passes.

Operating Manual 1173.0966.12 - 07 79

R&S FSC Table of Contents

2.3 Working with Channel Tables

Almost all transmission systems divide their assigned frequency ranges into channels.
Each channel corresponds to a specific frequency. To keep the handling of such
systems simple, you can use channel tables instead of entering frequencies manually.
The R&S FSC already comes with an assortment of channel tables that you can use
without doing anything. If you want to test transmission standards that are not listed,
you can also build channel tables manually with the "Channel Table Editor" of the
R&S FSCView software package that is delivered with the R&S FSC. To use one of
those, you just have to copy the channel table to the R&S FSC.
For more information see "Managing Datasets" on page 14.

Selecting a channel table

► Press the FREQ key.
► Press the "Frequency Mode" softkey.
► Select the "Channel" menu item.
The R&S FSC opens a dialog box to select a channel table.
► Select one of the available channel tables.
After activating the channel table, the R&S FSC is set up according to the
information contained in the channel table. Instead of a center frequency, the
R&S FSC shows the currently active channel number including the name of the
channel. The center frequency of a channel is defined in the channel table and is
the frequency corresponding to the selected channel.

Selecting a channel
Entering a center, start or stop frequency is not possible anymore. Instead you select a
channel. The R&S FSC then adjusts the center, start and stop frequency according to
the channel table.
► Press the FREQ key.
► Press the "Center Frequency" softkey.
The R&S FSC opens an input field to select the channel.
► Enter the channel you want to perform measurements on.
The R&S FSC changes the channel according to the channel table.
Channel numbers are assigned to frequencies as follows:
- The first channel is assigned a channel number and a frequency.
- All subsequent channels have ascending numbers.
- The frequency spacing between channels is fixed. It can also be negative, i.e.
the center frequency of the R&S FSC decreases with ascending channel
number.
- In transmission systems containing gaps in the frequency range (as in the case
of television, for example), a channel table can comprise multiple ranges.

Operating Manual 1173.0966.12 - 07 80

R&S FSC Table of Contents

2.4 Using Transducer Factors

The frequency-dependent transducer factor of transducers and antennas can be
directly considered in the measurement result. A transducer factor consists of a
numeric value and a unit. The R&S FSC corrects the level values of the trace by the
values of the transducer. At the same time, the unit of the transducer is assigned to the
level axis. When field-strength measurements are performed with the aid of antennas,
for instance, the electrical field strength is directly indicated in dBµV/m on the
R&S FSC. A transducer factor can also be used to correct a frequency-dependent
attenuation, e.g. of a cable between DUT and RF input of the R&S FSC.
You can create and edit transducer factor with the R&S FSCView software package
and then transfer them into the internal memory of the R&S FSC. Each transducer
factor may consist of up to 1000 reference values.
For more information see "Managing Datasets" on page 14.
Interpolation between the values is performed with the aid of a modified spline
algorithm. Even if only relatively few values such as maxima, minima and turning
points are available, this algorithm can easily simulate the correction factors of
common transducers. Two transducers can be switched on at a time. The second
transducer must be assigned the unit dB. The R&S FSC adds the two transducers to a
total transducer.
Units supported for transducer factors:
● dB
● dBµV/m
● dBµA/m
● W/m2
The unit dB does not change the unit set on the R&S FSC. It can be used, for instance,
to compensate for frequency-dependent loss and gain at the input of the R&S FSC.
The units dBµV/m and dBµA/m convert the output power of an antenna into electric or
magnetic field strength. The unit W/m2 is used to calculate and display the power flux
density.
For example, to compensate for the cable loss between the transducer and the RF
input, the R&S FSC can use two transducers at the same time. One of them must have
the unit dB, however, i.e. it must correspond to one loss or gain value.
► Press the AMPT key.
► Press the "Transducer" softkey.

Transducer factor availability

Transducer factors are not available for measurements with the tracking generator or
the Power Sensors. The "Transducer" softkey is therefore inactive.

Operating Manual 1173.0966.12 - 07 81

R&S FSC Table of Contents

You can select two transducer factors, a primary transducer and a secondary
transducer. If a transducer factor is active, the menu item has an [X] in front of it.
► Select the "Select Primary Transducer" menu item.
The R&S FSC opens a dialog box to select the transducer factor.
► Select the transducer factor you need.
► Confirm the selection with the "Select" softkey.
The R&S FSC shows the name of the active transducer on the display.
An example would be the transducer factor of the R&S HL223 antenna that is defined
between 200 MHz and 1300 MHz. The R&S FSC therefore displays the noise in this
frequency range as a function of frequency incremented by the transducer factor.
Outside the transducer range, the R&S FSC sets the transducer factor at zero, i.e.
measurements in this range do not yield conclusive results.
You can select a second transducer factor with the "Select Secondary Transducer"
menu item. The secondary transducer factor in that case is added to the first. The unit
of the second transducer factor must always be the relative unit dB as otherwise an
addition would not be useful. When you select a secondary transducer factor, the
dialog box shows only those transducer factors that have dB as their unit.

2.4.1 Unit for Measurements with Transducers

If the unit of the transducer is dB, the units dBm, dBmV or dBµV remain unchanged.
The linear units Volt and Watt are not permissible. They are deactivated in the units
menu.
If the unit of the transducer is dBµV/m or dBµA/m, this unit is also used for the
R&S FSC level display. This means that both the level axis of the diagram and the
level at the marker position are assigned the unit of the transducer. If dBµV/m is
selected as the transducer unit, a switch to absolute level indication in V/m is possible.
► Press the AMPT key.
► Press the "Unit" softkey.
► Select the V(olt) menu item.
If you are using a transducer with the unit dBµA/m, it is not possible to select another
unit. Level indication is entirely in dBµA/m.

2.4.2 Setting the Reference Level

The transducer shifts the trace by its value as a function of frequency. Positive
transducer values increase the level, negative values reduce it. To ensure that the
trace is always within the diagram, the R&S FSC adjusts the reference level
accordingly. The reference level is shifted by the maximum transducer value in the
positive or negative direction.

Operating Manual 1173.0966.12 - 07 82

R&S FSC Table of Contents

2.4.3 Frequency Range of Transducer

If the set frequency range is wider than the span in which a transducer is defined, the
R&S FSC assumes the transducer values outside the defined range to be zero.

2.4.4 Data Sets Containing Transducer Factors

The R&S FSC stores data sets together with any transducer factors that may have
been active for the measurement in question. When such a dataset is recalled, the
associated transducer factor(s) are switched on as well. Transducer factors recalled as
part of a data set do however not appear in the list of transducer factors.

Operating Manual 1173.0966.12 - 07 83

R&S FSC Table of Contents

3 Power Sensors
For highly accurate power measurements, you can connect a power sensor to the
R&S FSC and perform measurements.

3.1 Using a Power Sensor

A power sensor measures the power in the frequency range defined in the data sheet
of the power sensor. This means that you can measure both sine signals and
modulated signals precisely over a large dynamic range.
The R&S FSC supports the following power sensors.
● R&S NRP-Z11 (USB)
● R&S NRP-Z21 (USB)
● R&S NRP-Z22 (USB)
● R&S NRP-Z23 (USB)
● R&S NRP-Z24 (USB)
● R&S NRP-Z31 (USB)
● R&S NRP-Z51 (USB)
● R&S NRP-Z55 (USB)
● R&S NRP-Z56 (USB)
● R&S NRP-Z57 (USB)
● R&S NRP-Z81 (USB)
● R&S NRP-Z91 (USB)
● R&S NRP-Z92 (USB)
● R&S NRP-Z211 (USB)
● R&S NRP-Z221 (USB)
If you are using one of the NRP power sensors you also need a passive USB adapter
(R&S NRP-Z4) to connect the power sensor to the R&S FSC.
For more information on the characteristics of the supported power sensors see
● the datasheet of the R&S FSC
● the website for R&S power sensors
http://www2.rohde-schwarz.com/en/products/test_and_measurement/power_volt_meter/NRPZ.html

The power sensor function turns the R&S FSC into a wideband power meter. It then
always measures the power of the whole signal in the frequency range of the power
sensor. In most cases the signal shape has no effect on the measurement.
► Press the MODE key.
► Press the "Power Meter" softkey
The R&S FSC activates the mode for power measurements.

Operating Manual 1173.0966.12 - 07 84

R&S FSC Table of Contents

Screen layout of the power meter mode

1 Connected power sensor model

2 Reference for relative power measurements
3 Power offset
4 Measurement time
5 Readout of the measured power
6 Analog readout of the measured power
7 Measurement frequency
8 Power sensor softkey menu

3.1.1 Connecting a Power Sensor

The R&S FSC controls and powers the power sensors via the USB interface.
Connect the power sensor to the USB interface with a passive USB adapter.
After connecting the power sensor to the R&S FSC, you can connect the DUT to the N-
connector of the power sensor.

Risk of damage to the power sensor

Before you start to work with the power sensor, make sure that the continuous power
applied to the input of the power sensor does not exceed a certain level.
Refer to the documentation of the power sensor for more information on the maximum
input power.

If the R&S FSC recognizes a power sensor, it sets up a connection via the interface
and after a few seconds shows the measured power. It displays the type of the power
sensor in the display header.
If no power sensor has been connected or it is not connected appropriately, the
R&S FSC shows nothing.

Operating Manual 1173.0966.12 - 07 85

R&S FSC Table of Contents

If there are communication problems between the R&S FSC and the power sensor, the
R&S FSC displays one of the following error messages that indicate the possible
cause.

Message Cause Remedy

Error in zeroing: signal at sensor A signal was present at the power sensor Unscrew the power sensor from the device
when zeroing was performed. under test and repeat zeroing.

Warning: Input overloaded The power at the input of the power sensor Reduce the power at the sensor input.
exceeds the permitted power (23 dBm =
200 mW).

Power sensor hardware error Communication error between the R&S FSC Unscrew the sensor from the R&S FSC and
and the power sensor. check the connectors.
If the problem persists, contact a Rohde &
Schwarz service center.

Power sensor error The power sensor signals an error to the Contact a Rohde & Schwarz service center.
R&S FSC.

Unknown power sensor model TheR&S FSC cannot identify the device
connected connected to the power sensor interface.

3.1.2 Performing and Configuring Measurements

After you have connected a power sensor, the R&S FSC immediately starts to
measure the signal power.

Defining the center frequency

Power sensors have a memory containing correction values that are dependent on the
frequency. Hence, measurement results are the most accurate for signals whose
frequency you know.
Note that the R&S FSC maintains the center frequency that you have set in another
operating mode. In that case it uses that frequency as the power sensor frequency.
If you want to perform measurements on another known signal, you can change the
power sensor frequency manually.
► Press the MEAS key
► Press the "Freq" softkey.
An input field to define the frequency opens.
► Enter the frequency of the signal.
The R&S FSC transfers the new frequency to the power sensor which then
corrects the measured power readings.

Operating Manual 1173.0966.12 - 07 86

R&S FSC Table of Contents

Zeroing the power sensor

Offset voltages and currents have most effect on the power readout when measuring
low powers. You can compensate for these offsets by zeroing the power sensor.
Do not apply power during the zeroing process, as the power sensor cannot distinguish
between external powers and internal offsets.
► Press the "Zero" softkey.
The R&S FSC asks you not to apply
any signals to the power sensor during
the zeroing process.

► Disconnect the power sensor from any signal sources.

► Press the "Continue" softkey to start zeroing.
► Press "Cancel" to abort zeroing, for example, if you cannot disconnect the signal
source.
The R&S FSC immediately starts power sensor zeroing.
While zeroing is in progress, the
R&S FSC shows the message
“Zeroing power sensor, please
wait..”.
When zeroing is over, the R&S FSC shows the message
and switches back to the softkey menu for the power sensor.

Selecting the unit for the power readout

The R&S FSC can display measured power in relative units (dBm) or in absolute units
(W, mW, µW, nW and pW). It is also possible to set a reference level in dB.
► Press the "Unit" softkey.
A submenu to select the unit opens.
► Select the unit you want.
The R&S FSC adjusts the result display accordingly.

Setting the reference level

If you have selected the unit dB Rel, the R&S FSC opens an input field to set the
reference level. The R&S FSC shows the currently set reference level in the diagram
header.
► Enter the reference level you want.
Alternatively, you can set the current level readout as the reference level.
► Press the "Ref" softkey.
The R&S FSC sets the current result as the reference level.
It then displays the measured level relative to the reference level in dB. The unit is
automatically set to dB Rel...

Operating Manual 1173.0966.12 - 07 87

R&S FSC Table of Contents

Setting the averaging time

The averaging time determines the length of the measurement. The longer the
averaging time, the more stable the display, particularly if signals have low power or
are noisy.
The averaging time is either "Short", "Normal" or "Long".
● A short measurement time provides stable and accurate results for stationary sine
signals with high levels (> -40 dBm). It is also appropriate for measurements that
require a high repition rate.
● A normal measurement time increases the stability of results for signals with low
levels or modulated signals.
● A long measurement time is appropriate for signals with very low power levels
(< -50 dBm)
To eliminate noise and the effects of noise on the measurement effectively, use the
R&S FSH-Z1 power sensor.
► Press the "Meas Time" softkey.
► Select the measurement time most suitable for your test setup.

Taking additional loss or gain into account

At high powers that cause the power sensor maximum input level to be exceeded or at
very low levels that are below the R&S FSC minimum sensitivity, the R&S FSC can
take additional loss or gain between the DUT and the power sensor into account.
These are defined in terms of an offset in dB relative to the measured level. A positive
offset corresponds to a loss and a negative offset to a gain.
The R&S FSC shows the current offset in the diagram header.
► Press the AMPT key.
► Press the "Ref Offset" softkey.
The value entry box for the reference offset opens.
► Enter the required offset.
The offset is taken into account in the power or level display.

Operating Manual 1173.0966.12 - 07 88

R&S FSC Table of Contents

4 Network Analyzer Mode

The network analyzer mode provides the functionality to characterize networks with
one or two ports.
To enable the features of the network analyzer mode, you need at least an R&S FSC
with tracking generator.
An R&S FSC with tracking generator can perform scalar measurements and determine
the reverse transmission characteristics of the device under test (DUT). Scalar
measurements determine the magnitude of the transmitted power.
Measurements yield the best results when you calibrate the R&S FSC to the test
setup. Although the accuracy of measurements is high in the default factory calibration,
the R&S FSC also provides all necessary calibration methods to correct the magnitude
for these kinds of measurements and make results even more accurate.
► Press the MODE key.
► Press the "Network Analyzer" softkey.
The R&S FSC turns on the tracking generator. Frequency and level settings are
inherited from the previous operating mode.

Defining the output level of the tracking generator

The tracking generator generates a signal at the current R&S FSC frequency. The
nominal output level of the signal is adjustable from 0 dBm to -40 dBm in steps of 1 dB.
► Press the AMPT key.
The R&S FSC opens an input field to set the output level.

Screen layout of the network analyzer

Operating Manual 1173.0966.12 - 07 89

R&S FSC Table of Contents

1 Result display
2 Measurement mode
3 0 dB reference
4 Status line
- S-matrix
- Calibration status
- Measurement format
5 Trace window
6 Network analyzer softkey menu

4.1 Calibrating Measurements

In its default state, the R&S FSC uses factory calibration. Factory calibration is a full 2-
port calibration over the current frequency range (i.e. span) of the R&S FSC. When
factory calibration is active, the status line reads . In many cases, this calibration
already provides accurate results.
To get the best and most accurate results, however, you have to calibrate the
measurement manually, because factory calibration does not take the actual test setup
into account (e.g. cables).
Before you calibrate the R&S FSC for the current measurement, you should set the
frequency parameters, reference level and attenuation levels. If you change one of
these parameters after a successful calibration, it may become invalid.
To successfully calibrate the test setup, you have to connect the calibration standard at
the reference plane, usually the output of the RF measurement cable.
During calibration, the R&S FSC removes systematic errors from the measurement.
This process is based on correction data it gets while performing the calibration.
The correction data for transmission measurements is based on the results of
comparing the transmission characteristics of the test setup to the frequency response
of the tracking generator.
Calibration remains valid after turning off the R&S FSC or changing into another
operating mode as calibration data is saved in the internal memory of the R&S FSC. If
you save the measurement in a dataset, calibration data is part of that dataset. When
you restore the dataset and perform the same measurement again, you do not have to
recalibrate the R&S FSC.

Operating Manual 1173.0966.12 - 07 90

R&S FSC Table of Contents

4.1.1.1 Calibration States

The R&S FSC features several calibration states. It displays the current state in the
status line. The possible states depend on the calibration type (see below).
● (fcal)
The R&S FSC uses factory calibration. Factory calibration is restored after a preset
or self alignment. The R&S FSC also uses factory calibration if you change a
frequency parameter (span, start, stop or center frequency) to a value outside the
calibrated frequency range or if you measure another s-parameter than the one the
R&S FSC is calibrated for.
The calibration data for the factory calibration is already in the memory of the
R&S FSC when it is delivered. The factory calibration is a full two-port calibration.
You can restore the factory calibration manually any time.
- Press the "Calibration" softkey.
- Select the "User Calibration Off" menu item.
● (fcal?)
The R&S FSC uses factory calibration. However, the calibration is not accurate
because the power of the tracking generator and the attenuation at the RF input
are not in line with the default settings. In that case you should repeat calibration.
● (norm)
The R&S FSC uses normalization. To get that state you have to normalize the
transmission.
● (norm?)
The R&S FSC uses normalization. However, the normalization is not accurate
because the TG power and receiver attenuation are not in line with the settings at
the time it has been calibrated. In that case you should repeat calibration.
● (interp) (network analysis only)
The R&S FSC interpolates the correction data between the reference points of the
calibration. Interpolation is used when you change one of the frequency
parameters (start, stop or center frequency). In that case the distribution of the
measurement points is different to the distribution during calibration. This could
result in an increasing measurement uncertainty.
When calibration has become invalid for any reason or the calibration data has
changed, you can restore the most recent calibration that was valid.
► Press the "Calibration" softkey.
► Select the "Restore Calibration Settings" menu item.
The R&S FSC restores the calibration data and the frequency settings that were
active.

Operating Manual 1173.0966.12 - 07 91

R&S FSC Table of Contents

4.1.1.2 Calibration Methods

The R&S FSC provides normalization for scalar transmission measurements.

Normalization is a simple but effective way to calibrate the measurement using one
calibration standard only. The correction data is deducted from this measurement.
● Normalize…
Normalization is a simple way to calibrate the measurement using one calibration
standard only. The correction data is deducted from this measurement. As only
one calibration standard is used, the isolation between the test ports is ignored. A
possible cross-talk between the test ports is therefore not eliminated and the
accuracy is lower than that of a full calibration.

4.1.1.3 Performing Calibration

To perform normalization of the transmission measurement, you need a "Through"

connection between the two ports only.
► Disconnect the DUT.
After disconnecting the DUT, the R&S FSC is ready for calibration.
► Press the MEAS key.
► Press the "Calibration" softkey.
► Select the "Normalize Transmission" menu item.

The R&S FSC asks you to set up a

"Through" connection from port 1 to
port 2.

► Firmly connect the "Through" connection to port 1 and port 2.

► Press the "Continue" softkey to start calibration.
The R&S FSC calibrates the "Through" connection.
After finishing the calibration routine, the R&S FSC shows that calibration is
finished for a short time ( ). The status line now says (Norm) to
indicate successful normalization.

Operating Manual 1173.0966.12 - 07 92

R&S FSC Table of Contents

4.2 Performing Scalar Measurements

With scalar measurements, you can measure the magnitude of transmission
characteristics of a device under test. To calibrate the measurements, only
normalization is available.

4.2.1 Measuring the Transmission

The example included here is based on a transmission measurement of a two-port

filter. The filter has a center frequency of 2060 MHz and a bandwidth of about 11 MHz.

Test setup
► Connect the input of the DUT to the tracking generator output (port 2).
► Connect the output of the DUT to the RF input (port 1).

Preset the R&S FSC

Before starting the measurement procedure, preset the R&S FSC to restore the default
configuration and connect the filter between the measurement ports.
► Press the PRESET key.
► Connect the DUT.

Define the frequency parameters

Before calibrating the measurement, you should define the frequency parameters to
avoid inaccurate results because of invalid calibration.
► Press the FREQ key.
The R&S FSC opens an input field to set the center frequency.
► Enter a frequency of 2060 MHz.
► Press the SPAN key.
The R&S FSC opens an input field to define the span.
► Enter a span of 50 MHz to get a high resolution of the results.

Calibrate the measurement for scalar transmission measurements.

Scalar measurements provide normalization only. Normalization is not as accurate as
a full calibration, but yields pretty accurate results nonetheless. In addition,
normalization needs one calibration standard only and therefore is faster than a full
calibration.
► Press the "Calibration" softkey.

Operating Manual 1173.0966.12 - 07 93

R&S FSC Table of Contents

► Select the "Normalize

Transmission Rev (Port 12)
menu item.
► Perform normalization. For more
information see "Performing
Calibration".
► Reconnect the DUT.
The R&S FSC shows the results of
the scalar transmission
measurement on the filter.

You can change the measurement configuration (e.g. select another sweep time or
detector) without affecting the accuracy of the measurement except the frequency
parameters and attenuation.

4.3 Evaluating the Results

4.3.1 Configuring the Vertical Axis

Some results may not fit in the diagram area as it is configured in the default state of
the R&S FSC (for example measurements on amplifiers).
If you are performing measurements on an amplifier, you most likely have to change
the scaling of the vertical axis in order to see the complete transmission function.
The R&S FSC provides several ways to adjust the scaling of the vertical axis.

Changing the reference value

Changing the reference value works like an attenuation or gain in that it moves the
trace to another level. The R&S FSC adjusts the scale of the vertical axis accordingly.
The R&S FSC indicates the value and position of the current reference value with a
triangle at the vertical axis ( ). In the default state, it is 0 dB and its position is the
grid line at the top of the diagram.
The reference value only changes the 0 dB reference without actually attenuating or
amplifying the signal level.
When changing the reference value, make sure that you do not overload the
R&S FSC. As long as the trace is completely within the diagram area and the
reference position at the top of the diagram, the risk of an overload is eliminated.
► Press the AMPT key.
► Press the "Ref" softkey.
The R&S FSC opens an input field.
► Enter the reference value you need to see the trace completely.

Operating Manual 1173.0966.12 - 07 94

R&S FSC Table of Contents

The R&S FSC moves the trace accordingly, relabels the vertical axis and shows
the new 0 dB reference in the hardware settings display.

Changing the reference position

Changing the reference position moves the position of the reference value up or down.
The reference position also moves the trace up or down. The levels and the reference
value, however, remain the same. The default reference position is the grid line at the
top of the diagram. The reference position is indicated by a triangle at the vertical axis
( ).
The reference position is a number between 0 and 10 with 0 being the grid line at the
bottom and 10 being the grid line at the top of the diagram.
► Press the AMPT key.
► Press the "Ref Pos" softkey.
The R&S FSC opens an input field.
► Enter the new position of the reference value.
The R&S FSC moves the trace accordingly and moves the triangle to the new
position.

Operating Manual 1173.0966.12 - 07 95

R&S FSC Table of Contents

Changing the display range

The display range is the value range the vertical axis covers.
When you change the display range, the reference value and position remain the
same. Merely the scale of the vertical axis is compressed or expanded.
► Press the AMPT key.
► Press the "Range" softkey.
► Select the display range you need from the submenu.
The R&S FSC adjusts the vertical axis accordingly.

Automatic scaling of the vertical axis

All measurement formats feature an automatic scale function.
If you use automatic scaling, the R&S FSC automatically sets the display range in a
way that the trace best fits on the display.
► In the "Range" submenu, select the "Auto Scale" menu item.

4.3.2 Using Markers

The network analyzer mode also features markers. The functionality is similar to that of
the spectrum analyzer.
For more information see "Using Markers" on page 68.

4.3.3 Working with Channel Tables

The R&S FSC allows you to use channel tables in network analyzer mode.
► Press the FREQ key.
► Press the "Channel Table" softkey.
The R&S FSC opens the list of channel tables loaded into the R&S FSC via
R&S FSCView.
► Select the channel table you need.
The R&S FSC scans the channel table for the channels with the lowest and
highest frequencies and sets those as the start and stop frequency.
The R&S FSC already comes with an assortment of channel tables that you can use
without doing anything. If you want to test telecommunications standards that are not
listed, you can also build channel tables manually with the "Channel Table Editor" of
the R&S FSCView software package that is delivered with the R&S FSC. To use one
of those, you just have to copy the channel table to the R&S FSC.

Operating Manual 1173.0966.12 - 07 96

R&S FSC Table of Contents

4.3.4 Using Limit Lines

When working with the magnitude format in the network analyzer, you can use limit
lines to set limits for level characteristics on the display that must not be exceeded.
You can create and edit limit lines with the R&S FSCView software and load them into
the R&S FSC via the USB or the LAN interface. The number of limit lines the R&S FSC
can store in its memory depends on the number of other data sets on the R&S FSC.
For more information see
● "Managing Datasets" on page 14
● "Using Limit Lines" on page 77

4.3.5 Using Trace Mathematics

Trace mathematics that subtract one trace from another are available for most
measurement formats in the network analyzer mode.
For more information see "Using Trace Mathematics" on page 67.

Operating Manual 1173.0966.12 - 07 97

R&S FSC Table of Contents

5 Menu and Softkey Overview

This chapter shows an overview of all instrument functions in the form of softkey and
menu overviews.

5.1 General Functions

General functions are those that are available for all operating modes.

5.1.1 General R&S FSC Setup

The SETUP key opens the setup menu that contains functionality to set up the
R&S FSC in general and functionality to set up the measurement.

Operating Manual 1173.0966.12 - 07 98

R&S FSC Table of Contents

5.1.2 File Management

The SAVE/RECALL key opens the file manager that contains functionality to manage
datasets and other files.

5.1.3 Operating Mode Selection

The MODE key opens the mode menu that contains functionality to select the
operating mode of the R&S FSC.

Operating Manual 1173.0966.12 - 07 99

R&S FSC Table of Contents

5.2 Functions of the Spectrum Analyzer

This section contains all softkeys and menus that are available in spectrum analyzer
mode.

5.2.1 Measurement Selection

The MEAS key opens the measurement menu that contains functionality to select and
configure the measurement.
The spectrogram is available only if you have installed option R&S ZVH-K14.

Channel Power

Operating Manual 1173.0966.12 - 07 100

R&S FSC Table of Contents

Occupied Bandwith

TDMA Power

Spectrum Emission Mask

Harmonic Distortion

AM Modulation Depth

Operating Manual 1173.0966.12 - 07 101

R&S FSC Table of Contents

5.2.2 Frequency Parameters

The FREQ key opens the frequency menu that contains functionality to set up the
horizontal axis of the measurement diagram.

5.2.3 Span Selection

The SPAN key opens the span menu that contains functionality to set the span.

5.2.4 Amplitude Parameters

The AMPT key opens the amplitude menu that contains functionality to set up the
vertical axis of the measurement diagram.

Operating Manual 1173.0966.12 - 07 102

R&S FSC Table of Contents

5.2.5 Sweep Configuration

The SWEEP key opens a menu that contains all functionality to configure the sweep.

5.2.6 Bandwidth Selection

The BW key opens a menu that contains all functionality to set the bandwidths.

5.2.7 Trace Functionality

The TRACE key opens the trace menu that contains functionality to set up the traces.

5.2.8 Display and Limit Lines

The LINES key opens a menu that contains the functionality to control display and limit
lines.

Operating Manual 1173.0966.12 - 07 103

R&S FSC Table of Contents

5.2.9 Markers

The MARKER and MKR keys open a menus to control markers and use marker
functions.

Softkey in the Marker Menu

Softkeys in the Marker To Menu

Operating Manual 1173.0966.12 - 07 104

R&S FSC Table of Contents

5.3 Functions of the Network Analyzer

This section contains all softkeys and menus that are available in network analyzer
mode.

5.3.1 Measurement Configuration

The MEAS key opens the measurement menu that contains functionality to select and
configure the measurement.

5.3.2 Frequency Parameters

The FREQ key opens the frequency menu that contains functionality to set up the
horizontal axis of the measurement diagram.

5.3.3 Span Selection

The SPAN key opens the span menu that contains functionality to set the span.

Operating Manual 1173.0966.12 - 07 105

R&S FSC Table of Contents

5.3.4 Amplitude Parameters

The AMPT key opens the amplitude menu that contains functionality to set up the
vertical axis of the measurement diagram.

5.3.5 Sweep Configuration

The SWEEP key opens a menu that contains all functionality to configure the sweep.

5.3.6 Bandwidth Selection

The BW key opens a menu that contains all functionality to set the bandwidths.

5.3.7 Trace Functionality

The TRACE key opens the trace menu that contains functionality to set up the traces.

Operating Manual 1173.0966.12 - 07 106

R&S FSC Table of Contents

5.3.8 Limit Lines

The LINES key opens a menu that contains the functionality to control limit lines.

5.3.9 Markers

The MARKER and MKR keys open a menus to control markers and use marker
functions.

Softkey in the Marker Menu

Softkeys in the Marker To Menu

Operating Manual 1173.0966.12 - 07 107

R&S FSC Table of Contents

5.4 Functions of the Power Meter

This section contains all softkeys and menus that are available in power meter mode.

5.4.1 Power Meter Measurements

The MEAS key opens a menu that contains the functionality to configure
measurements with the power meter.

Power Meter

5.4.2 Frequency Parameters

The FREQ key opens a menu that contains the functionality to set the frequency.

5.4.3 Amplitude Parameters

The AMPT key contains functionality to configure level parameters.

Operating Manual 1173.0966.12 - 07 108

R&S FSC Table of Contents

6 How a Spectrum Analyzer Works

Basically, it is possible to measure and analyze RF signals either in the time domain or
the frequency domain.
Measurements in the time domain show signal variations over time. You can perform
these with an oscilloscope, for example. Measurements in the frequency domain show
the frequency components of a signal. To perform measurements in the frequency
domain, you can use a spectrum analyzer.
Both modes are essentially equivalent because applying the Fourier transform to any
signal converts it into its spectral components. Depending on the signal characteristic
to be measured, one method is usually more appropriate than the other. With an
oscilloscope, it is possible to tell whether a signal is a sine wave, a square wave with a
certain on/off ratio or a sawtooth wave. However, detecting superimposed low-level
signals or monitoring the harmonic content of the signal is easier with a spectrum or
signal analyzer.
Figure 6-1 shows the theoretical basis of the two measurement methods. In the time
domain, an oscilloscope would, for example, show a section of the signal that is a
square wave. The same signal, when viewed with a spectrum analyzer, would show a
line spectrum (the fundamental and its harmonics).

Figure 6-1: Visualization of time domain and frequency domain

Applying the Fourier transform to the periodic square wave transforms it into the
frequency domain. The spectrum analyzer would show the fundamental (or frequency
of the square wave) and its harmonics.
The spectrum analyzer uses a narrow bandpass filter for measurements in the
frequency domain. Only at frequencies containing a signal there is a reading that gives
the amplitude of the frequency component.
Figure 6-2 shows the basic principle of how a spectrum analyzer works.

Operating Manual 1173.0966.12 - 07 109

R&S FSC Table of Contents

Figure 6-2: Block diagram showing the basic functionality of a spectrum analyzer

The precision attenuator at the R&S FSC input attenuates the signal to a level that the
mixer can handle without overdriving the mixer. The attenuator is directly coupled to
the reference level. You can attenuate the signal in the range from 0 dB to 40 dB in
steps of 5 dB.
The mixer converts the RF signal to a fixed intermediate frequency (IF). This process
usually involves several stages. It lasts until you get an IF for which good narrowband
filters are available. The R&S FSC needs three mixing stages to get an IF that the filter
can handle. Figure 6-3 graphically shows the mixing process.
For models with a frequency limit of 3.6 GHz, the IFs are 4892.8 MHz, 860.8 MHz and
54.4 MHz. The conversion from a specific input frequency to the first IF is done by a
local oscillator (LO). This LO can be tuned from 4.8 GHz to 8.4 GHz. All other
conversions are handled by single-frequency oscillators.
In case of models with a frequency limit of 8 GHz, the IFs are 8924.8 MHz, 860.8 MHz
and 54.4 MHz. The conversion from the first to the second IF for these models is done
by a second local oscillator.
The frequency of the local oscillator determines the input frequency at which the
spectrum analyzer performs measurements:
fin = fLO – fIF.
The first mixer produces the sum frequency fLO + fin (= image frequency fimage) as well
as the difference frequency fLO – fin.
The image frequency is rejected by the bandpass at the IF so that it does not interfere
with the subsequent frequency conversions.

Figure 6-3: Mixing process

Operating Manual 1173.0966.12 - 07 110

R&S FSC Table of Contents

The first local oscillator is tuned with a sawtooth which simultaneously acts as the x
deflection voltage for the display. In practice, synthesizer technology is used to
generate the frequency of the first local oscillator and for a digital display.
The instantaneous sawtooth voltage therefore determines the input frequency of the
spectrum analyzer.
The bandwidth of the IF filter at the IF determines the bandwidth that is used for
measurements. Pure sine signals are passed by the IF filter characteristics. This
means that signals closer together than the bandwidth of the IF filter cannot be
resolved. This is why the bandwidth of the IF filter in a spectrum analyzer is referred to
as the resolution bandwidth. The R&S FSC has resolution bandwidths from 1 Hz to
3 MHz.
The bandlimited IF is passed to the envelope detector. The envelope detector removes
the IF from the signal and outputs its envelope. The output signal from the envelope
detector is referred to as the video signal. As it has been demodulated, it only contains
amplitude information. The phase information is lost.
With RF sine signals, the video signal is a DC voltage. With AM signals the video
signal contains a DC component whose amplitude corresponds to the carrier power
and an AC component whose frequency is equal to the modulation frequency, provided
the modulation frequency is inside the resolution bandwidth.

The video filter comes after the envelope detector. The filter is a lowpass with an
adjustable cutoff frequency which limits the bandwidth of the video signal. It is
particularly useful when sine signals are to be measured in the vicinity of the spectrum
analyzer’s intrinsic noise. The sine signal produces a video signal that is a DC voltage.
At the IF, however, the noise is distributed over the whole bandwidth or, in the case of
the video signal, over half the bandwidth of the resolution filter. By selecting a narrow
video bandwidth relative to the resolution bandwidth, the noise can be suppressed,
while the sine signal to be measured (= DC) is not affected.
The figures below show a weak sine signal. In the first picture, it is measured with a
large video bandwidth and in the second with a narrow video bandwidth.

Operating Manual 1173.0966.12 - 07 111

R&S FSC Table of Contents

Limiting the video bandwidth smoothes the trace considerably. This makes it much
easier to determine the level of the measured signal.
The detector comes after the video filter. The detector combines the measured
spectrum so that it can be represented as one pixel in the trace. The R&S FSH uses
631 pixels to form the trace, i.e. the whole measured spectrum has to be represented
using just 631 pixels. Common types of spectrum analyzer detectors are the peak
detector (PEAK), the sample detector (SAMPLE) and the RMS detector (RMS). An
Auto Peak detector which simultaneously displays the maximum peak and the
minimum peak is usually also provided. The Fig. below explains how these detectors
work.

The figure above shows 30 measured values which are represented by a single pixel.
The peak detector determines and displays the maximum measured value. The Auto
Peak detector takes the maximum and minimum and displays them together. The two
values are joined by a vertical line segment. This gives a good indication of the level
variation over the measured values represented by a single pixel. The RMS detector is
used by the spectrum analyzer to determine the RMS value of the measured values. It
is therefore a measure of the spectral power represented by a pixel. The sample
detector takes an arbitrary measurement value and displays it (in the Fig. above, the
first). The other measured values are ignored.

Operating Manual 1173.0966.12 - 07 112

R&S FSC Table of Contents

On the basis of the operating principles of detectors, a few recommendations can be

made as to their use.
● It is best to use the Auto Peak detector or the peak detector for spectrum analysis
over large frequency ranges. This ensures that all signals are displayed.
● The RMS detector is recommended for power measurements on modulated
signals. However, the display range should be chosen so as not to exceed 100
times the bandwidth of the signal or the resolution bandwidth, whichever is larger.
● The sample detector or the RMS detector (preferred) should be used for noise
measurements. Only these two detectors are capable of measuring noise power
correctly.
● When measurements are made on sine signals, the level display does not depend
on the detector. However, if you use the RMS detector or the sample detector,
ensure that the span is not too great. Otherwise, the displayed levels of sine
signals may be lower than their true value.

Operating Manual 1173.0966.12 - 07 113

R&S FSC Remote Control
Interfaces and Protocols

7 Remote Control
7.1 Interfaces and Protocols
The R&S FSC supports two different interfaces for remote control.
● LAN Interface: The protocol is based on TCP/IP and supports the VXI-11 standard.
● USB Interface
The connectors are located at the side of the instrument and permit a connection to a
controller for remote control via a local area network (LAN) or directly via USB.

SCPI
SCPI (Standard Commands for Programmable Instruments) commands - messages -
are used for remote control. Commands that are not taken from the SCPI standard
follow the SCPI syntax rules. The instrument supports the SCPI version 1999. The
SCPI standard is based on standard IEEE 488.2 and aims at the standardization of
device-specific commands, error handling and the status registers. The tutorial
"Automatic Measurement Control - A tutorial on SCPI and IEEE 488.2" from John M.
Pieper (R&S order number 0002.3536.00) offers detailed information on concepts and
definitions of SCPI.
The requirements that the SCPI standard places on command syntax, error handling
and configuration of the status registers are explained in detail in the following
sections. Tables provide a fast overview of the bit assignment in the status registers.
The tables are supplemented by a comprehensive description of the status registers.

VISA
VISA is a standardized software interface library providing input and output functions to
communicate with instruments. The I/O channel (LAN or USB) is selected at
initialization time by means of a channel-specific resource string. For more information
about VISA refer to its user documentation.
The programming examples for remote control are all written in Microsoft® VISUAL
BASIC®. Access to the VISA functions require the declaration of the functions and
constants prior to their use in the project. This can be accomplished either by adding
the modules VISA32.BAS and VPPTYPE.BAS or a reference to the VISA32.DLL to the
project.

Operating Manual 1173.0966.12 - 07 114

R&S FSC Remote Control
Interfaces and Protocols

The modules visa32.bas and vpptype.bas can be found in the following location:
<VXIpnpPath>\WinNT\include (typically C:\VXIpnp\WinNt\include).

Resetting the R&S FSC

Manual operation is designed for maximum possible operating convenience. In
contrast, the priority of remote control is the "predictability" of the device status.
Therefore, control programs should always define an initial device status (e.g. with the
command *RST) and then implement the required settings.

7.1.1 LAN Interface

To be integrated in a LAN, the instrument is equipped with a standard LAN interface,

consisting of a connector, a network interface and protocols (VXI-11).
Instrument access via VXI-11 is usually achieved from high level programming
platforms by using VISA as an intermediate abstraction layer. VISA encapsulates the
low level VXI-11 (LAN) or USB function calls and thus makes the transport interface
transparent for the user. The necessary VISA library is available as a separate product.
For details contact your local R&S sales representative.

7.1.2 USB Interface

For remote control via the USB connection, the PC and the instrument must be
connected via the USB interface. The required driver comes with the R&S FSCView
software package and is automatically installed on the PC with the software package.
The driver adresses the instrument via the USB interface with the fix IP address
172.16.10.10.
In addition, a remote control connection via the SCPI interface requires the VISA
library to be installed on the PC.

7.1.3 Protocols

VXI-11 Basics
The VXI-11 standard is based on the ONC-RPC protocol which in turn relies on TCP/IP
as the network/transport layer. The TCP/IP network protocol and the associated
network services are preconfigured. TCP/IP ensures connection-oriented
communication, where the order of the exchanged messages is adhered to and
interrupted links are identified. With this protocol, messages cannot be lost.
Remote control of an instrument via a network is based on standardized protocols
which follow the OSI reference model (see Fig. below).

Operating Manual 1173.0966.12 - 07 115

R&S FSC Remote Control
Interfaces and Protocols

Application SCPI

Presentation XDR (VXI-11)

Session ONC-RPC

Transport TCP / UDP

Network IP

Data Link Ethernet/802.3

Physical 802.3/10BASE-T

Figure 7-1: Example for LAN remote control based on the OSI reference model

Based on TCP/UDP, messages between the controller and the instrument are
exchanged via open network computing (ONC) - remote procedure calls (RPC). With
XDR (VXI-11), legal RPC messages are known as VXI-11 standard. Based on this
standard, messages are exchanged between the controller and the instrument. The
messages are identical with SCPI commands. They can be organized in four groups:
● program messages (control command to the instrument)
● response messages (values returned by the instrument)
● service request (spontaneous queries of the instrument)
● low-level control messages (interface messages).
A VXI-11 link between a controller and an instrument uses three channels: core, abort
and interrupt channel. Instrument control is mainly performed on the core channel
(program, response and low-level control messages). The abort channel is used for
immediate abort of the core channel; the interrupt channel transmits spontaneous
service requests of the instrument. Link setup itself is very complex. For more details
refer to the VXI-11 specification.

Core channel
(program, response,
control messages)

Instrument Abort channel (abort)

Controller

Interrupt channel
(service request)

Figure 7-2: VXI-11 channels between instrument and controller

The number of controllers that can address an instrument is practically unlimited in the
network. In the instrument, the individual controllers are clearly distinguished. This
distinction continues up to the application level in the controller, i.e. two applications on
a computer are identified by the instrument as two different controllers.

Operating Manual 1173.0966.12 - 07 116

R&S FSC Remote Control
Setting Up the Remote Control Connection

Controller

Instrument Controller

Controller

Figure 7-3: Remote control via LAN from several controllers

The controllers can lock and unlock the instrument for exclusive access. This regulates
access to the instrument of several controllers.

7.2 Setting Up the Remote Control Connection

7.2.1 Preparing for Remote Control

The short and simple operating sequence below shows how to put the instrument into
operation and quickly set its basic functions. The current IP address for LAN operation
is shown in the SETUP – Instrument Setup Menu. In case of USB connection the IP
address is fixed to 172.16.10.10.
Refer to the Quick Start Guide for instructions on how to change the IP address.
► Connect the instrument to the LAN or directly to the controller via USB.
► Switch on the instruments.
► Write and start the following program on the controller:

status = viOpenDefaultRM(defaultRM)
'open default resource manager
status = viOpen(DefaultRM, "TCPIP::172.16.10.10", 0, 0, vi)
'in case of USB connection
status = viopen(DefaultRM, "TCPIP::xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx", 0, 0, vi)
'in case of a LAN connection, with xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx = IP address
cmd = "*RST;*CLS"
status = viWrite(vi, Cmd, Len(Cmd), retCount)
'reset instrument and clear status registers
cmd = "FREQ:CENT 100MHz"
status = viWrite(vi, Cmd, Len(Cmd), retCount)
'set center frequency to 100 MHz
cmd = "FREQ:SPAN 10MHz"
status = viWrite(vi, Cmd, Len(Cmd), retCount)
'set span to 10 MHz
cmd = "DISP:TRAC:Y:RLEV -10dBm"
status = viWrite(vi, Cmd, Len(Cmd), retCount)
'set reference level to -10 dBm
viclose vi
viclose default RM

The instrument now performs a sweep in the frequency range of 95 MHz to 105 MHz.

Operating Manual 1173.0966.12 - 07 117

R&S FSC Remote Control
Instrument Model and Command Processing

Changing the IP Address

In order to operate the instrument via remote control, it must be accessed via LAN (IP
address) or USB (fixed IP address). If the factory-set remote control address does not
fit in the network environment, it can be changed. Refer to the Quick Start Guide,
chapter "Setting up a LAN or USB Connection to a PC", for instructions on how to
change the IP address.

7.3 Instrument Model and Command Processing

The block diagram in Fig. 1-2 shows how SCPI commands are serviced in the
instrument. The individual components work independently and simultaneously. They
communicate with each other by means of so-called "messages".

USB interface Input unit with

Ethernet input buffer

Command
recognition

Instrument
settings database Status reporting
system
Instrument
hardware

USB interface Output unit with

Ethernet output buffer

Figure 7-4: Instrument model in the case of remote control

7.3.1 Input Unit

The input unit receives commands character by character from the controller and
collects them in the input buffer. The input unit sends a message to the command
recognition as soon as the input buffer is full or as soon as it receives a delimiter,
<PROGRAM MESSAGE TERMINATOR>, as defined in IEEE 488.2, or the interface
message DCL.
If the input buffer is full, the traffic is stopped and the data received up to then are
processed. Subsequently the traffic is continued. If, however, the buffer is not yet full
when receiving the delimiter, the input unit can already receive the next command
during command recognition and execution. The receipt of DCL clears the input buffer
and immediately resets the command recognition.

Operating Manual 1173.0966.12 - 07 118

R&S FSC Remote Control
Instrument Model and Command Processing

7.3.2 Command Recognition

The command recognition analyses the data received from the input unit. It proceeds
in the order in which it receives the data. Only DCL is serviced with priority, for
example GET (Group Execute Trigger) is only executed after the commands received
before. Each recognized command is immediately transferred to the internal instrument
settings data base but not executed immediately.
The command recognition detects syntax errors in the commands and transfers them
to the status reporting system. The rest of a program message after a syntax error is
analyzed further if possible and serviced. After the syntax test, the value range of the
parameter is checked, if required.
If the command recognition detects a delimiter, it passes the command to an execution
unit that performs the instrument settings. In the meantime, the command recognition
is ready to process new commands (overlapping execution). A DCL command is
processed in the same way.

7.3.3 Data Base and Instrument Hardware

Here the expression "instrument hardware" denotes the part of the instrument fulfilling
the actual instrument function - signal generation, measurement etc. The controller is
not included. The term "data base" denotes a database that manages all the
parameters and associated settings required for setting the instrument hardware.
Setting commands lead to an alteration in the data set. The data set management
enters the new values (e.g. frequency) into the data set, however, only passes them on
to the hardware when requested by the command recognition. This only takes place at
the end of a program message.
The data are checked for compatibility with the current instrument settings before they
are transmitted to the instrument hardware. If the execution is not possible, an
"execution error" is signaled to the status reporting system. The corresponding settings
are discarded.
Before passing on the data to the hardware, the settling bit in the STATus:OPERation
register is set (refer to section "STATus:OPERation Register"). The hardware executes
the settings and resets the bit again as soon as the new state has settled. This fact can
be used to synchronize command servicing.
Queries induce the data set management to send the desired data to the output unit.

7.3.4 Status Reporting System

For detailed information refer to section "Status Reporting System".

Operating Manual 1173.0966.12 - 07 119

R&S FSC Remote Control
SCPI Command Structure and Syntax

7.3.5 Output Unit

The output unit collects the information requested by the controller, which it receives
from the data base management. It processes it according to the SCPI rules and
makes it available in the output buffer.
If the instrument is addressed as a talker without the output buffer containing data or
awaiting data from the data base management, the output unit sends error message
"Query UNTERMINATED" to the status reporting system. No data are sent to the
controller, the controller waits until it has reached its time limit. This behavior is defined
by IEEE 488.2 and SCPI.

7.4 SCPI Command Structure and Syntax

SCPI (Standard Commands for Programmable Instruments) describes a standard
command set for programming instruments, irrespective of the type of instrument or
manufacturer. The goal of the SCPI consortium is to standardize the device-specific
commands to a large extent. For this purpose, a model was developed which defines
the same functions inside a device or for different devices. Command systems were
generated which are assigned to these functions. Thus it is possible to address the
same functions with identical commands. The command systems are of a hierarchical
structure.
SCPI is based on standard IEEE 488.2, i.e. it uses the same syntactic basic elements
as well as the common commands defined in this standard. Part of the syntax of the
device responses is defined with greater restrictions than in standard IEEE 488.2 (see
section "Responses to Queries").

Remote command examples

Not all commands used in the following examples are implemented in the instrument.

7.4.1 Structure of a Command

The commands consist of a so-called header and, in most cases, one or more
parameters. Header and parameter are separated by a "white space" (ASCII code 0 to
9, 11 to 32 decimal, e.g. blank). The headers may consist of several key words.
Queries are formed by directly appending a question mark to the header.

Operating Manual 1173.0966.12 - 07 120

R&S FSC Remote Control
SCPI Command Structure and Syntax

7.4.1.1 Common Commands

Common commands consist of a header preceded by an asterisk "*" and one or

several parameters, if any.

Examples
*RST RESET, resets the device
*ESE 253 EVENT STATUS ENABLE, sets the bits of the event status enable
register
*ESR? EVENT STATUS QUERY, queries the contents of the event status
register.

7.4.1.2 Device-Specific Commands

Hierarchy
Device-specific commands are of hierarchical structure. The different levels are
represented by combined headers. Headers of the highest level (root level) have only
one key word. This key word denotes a complete command system.

Example
SENSe
This key word denotes the SENSe command system.
For commands of lower levels, the complete path has to be specified, starting on the
left with the highest level, the individual key words being separated by a colon ":".

Example
SENSe:FREQuency:SPAN 10MHZ
This command lies in the third level of the SENSe system. It sets the frequency span.

SENSe

BANDwidth FUNCtion FREQuency DETector

STARt STOP CENTer SPAN OFFSet

Figure 7-5: Tree structure the SCPI command systems using the SENSe system as example

Operating Manual 1173.0966.12 - 07 121

R&S FSC Remote Control
SCPI Command Structure and Syntax

Multiple Keywords
Some key words occur in several levels within one command system. Their effect
depends on the structure of the command, i.e. at which position in the header of a
command they are inserted.

Examples
SOURce:FM:POLarity NORMal
This command contains key word POLarity in the third command level. It defines the
polarity between modulator and modulation signal.
SOURce:FM:EXTernal:POLarity NORMal
This command contains key word POLarity in the fourth command level. It defines the
polarity between modulation voltage and the resulting direction of the modulation only
for the external signal source indicated.

Optional Keywords
Some command systems permit certain key words to be inserted into the header or
omitted. These key words are marked by square brackets in the description. The full
command length must be recognized by the instrument for reasons of compatibility
with the SCPI standard. Some commands are considerably shortened by these
optional key words.

Example
[SENSe]:BANDwidth[:RESolution]:AUTO
This command couples the resolution bandwidth of the instrument to other parameters.
The following command has the same effect:
BANDwidth:AUTO

Optional keywords with numeric suffixes

Do not omit an optional keyword if it includes a numeric suffix that is relevant for the
effect of the command.

Example
DISPlay[:WINDow<1...4>]:MAXimize <Boolean>
Command DISP:MAX ON refers to window 1.
In order to refer to a window other than 1, you must include the optional WINDow
parameter with the suffix for the required window.
DISP:WIND2:MAX ON refers to window 2.

Operating Manual 1173.0966.12 - 07 122

R&S FSC Remote Control
SCPI Command Structure and Syntax

Long and Short Form

The key words feature a long form and a short form. Either the short form or the long
form can be entered, other abbreviations are not permitted.

Example
STATus:QUEStionable:ENABle 1
is equivalent to
STAT:QUES:ENAB 1

Upper and lower case notation of commands

Upper-case and lower-case notation only serves to distinguish the two forms in the
manual, the instrument itself does not distinguish upper-case and lower-case letters.

Parameter
The parameter must be separated from the header by a "white space". If several
parameters are specified in a command, they are separated by a comma ",". A few
queries permit the parameters MINimum, MAXimum and DEFault to be entered. Refer
to "Parameters" for a detailed description of the various parameters.

Example
SENSe:FREQuency:STOP? MAXimum
Response: 3.5E9
This query requests the maximal value for the stop frequency.

Special Characters
| A vertical stroke in parameter definitions indicates alternative possibilities in the
sense of "or". The effect of the command differs, depending on which parameter
is used.

Example
DISPlay:FORMat SINGle | SPLit
If parameter SINGle is selected, full screen is displayed, in the case of SPLit,
split screen is displayed.
A selection of key words with an identical effect exists for several commands.
These keywords are indicated in the same line; they are separated by a vertical
stroke. Only one of these keywords needs to be included in the header of the
command. The effect of the command is independent of which of the keywords is
used.

Example
SENSe:BANDwidth|BWIDth[:RESolution]
The two following commands with identical meaning can be created. They set the
frequency of the fixed frequency signal to 1 kHz:
SENSe:BAND 1
SENSe:BWID 1

Operating Manual 1173.0966.12 - 07 123

R&S FSC Remote Control
SCPI Command Structure and Syntax

[] Key words in square brackets can be omitted when composing the header. The
full command length must be accepted by the instrument for reasons of
compatibility with the SCPI standards.

Example
[SENSe:]BANDwidth|BWIDth[:RESolution]
SENS:BAND:RES
is equivalent to
BAND
Parameters in square brackets can be incorporated optionally in the command or
omitted as well.

Example
MMEMory:NETWork:MAP
<string>,<string>[,string>,<string>,<boolean>]
Entries in square brackets are optional or can be omitted.
{} Parameters in curly brackets are optional and can be inserted once or several
times, or omitted.

Example
SENSe:LIST:FREQuency <numeric_value>{,<numeric_value>}
The following are valid commands:
SENS:LIST:FREQ 10
SENS:LIST:FREQ 10,20
SENS:LIST:FREQ 10,20,30,40

Numeric Suffix
If a device features several functions or features of the same kind, e.g. inputs, the
desired function can be selected by a suffix added to the command. Entries without
suffix are interpreted like entries with the suffix 1. Optional keywords must be specified
if they select a function with the suffix.

Example
SYSTem:COMMunicate:SERial2:BAUD 9600
This command sets the baud rate of a second serial interface.

Suffix counting
In case of remote control, suffix counting may differ from the numbers of the
corresponding selection used in manual operation. SCPI prescribes that suffix counting
starts with 1. Suffix 1 is the default state and used when no specific suffix is specified.
Some standards define a fixed numbering, starting with 0. With GSM, for instance,
slots are counted from 0 to 7. In the case of remote control, the slots are selected with
the suffixes 1 to 8. If the numbering differs in manual operation and remote control, it is
indicated with the respective command.

Operating Manual 1173.0966.12 - 07 124

R&S FSC Remote Control
SCPI Command Structure and Syntax

7.4.1.3 Overview of Syntax Elements

The following table offers an overview of the syntax elements.

: The colon separates the key words of a command. In a program message the
separating semicolon marks the uppermost command level.
; The semicolon separates two commands within a program message. It does not
alter the path.
, The comma separates several parameters of a command.
? The question mark forms a query.
* The asterisk marks a common command.
" Quotation marks introduce a string and terminate it.
# The hash symbol # introduces binary, octal, hexadecimal and block data.
● Binary: #B10110
● Octal: #O7612
● Hexa: #HF3A7
● Block: #21312
A "white space" (ASCII-Code 0 to 9, 11 to 32 decimal, e.g. blank) separates
header and parameter.

7.4.2 Parameters

For most commands a parameter needs to be supplemented. The parameter has to be

separated from the header by a "white space". Possible parameters are:
● Numeric values
● Special numeric values
● Boolean parameters
● Text
● Character strings
● Block data.
The type of parameter required for each command and the allowed range of values are
specified in the command description.

Operating Manual 1173.0966.12 - 07 125

R&S FSC Remote Control
SCPI Command Structure and Syntax

7.4.2.1 Numeric Values

Numeric values can be entered in any form, i.e. with sign, decimal point and exponent.
Values exceeding the resolution of the instrument are rounded up or down. The
mantissa may comprise up to 255 characters, the exponent must lie inside the value
range -32000 to 32000. The exponent is introduced by an "E" or "e". Entry of the
exponent alone is not permissible. In the case of physical quantities, the unit can be
entered. Permissible unit prefixes are G (giga), MA (mega), MOHM and MHZ are also
possible), K (kilo), M (milli), U (micro) and N (nano). If the unit is missing, the basic unit
is used.

Example
SENSe:FREQuency:STOP 1.5GHz = SENSe:FREQuency:STOP 1.5E9

7.4.2.2 Special Numeric Values

The texts MINimum, MAXimum, DEFault, UP and DOWN are interpreted as special
numeric values. In case of a query, the numeric value is returned.
● MIN/MAX
MINimum and MAXimum denote the minimum and maximum value.
● DEF
DEFault denotes a preset value which has been stored in the EPROM. This value
conforms to the default setting, as it is called by the *RST command
● UP/DOWN
UP, DOWN increases or reduces the numerical value by one step. The step width
can be specified via an allocated step command for each parameter which can be
set via UP, DOWN.
● INF/NINF
INFinity, Negative INFinity (NINF) Negative INFinity (NINF) represent the
numerical values -9.9E37 or 9.9E37, respectively. INF and NINF are only sent as
device reponses.
● NAN
Not A Number (NAN) represents the value 9.91E37. NAN is only sent as device
response. This value is not defined. Possible causes are the division of zero by
zero, the subtraction of infinite from infinite and the representation of missing
values.

Example:
Setting command: SENSe:FREQuency:STOP MAXimum
Query: SENSe:FREQuency:STOP?, Response: 3.5E9

Operating Manual 1173.0966.12 - 07 126

R&S FSC Remote Control
SCPI Command Structure and Syntax

7.4.2.3 Boolean Parameters

Boolean parameters represent two states. The ON state (logically true) is represented
by ON or a numerical value unequal to 0. The OFF state (logically untrue) is
represented by OFF or the numerical value 0. The numerical values are provided as
response for query.

Example
Setting command: CALCulate:MARKer:STATe ON
Query: CALCulate:MARKer:STATe?, Response: 1

7.4.2.4 Text

Text parameters observe the syntactic rules for key words, i.e. they can be entered
using a short or long form. Like any parameter, they have to be separated from the
header by a white space. In the case of a query, the short form of the text is provided.

Example
Setting command: INPut:COUPling GROund
Query: INPut:COUPling?, Response: GRO

7.4.2.5 Strings

Strings must always be entered in quotation marks (' or ").

Example
SYSTem:LANGuage "SCPI" or SYSTem:LANGuage 'SCPI'

7.4.2.6 Block Data

Block data are a transmission format which is suitable for the transmission of large
amounts of data. A command using a block data parameter has the following structure:

Example
HEADer:HEADer #45168xxxxxxxx
ASCII character # introduces the data block. The next number indicates how many of
the following digits describe the length of the data block. In the example the 4 following
digits indicate the length to be 5168 bytes. The data bytes follow. During the
transmission of these data bytes all end or other control signs are ignored until all
bytes are transmitted.

Operating Manual 1173.0966.12 - 07 127

R&S FSC Remote Control
SCPI Command Structure and Syntax

7.4.3 Structure of a Program Message

A program message may consist of one or several commands. It is terminated by the

program message terminator which is the NL (New Line) charcter for LAN and USB
connections.
Several commands in a program message must be separated by a semicolon ";". If the
next command belongs to a different command system, the semicolon is followed by a
colon. A colon ":" at the beginning of a command marks the root node of the command
tree.

Example:
CALL InstrWrite(analyzer, "SENSe:FREQuency:CENTer
100MHz;:INPut:ATTenuation 10")
This program message contains two commands. The first one is part of the SENSe
command system and is used to determine the center frequency of the instrument. The
second one is part of the INPut command system and sets the input signal attenuation.
If the successive commands belong to the same system, having one or several levels
in common, the program message can be abbreviated. For that purpose, the second
command after the semicolon starts with the level that lies below the common levels
(see also Fig. 1-1). The colon following the semicolon must be omitted in this case.

Example:
CALL InstrWrite(analyzer, "SENSe:FREQuency:STARt
1E6;:SENSe:FREQuency:STOP 1E9")
This program message is represented in its full length and contains two commands
separated from each other by the semicolon. Both commands are part of the SENSe
command system, subsystem FREQuency, i.e. they have two common levels.
When abbreviating the program message, the second command begins with the level
below SENSe:FREQuency. The colon after the semicolon is omitted. The abbreviated
form of the program message reads as follows:
CALL InstrWrite(analyzer, "SENSe:FREQuency:STARt 1E6;STOP 1E9")
However, a new program message always begins with the complete path.

Example:
CALL InstrWrite(analyzer, "SENSe:FREQuency:STARt 1E6")
CALL InstrWrite(analyzer, "SENSe:FREQuency:STOP 1E9")

Operating Manual 1173.0966.12 - 07 128

R&S FSC Remote Control
SCPI Command Structure and Syntax

7.4.4 Responses to Queries

A query is defined for each setting command unless explicitly specified otherwise. It is
formed by adding a question mark to the associated setting command. According to
SCPI, the responses to queries are partly subject to stricter rules than in standard
IEEE 488.2.
● The requested parameter is transmitted without header.
Example
INPut:COUPling?
Response: DC
● Maximum values, minimum values and all further quantities, which are requested
via a special text parameter are returned as numerical values.
Example
SENSe:FREQuency:STOP? MAX
Response: 3.5E9
● Numerical values are output without a unit. Physical quantities are referred to the
basic units or to the units set using the Unit command.
Example
SENSe:FREQuency:CENTer?
Response: 1E6 (for 1 MHz)
● Truth values <Boolean values> are returned as 0 (for OFF) and 1 (for ON).
Example
SENSe:BANDwidth:AUTO?
Response: 1 (for ON)
● Text (character data) is returned in a short form.
Example
SYSTem:COMMunicate:SERial:CONTrol:RTS?
Response STAN (for standard)

Operating Manual 1173.0966.12 - 07 129

R&S FSC Remote Control
Command Sequence and Command Synchronization

7.5 Command Sequence and Command

Synchronization
What has been said above makes clear that all commands can potentially be carried
out overlapping. In order to prevent an overlapping execution of commands, one of the
commands *OPC, *OPC? or *WAI must be used. All three commands cause a certain
action only to be carried out after the hardware has been set. By suitable
programming, the controller can be forced to wait for the respective action to occur. For
more information see Table 7-1.
Table 7-1: Synchronization using *OPC, *OPC? and *WAI

Command Action Programming the controller

*OPC Sets the Operation Complete bit in the − Setting bit 0 in the ESE
ESR after all previous commands have − Setting bit 5 in the SRE
been executed.
− Waiting for service request (SRQ)

*OPC? Stops command processing until 1 is Sending *OPC? directly after the command
returned. This is only the case after the whose processing should be terminated before
Operation Complete bit has been set in other commands can be executed.
the ESR. This bit indicates that the
previous setting has been completed.

*WAI Stops further command processing until Sending *WAI directly after the command whose
all commands sent before *WAI have processing should be terminated before other
been executed. commands are executed.

For a couple of commands the synchronization to the end of command execution is

mandatory in order to obtain the desired result. The affected commands require either
more than one measurement in order to accomplish the desired instrument setting
(e.g. auto range functions), or they require a longer period of time for execution. If a
new command is received during execution of the corresponding function this may
either lead to either to an aborted measurement or to incorrect measurement data.
The following list includes the commands, for which a synchronization via *OPC,
*OPC? or *WAI is mandatory:
Table 7-2: Commands with mandatory synchronization (overlapping commands)

Command Purpose

INIT start measurement (sweep)

INIT:CONT OFF Set to single sweep

CALC:MARK:FUNC:xx? All Marker function queries

Operating Manual 1173.0966.12 - 07 130

R&S FSC Remote Control – Commands
Command Sequence and Command Synchronization

8 Remote Control – Commands

The following chapters provide a detailed description of all remote control commands
currently available for the R&S FSC and its firmware options.
Each section describes the commands for one of the operating modes available in the
R&S FSC, beginning with the description of common commands required to operate
the instrument. The structure is based on that of the operating manual.
● Common Commands on page 132
● Remote Commands of the Spectrum Analyzer on page 135
● Remote Commands of the Network Analyzer Mode on page 206
● Remote Commands of the Power Meter on page 216
Each section is subdivided into various tasks required to perform measurements with
the R&S FSC, also based on the structure of the operating manual. Some commands
like those for controlling markers or configuring the frequency axis are available for all
operating modes. In that case you will find a list of these commands in the
corresponding section. However, a detailed description is provided only in the CAT
commands section.
Following the remote control commands required to perform specific measurements,
you will find a description of general commands used to set up and control basic
instrument functions. These commands are independent of the operating mode.
Therefore they are listed separately.
● File Management on page 220
● Making and Storing Screenshots on page 227
● Configuring the Instrument on page 230
● Remote Commands of the Status Reporting System on page 255
All chapters begin with a list of commands available in the context of that chapter.
Following that list you will find a detailed description of all commands.
All individual descriptions contain:
● the complete notation and syntax of the command
● the description of the effects of the command
● a list of all parameters available for that command or the type of data the command
returns in case of query commands
● an example of how a program message would look like
● the *RST value
● information on SCPI conformity
An alphabetical list of all available commands is provided at the end of this manual.

Operating Manual 1173.0966.12 - 07 131

R&S FSC Remote Control – Commands
Common Commands

8.1 Common Commands

The common commands are taken from the IEEE 488.2 (IEC 625-2) standard. A
particular command has the same effect on different devices. The headers of these
commands consist of an asterisk "*" followed by three letters. Some of the common
commands refer to the "Status Reporting System".

List of Common Commands

● *CLS (p. 132)
● *ESE (p. 132)
● *ESR? (p. 132)
● *IDN? (p. 133)
● *IST? (p. 133)
● *OPC (p. 133)
● *OPT? (p. 133)
● *RST (p. 133)
● *SRE (p. 134)
● *STB? (p. 134)
● *TRG (p. 134)
● *TST? (p. 134)
● *WAI (p. 134)

*CLS

CLEAR STATUS sets the status byte (STB), the standard event register (ESR) and
the EVENt part of the QUEStionable and the OPERation register to zero. The
command does not alter the mask and transition parts of the registers. It clears the
output buffer.

*ESE

EVENT STATUS ENABLE sets the event status enable register to the value
indicated. The query form *ESE? returns the contents of the event status enable
register in decimal form.
Parameter
0 to 255

*ESR?

STANDARD EVENT STATUS QUERY returns the contents of the event status
register in decimal form (0 to 255) and subsequently sets the register to zero.
Parameter
0 to 255

Operating Manual 1173.0966.12 - 07 132

R&S FSC Remote Control – Commands
Common Commands

*IDN?

IDENTIFICATION QUERY queries the instrument identification.

Return values
<InstrumentName>,<SerialNumber/Model>,<FirmwareVersion>
Example for R&S FSC:
Rohde&Schwarz,FSC,100005/013,1.20

*IST?

INDIVIDUAL STATUS QUERY returns the contents of the IST flag in decimal form.
The IST flag is the status bit which is sent during a parallel poll.
Parameter
0|1

*OPC

OPERATION COMPLETE sets bit 0 in the event status register after all preceding
commands have been executed. This bit can be used to initiate a service request.

*OPT?

OPTION IDENTIFICATION QUERY queries the options included in the instrument

and returns a list of the options installed. The options are separated from each
other by means of commas.
Parameter
K<number> software options
For a list of all available options and their description refer to the CD-ROM.
Example
K40, K41, K42, K45

*RST

RESET sets the instrument to a defined default status. The command essentially
corresponds to pressing the PRESET key.

Operating Manual 1173.0966.12 - 07 133

R&S FSC Remote Control – Commands
Common Commands

*SRE

SERVICE REQUEST ENABLE sets the service request enable register to the
indicated value. Bit 6 (MSS mask bit) remains 0. This command determines under
which conditions a service request is generated. The query form *SRE? reads the
contents of the service request enable register in decimal form. Bit 6 is always 0.
Parameter
0 to 255

*STB?

READ STATUS BYTE QUERY reads out the contents of the status byte in decimal
form.

*TRG

TRIGGER initiates all actions in the currently active test screen expecting a trigger
event. This command corresponds to INITiate[:IMMediate].

*TST?

SELF TEST QUERY initiates the self test of the instrument and outputs an error
code in decimal form.
Parameter
0 = no error

*WAI

WAIT TO CONTINUE permits servicing of subsequent commands only after all

preceding commands have been executed and all signals have settled.

Operating Manual 1173.0966.12 - 07 134

R&S FSC Remote Control – Commands
Remote Commands of the Spectrum Analyzer

8.2 Remote Commands of the Spectrum Analyzer

This section provides a detailed description of all remote control commands required to
configure and perform measurements with the spectrum analyzer. These commands
are available in spectrum analyzer mode only.

Contents
Configuring the Horizontal Axis on page 135
Configuring the Vertical Axis on page 140
Setting the Bandwidths on page 146
Performing and Triggering Measurements on page 148
Working with Traces on page 154
Using Markers on page 159
Using Display Lines and Limit Lines on page 174
Configuring and Using Measurement Functions on page 180

8.2.1 Configuring the Horizontal Axis

The following commands configure the horizontal (frequency) axis of the active display.

List of commands
● [SENSe:]FREQuency:CENTer <Frequency> (p. 135)
● [SENSe:]FREQuency:CENTer:STEP <StepSize> (p. 136)
● [SENSe:]FREQuency:CENTer:STEP:LINK <StepSizeCoupling> (p. 136)
● [SENSe:]FREQuency:INPut:MODE <InputMode> (p. 137)
● [SENSe:]FREQuency:MODE <OperationMode> (p. 137)
● [SENSe:]FREQuency:OFFSet <FrequencyOffset> (p. 138)
● [SENSe:]FREQuency:SPAN <Span> (p. 138)
● [SENSe:]FREQuency:SPAN:AUTO <State> (p. 138)
● [SENSe:]FREQuency:SPAN:FULL (p. 139)
● [SENSe:]FREQuency:STARt <StartFrequency> (p. 139)
● [SENSe:]FREQuency:STOP <StopFrequency> (p. 139)

[SENSe:]FREQuency:CENTer <Frequency>

This command defines the center frequency of the R&S FSC.

In spectrum analyzer mode, the command also defines the measuring frequency
for time domain measurements (span = 0).
Parameter
<Frequency>
Numeric value in Hz.
The range depends on the operating mode and is specified in the data sheet.

Operating Manual 1173.0966.12 - 07 135

R&S FSC Remote Control – Commands
Remote Commands of the Spectrum Analyzer

Example
FREQ:CENT 100MHz
Defines a center frequency of 100 MHz.
Characteristics
*RST value: fmax /2 with fmax = maximum frequency
SCPI: conform

[SENSe:]FREQuency:CENTer:STEP <StepSize>

This command defines the center frequency step size.

Parameter
<StepSize>
Numeric value in Hz.
The range is from 1 Hz to fmax.
Example
FREQ:CENT:STEP 120MHz
Defines a CF step size of 120 MHz.
Characteristics
*RST value: – (AUTO 0.1*SPAN is switched on)
SCPI: conform

[SENSe:]FREQuency:CENTer:STEP:LINK <StepSizeCoupling>

This command couples and decouples the center frequency step size to the span.
For time domain measurements, the command couples the step size to the
resolution bandwidth.
Parameter
<StepSizeCoupling>
DIVTen Couples the step size to 10% of the span
OFF deactivates coupling (manual input)
Example
FREQ:CENT:STEP:LINK DIVT
Couples the step size to 10% of the span.
Characteristics
*RST value: DIVTen
SCPI: device-specific

Operating Manual 1173.0966.12 - 07 136

R&S FSC Remote Control – Commands
Remote Commands of the Spectrum Analyzer

[SENSe:]FREQuency:INPut:MODE <InputMode>

This command selects the frequency mode. Select the Channel frequency mode
only if you want to work with channel tables. In this case, the input of the center
frequency is not a frequency value, but a channel number.
Parameter
<InputMode>
FREQuency sets the frequency input mode to frequency input (Hz)
CHANnel sets the frequency input mode to selection of a channel
Example
FREQ:INP:MODE CHAN
Sets the frequency mode to work with channel tables.
Characteristics
*RST value: FREQ
SCPI: device-specific

[SENSe:]FREQuency:MODE <OperationMode>

This command the measurement domain (frequency or time).

In the time domain (CW and FIXed), set the frequency with:
- [SENSe:]FREQuency:CENTer <Frequency>
In the frequency domain (SWEep), set it with
- [SENSe:]FREQuency:CENTer <Frequency>
- [SENSe:]FREQuency:SPAN <Span>
- [SENSe:]FREQuency:STARt <StartFrequency>
- [SENSe:]FREQuency:STOP <StopFrequency>
Parameter
<OperationMode>
CW time domain (span = 0)
FIXed time domain (span = 0)
SWEep frequency domain (span > 0
Example
FREQ:MODE SWE
Activates frequency domain measurements.
Characteristics
*RST value: SWEep
SCPI: conform

Operating Manual 1173.0966.12 - 07 137

R&S FSC Remote Control – Commands
Remote Commands of the Spectrum Analyzer

[SENSe:]FREQuency:OFFSet <FrequencyOffset>

This command defines a frequency offset.

Parameter
<FrequencyOffset>
Numeric value in the range from -100 GHz to 100 GHz.
Example
FREQ:OFFS 1GHZ
Defines a frequency offset of 1 GHz.
Characteristics
*RST value: 0 Hz
SCPI: conform

[SENSe:]FREQuency:SPAN <Span>

This command defines the frequency span.

If you set a span of 0 Hz in spectrum mode, the R&S FSC starts a measurement in
the time domain.
Parameter
<Span>
Numeric value in Hz.
The value range is specified in the data sheet.
Example
FREQ:SPAN 10MHz
Defines a span of 10 MHz.
Characteristics
*RST value: fmax with fmax = maximum frequency
SCPI: conform

[SENSe:]FREQuency:SPAN:AUTO <State>

This command turns the automatic calculation of the ideal span on and off.
Parameter
<State>
ON | OFF
Example
FREQ:SPAN:AUTO ON
Turns automatic span determination on and off.

Operating Manual 1173.0966.12 - 07 138

R&S FSC Remote Control – Commands
Remote Commands of the Spectrum Analyzer

Characteristics
*RST value: OFF
SCPI: device-specific

[SENSe:]FREQuency:SPAN:FULL

This command restores the full span.

This command is an event and therefore has no query and no *RST value.
Example
FREQ:SPAN:FULL
Restores full span.
Characteristics
*RST value: –
SCPI: conform

[SENSe:]FREQuency:STARt <StartFrequency>

This command defines the start frequency for measurements in the frequency
domain (span > 0).
Parameter
<StartFrequency>
Numeric value in Hz.
The range depends on the operating mode and is specified in the datasheet.
Example
FREQ:STAR 20MHz
Defines a start frequency of 20 MHz.
Characteristics
*RST value: 0
SCPI: conform

[SENSe:]FREQuency:STOP <StopFrequency>

This command defines the stop frequency for measurements in the frequency
domain (span > 0).
Parameter
<StopFrequency>
Numeric value in Hz.
The range depends on the operating mode and is specified in the datasheet.

Operating Manual 1173.0966.12 - 07 139

R&S FSC Remote Control – Commands
Remote Commands of the Spectrum Analyzer

Example
FREQ:STOP 2000MHz
Defines a stop frequency of 2 GHz
Characteristics
*RST value: fmax
SCPI: conform

8.2.2 Configuring the Vertical Axis

The following commands configure the vertical (level) axis and level parameters of the
active display.
The suffix <t> at TRACe is irrelevant for these commands.
The suffix <c> at TRANsducer selects the primary or secondary transducer. The range
is <1…2>.

List of commands
● DISPlay[:WINDow]:TRACe<t>:Y[:SCALe]:ADJust (p. 140)
● DISPlay[:WINDow]:TRACe<t>:Y:SPACing <Scaling> (p. 141)
● DISPlay[:WINDow]:TRACe<t>:Y[:SCALe] <DisplayRange> (p. 141)
● DISPlay[:WINDow]:TRACe<t>:Y[:SCALe]:RLEVel <ReferenceLevel> (p. 141)
● DISPlay[:WINDow]:TRACe<t>:Y[:SCALe]:RLEVel:OFFSet <Offset> (p. 142)
● DISPlay[:WINDow]:TRACe<t>:Y[:SCALe]:RPOSition <ReferencePosition> (p. 142)
● INPut:ATTenuation <Attenuation> (p. 143)
● INPut:ATTenuation:MODE <AttenuationMode> (p. 143)
● INPut:ATTenuation:AUTO <State> (p. 143)
● INPut:GAIN:STATe <State> (p. 144)
● INPut:IMPedance <Impedance> (p. 144)
● [SENSe:]CORRection:TRANsducer<c>[:STATe] <State> (p. 144)
● [SENSe:]CORRection:TRANsducer<c>:SELect <TransducerFactor> (p. 145)
● [SENSe:]CORRection:TRANsducer<c>:UNIT? (p. 145)
● UNIT:POWer <Unit> (p. 145)

DISPlay[:WINDow]:TRACe<t>:Y[:SCALe]:ADJust

This command automatically scales the vertical axis for optimum display results.
This command is an event and therefore has no query and no *RST value.
Example
DISP:TRAC:Y:ADJ
Adjusts the y-axis.
Characteristics
*RST value: -
SCPI: device-specific

Operating Manual 1173.0966.12 - 07 140

R&S FSC Remote Control – Commands
Remote Commands of the Spectrum Analyzer

DISPlay[:WINDow]:TRACe<t>:Y:SPACing <Scaling>

This command selects the scaling of the vertical axis.

Parameter
<Scaling>
LOGarithmic logarithmic scaling
LINear linear scaling (%)
Example
DISP:TRAC:Y:SPAC LIN
Selects linear scaling of the level axis.
Characteristics
*RST value: LOGarithmic
SCPI: conform

DISPlay[:WINDow]:TRACe<t>:Y[:SCALe] <DisplayRange>

This command defines the display range of the vertical axis.

Note that you have to set a logarithmic scaling before you can use this command
with DISPlay[:WINDow]:TRACe<t>:Y:SPACing. For a linear scale, you can
not modify the display range as it is fixed.
Parameter
<DisplayRange>
numeric value in the range from 10 dB to 200 dB
Example
DISP:TRAC:Y 110dB
Sets the display range to 110 dB.
Characteristics
*RST value: 100dB
SCPI: device–specific

DISPlay[:WINDow]:TRACe<t>:Y[:SCALe]:RLEVel <ReferenceLevel>

This command defines the reference level.

With a reference level offset ≠ 0, the value range of the reference level is modified
by the offset.
Parameter
<ReferenceLevel>
numeric value that sets the reference level; the unit depends on UNIT:POWer.
The available value range is specified in the data sheet.

Operating Manual 1173.0966.12 - 07 141

R&S FSC Remote Control – Commands
Remote Commands of the Spectrum Analyzer

Example
DISP:TRAC:Y:RLEV –60dBm
Sets the reference level to -60 dBm.
Characteristics
*RST value: –20dBm
SCPI: conform

DISPlay[:WINDow]:TRACe<t>:Y[:SCALe]:RLEVel:OFFSet <Offset>

This command defines a reference level offset.

Parameter
<Offset>
numeric value (dB) that sets the reference level offset
The available value range is from -200dB to 200dB.
Example
DISP:TRAC:Y:RLEV:OFFS –10dB
Characteristics
*RST value: 0dB
SCPI: conform

DISPlay[:WINDow]:TRACe<t>:Y[:SCALe]:RPOSition <ReferencePosition>

This command defines the position of the reference level on the display grid.
First, you have to set a logarithmic scale for the vertical axis with
DISPlay[:WINDow]:TRACe<t>:Y:SPACing. For a linear scale, you can not
modify the reference position.
Parameter
<ReferencePosition>
numeric value (%) that defines the reference position
The available value range is from 1 to 10.
Example
DISP:TRAC:Y:RPOS 5
Sets the reference position to the 5th grid line.
Characteristics
*RST value:10
SCPI: conform

Operating Manual 1173.0966.12 - 07 142

R&S FSC Remote Control – Commands
Remote Commands of the Spectrum Analyzer

INPut:ATTenuation <Attenuation>

This command defines the input attenuation.

In spectrum mode, the attenuation is coupled to the reference level. If you set the
attenuation independently, the R&S FSC turns off this coupling.
The R&S FSC adjusts the reference level if it can not be set for the current RF
attenuation.
Parameter
<Attenuation>
Numeric value in in the range from 0 dB to 40 dB in 5 dB steps.
Example
INP:ATT 30dB
Defines an attenuation of 30 dB and deactivates coupling to the reference level.
Characteristics
*RST value: 0 dB (AUTO is ON)
SCPI: conform

INPut:ATTenuation:MODE <AttenuationMode>

This command selects the attenuation mode.

Parameter
<AttenuationMode>
LDIStortion Auto low distortion
LNOise Auto low noise
Example
INP:ATT:MODE LNO
Sets the attenuation mode to Auto Low Noise.
Characteristics
*RST value: LNOise
SCPI: device-specific

INPut:ATTenuation:AUTO <State>

This command couples and decouples input attenuation to the reference level.
Parameter
<State>
ON | OFF
Example
INP:ATT:AUTO ON
Couples the attenuation set on the attenuator to the reference level.

Operating Manual 1173.0966.12 - 07 143

R&S FSC Remote Control – Commands
Remote Commands of the Spectrum Analyzer

Characteristics
*RST value: ON
SCPI: conform

INPut:GAIN:STATe <State>

This command turns the preamplifier on and off.

Parameter
<State>
ON | OFF
Example
INP:GAIN:STAT ON
Activates the preamplifier
Characteristics
*RST value: OFF
SCPI: conform

INPut:IMPedance <Impedance>

This command selects the nominal input impedance. The set impedance is taken
into account in all level indications of results.
The setting 75 Ω should be selected, if the 50 Ω input impedance is transformed to
a higher impedance using a 75 Ω adapter of the RAZ type (= 25 Ω in series to the
input impedance of the instrument). The correction value in this case is 1.76 dB =
10 log (75Ω / 50Ω).
Parameter
<Impedance>
50 | 75
Example
INP:IMP 75
Sets the input impedance to 75 Ohm.
Characteristics
*RST value: 50 Ω
SCPI: conform

[SENSe:]CORRection:TRANsducer<c>[:STATe] <State>

This command turns a transducer factor on and off.

Before turning it on, you have to select a transducer factor with
[SENSe:]CORRection:TRANsducer<c>:SELect.

Operating Manual 1173.0966.12 - 07 144

R&S FSC Remote Control – Commands
Remote Commands of the Spectrum Analyzer

Parameter
<State>
ON | OFF
Example
CORR:TRAN1 ON
Activates the primary transducer
Characteristics
*RST value: OFF
SCPI: device-specific

[SENSe:]CORRection:TRANsducer<c>:SELect <TransducerFactor>

This command selects a transducer factor.

If <name> does not exist yet, a new transducer factor is created.
The suffix<1...2> specifies the primary or secondary transducer.
Parameter
<Transducerfactor>
string containing the file name of the transducer factor.
If the file does not exist, the R&S FSC creates a new transducer factor.
Example
CORR:TRAN2:SEL 'FSH-Z38.sectrd'
Selects the FSH-Z38 secondary transducer factor.
Characteristics
*RST value: -
SCPI: device-specific

[SENSe:]CORRection:TRANsducer<c>:UNIT?

This command queries the unit of the current transducer factor.

Example
CORR:TRAN2:UNIT?
Queries the unit of the primary transducer.
Characteristics
*RST value: -
SCPI: device-specific

UNIT:POWer <Unit>

This command selects the unit of the vertical axis.

The availability of units depends on the operating mode and type of measurement.

Operating Manual 1173.0966.12 - 07 145

R&S FSC Remote Control – Commands
Remote Commands of the Spectrum Analyzer

Parameter
<Unit>
DBM | DBUV | DBMV | V | W | DUVM | DUAM | V_M | W_M2
Note that the availability of units depends on the operating mode.
Example
UNIT:POW DBUV
Sets the power unit to dBμV.
Characteristics
*RST value: DBM
SCPI: conform

8.2.3 Setting the Bandwidths

The following commands configure the filter bandwidths of the R&S FSC. Note that
both groups of commands (BANDwidth and BWIDth) are the same.

List of commands
● [SENSe:]BANDwidth|BWIDth[:RESolution] <ResBW> (p. 146)
● [SENSe:]BANDwidth|BWIDth[:RESolution]:AUTO <State> (p. 147)
● [SENSe:]BANDwidth|BWIDth:VIDeo <VideoBW> (p. 147)
● [SENSe:]BANDwidth|BWIDth:VIDeo:AUTO <State> (p. 147)

[SENSe:]BANDwidth|BWIDth[:RESolution] <ResBW>

This command defines the resolution bandwidth.

Parameter
<ResBW>
Numeric value in Hz.
The available value range is from 1 Hz to 3 MHz in 1 - 3 - 5 steps. In addition, you
can select a 200 kHz bandwidth.
Example
BAND 100 kHz
Sets the resolution bandwidth to 100 kHz
Characteristics
*RST value: - (AUTO is set to ON)
SCPI: conform

Operating Manual 1173.0966.12 - 07 146

R&S FSC Remote Control – Commands
Remote Commands of the Spectrum Analyzer

[SENSe:]BANDwidth|BWIDth[:RESolution]:AUTO <State>

This command couples and decouples the resolution bandwidth to the span.
Parameter
<State>
ON | OFF
Example
BAND:AUTO OFF
Decouples the resolution bandwidth from the span.
Characteristics
*RST value: ON
SCPI: conform

[SENSe:]BANDwidth|BWIDth:VIDeo <VideoBW>

This command defines the video bandwidth.

Parameter
<VideoBW>
Numeric value in Hz.
The available value range is from 1 Hz to 3 MHz in 1 - 3 steps.
Example
BAND:VID 10kHz
Sets the video bandwidth to 10 kHz.
Characteristics
*RST value: - (AUTO is set to ON)
SCPI: conform

[SENSe:]BANDwidth|BWIDth:VIDeo:AUTO <State>

This command couples and decouples the video bandwidth to the resolution
bandwidth.
Parameter
<State>
ON | OFF
Example
BAND:VID:AUTO OFF
Turns off video bandwidth coupling.
Characteristics
*RST value: ON
SCPI: conform

Operating Manual 1173.0966.12 - 07 147

R&S FSC Remote Control – Commands
Remote Commands of the Spectrum Analyzer

8.2.4 Performing and Triggering Measurements

The following commands control the actual measurement process, including trigger
functionality.

8.2.4.1 Performing the Measurement

The following commands initialize a measurement and set up the sweep.

List of commands
● *WAI (p. 134)
● ABORt (p. 148)
● INITiate[:IMMediate] (p. 148)
● INITiate:CONTinuous <SweepMode> (p. 149)
● [SENSe:]SWEep:COUNt <SweepCount> (p. 149)
● [SENSe:]SWEep:POINts? (p. 150)
● [SENSe:]SWEep:TIME <SweepTime> (p. 150)
● [SENSe:]SWEep:TIME:AUTO <State> (p. 150)

ABORt

This command aborts the current measurement and resets the trigger system.
This command is an event and therefore has no query and no *RST value.
Example
ABOR;
INIT:IMM
Aborts a measurement and starts a new one.
Characteristics
RST value: –
SCPI: conform

INITiate[:IMMediate]

The command initiates a new measurement sequence.

With sweep count > 0 or average count > 0, this means a restart of the indicated
number of measurements. With trace functions MAXHold, MINHold and AVERage,
the previous results are reset on restarting the measurement.
In single sweep mode, synchronization to the end of the indicated number of
measurements can be achieved with the command *OPC, *OPC? or *WAI. In
continuous–sweep mode, synchronization to the sweep end is not possible since
the overall measurement never ends.
This command is an event and therefore has no query and no *RST value.

Operating Manual 1173.0966.12 - 07 148

R&S FSC Remote Control – Commands
Remote Commands of the Spectrum Analyzer

Example
INIT:CONT OFF
DISP:WIND:TRAC:MODE AVER
Turns single sweep mode and trace averaging on.
INIT;*WAI
Starts the measurement and waits for the end of the sweep.
Characteristics
*RST value: –
SCPI: conform

INITiate:CONTinuous <SweepMode>

This command selects the sweep mode.

Parameter
<SweepMode>
ON Continuous sweep
OFF Single sweep
Example
INIT:CONT OFF
Turns on single sweep mode.
Characteristics
*RST value: ON
SCPI: conform

[SENSe:]SWEep:COUNt <SweepCount>

This command defines the number of sweeps included in a single sweep. It also
defines the number of sweeps the R&S FSC uses to average traces or calculate
maximum values.
The R&S FSC performs one sweep for sweep count 0 or 1.
Parameter
<SweepCount>
0 to 999
Example
SWE:COUN 64
Defines a sweep count of 64 sweeps.
INIT:CONT OFF
INIT;*WAI
Turns on single sweep mode, starts the sweep and waits for its end.

Operating Manual 1173.0966.12 - 07 149

R&S FSC Remote Control – Commands
Remote Commands of the Spectrum Analyzer

Characteristics
*RST value: 1
SCPI: conform

[SENSe:]SWEep:POINts?

This command queries the number of measurement points in a single sweep.

This command is a query and therefore has no *RST value.
Return value
Number of sweep points.
Example
SWE:POIN?
Returns the number of sweep points.
Characteristics
*RST value: –
SCPI: conform

[SENSe:]SWEep:TIME <SweepTime>

This command defines the sweep time.

If you set a sweep time in spectrum mode with this command, the R&S FSC
decouples the sweep time from the span and the resolution and video bandwidths.
Parameter
<SweepTime>
Numeric value in seconds.
The available value range is specified in the datasheet.
Example
SWE:TIME 10s
Sets the sweep time to 10 s
Characteristics
*RST value: - (AUTO is set to ON)
SCPI: conform

[SENSe:]SWEep:TIME:AUTO <State>

This command couples and decouples the sweep time to the span and the
resolution and video bandwidths.
Parameter
<State>
ON | OFF

Operating Manual 1173.0966.12 - 07 150

R&S FSC Remote Control – Commands
Remote Commands of the Spectrum Analyzer

Example
SWE:TIME:AUTO ON
Switches on the coupling to frequency span and bandwidths.
Characteristics
*RST value: ON
SCPI: conform

8.2.4.2 Triggering Measurements

The following commands set up trigger conditions if you are using a trigger for the
measurement.

List of commands
● [SENSe:]SWEep:EGATe <State> (p. 151)
● [SENSe:]SWEep:EGATe:HOLDoff <GateDelay> (p. 151)
● [SENSe:]SWEep:EGATe:LENGth <GateLength> (p. 152)
● [SENSe:]SWEep:EGATe:TIME <SweepTime> (p. 152)
● TRIGger[:SEQuence]:HOLDoff[:TIME] <TriggerDelay> (p. 152)
● TRIGger[:SEQuence]:LEVel:VIDeo <TriggerLevel> (p. 153)
● TRIGger[:SEQuence]:SLOPe <TriggerSlope> (p. 153)
● TRIGger[:SEQuence]:SOURce <TriggerSource> (p. 154)

[SENSe:]SWEep:EGATe <State>

This command turns a gated trigger on and off.

Parameter
<State>
ON | OFF
Example
SWE:EGAT ON
Activates the gated trigger.
Characteristics
*RST value: off
SCPI: device-specific

[SENSe:]SWEep:EGATe:HOLDoff <GateDelay>

This command defines the length of the gate delay.

Parameter
<GateDelay>
Numeric value in the range from 0 s to 100 s.

Operating Manual 1173.0966.12 - 07 151

R&S FSC Remote Control – Commands
Remote Commands of the Spectrum Analyzer

Example
SWE:EGAT:HOLD 2.5
Sets a gate delay of 2.5 seconds.
Characteristics
*RST value: 0 s
SCPI: device-specific

[SENSe:]SWEep:EGATe:LENGth <GateLength>

This command defines the gate length.

Parameter
<GateLength>
Numeric value in the range from 10 µs to 100 s.
Example
SWE:EGAT:LENG 2.5
Sets a gate length of 2.5 seconds.
Characteristics
*RST value: 400 µs
SCPI: device-specific

[SENSe:]SWEep:EGATe:TIME <SweepTime>

This command defines the sweep time for the gated trigger.
Parameter
<SweepTime>
Numeric value in seconds.
Example
SWE:GATE:TIME 4ms
Sets a sweep time of 4 ms for the gated trigger.
Characteristics
*RST value: 400 µs
SCPI: device-specific

TRIGger[:SEQuence]:HOLDoff[:TIME] <TriggerDelay>

This command defines the length of the trigger delay.

Parameter
<TriggerDelay>
Numeric value in the range from 0 s to 100 s.

Operating Manual 1173.0966.12 - 07 152

R&S FSC Remote Control – Commands
Remote Commands of the Spectrum Analyzer

Example
TRIG:HOLD 500us
Sets the trigger delay to 500 µs.
Characteristics
*RST value: 0 s
SCPI: conform

TRIGger[:SEQuence]:LEVel:VIDeo <TriggerLevel>

This command defines the level of the video trigger.

Video trigger is available for time domain measurements (span = 0).
Parameter
<TriggerLevel>
Numeric value in the range from 0 % to 100 %.
Example
TRIG:LEV:VID 50PCT
Sets the trigger level to 50%.
Characteristics
*RST value: 50 PCT
SCPI: device–specific

TRIGger[:SEQuence]:SLOPe <TriggerSlope>

This command selects the slope of the trigger signal.

The trigger slope applies to all trigger sources.
Parameter
<TriggerSlope>
POSitive | NEGative
Example
TRIG:SLOP NEG
Characteristics
*RST value: POSitive
SCPI: conform

Operating Manual 1173.0966.12 - 07 153

R&S FSC Remote Control – Commands
Remote Commands of the Spectrum Analyzer

TRIGger[:SEQuence]:SOURce <TriggerSource>

This command selects the trigger source.

Parameter
<TriggerSource>
IMMediate Free Run
EXTernal External trigger
VIDeo Video trigger
For more information see R&S FSC operating manual chapter "Setting the Sweep"
Example
TRIG:SOUR EXT
Selects the external trigger input as source of the trigger signal
Characteristics
*RST value: IMMediate
SCPI: conform

8.2.5 Working with Traces

The following commands set up the trace and the various functions associated with it,
e.g. trace mathematics or the selection of the detector.
The suffix <t> is in the range {1..2} and selects the number of the trace.

List of commands
● CALCulate:MATH<t>[:EXPRession][:DEFine] <Expression> (p. 154)
● CALCulate:MATH<t>:COPY:MEMory (p. 155)
● CALCulate:MATH<t>:STATe <State> (p. 155)
● DISPlay[:WINDow]:TRACe<t>[:STATe] <State> (p. 155)
● DISPlay[:WINDow]:TRACe<t>:MEMory[:STATe] <State> (p. 156)
● DISPlay[:WINDow]:TRACe<t>:MODE <TraceMode> (p. 156)
● FORMat:BORDer <ByteOrder> (p. 157)
● [SENSe:]DETector<t>[:FUNCtion] <Detector> (p. 157)
● [SENSe:]DETector<t>[:FUNCtion]:AUTO <State> (p. 157)
● TRACe<t>[:DATA]? <Destination> (p. 158)
● FORMat[:DATA] <DataFormat> (p. 158)

CALCulate:MATH[:EXPRession][:DEFine] <Expression>

This command defines the mathematical expression for relating traces to trace 1.
You have to activate trace mathematics with CALCulate:MATH<t>:STATe
<State> first.

Operating Manual 1173.0966.12 - 07 154

R&S FSC Remote Control – Commands
Remote Commands of the Spectrum Analyzer

Parameter
<Expression>
(IMPLied - memory) Subtracts the trace in memory from the current trace.
(memory - IMPLied) Subtracts the current trace from the trace in memory.
Example
CALC:MATH (MTRACE–TRACE)
Selects the subtraction of the current trace from trace in the memory.
Characteristics
*RST value: –
SCPI: conform

CALCulate:MATH<t>:COPY:MEMory

This command stores the selected trace into the memory trace of the R&S FSC.
This command is an event and therefore has no query and no *RST value.
Example
CALC:MATH:COPY:MEM
Copies the trace into the memory.
Characteristics
*RST value: -
SCPI: device-specific

CALCulate:MATH:STATe <State>

This command turns trace mathematics on and off.

Parameter
<State>
ON | OFF
Example
CALC:MATH:STAT ON
Switches on the trace mathematics.
Characteristics
*RST value: OFF
SCPI: conform

DISPlay[:WINDow]:TRACe<t>[:STATe] <State>

This command turns a trace on and off.

Parameter
<State>
ON | OFF

Operating Manual 1173.0966.12 - 07 155

R&S FSC Remote Control – Commands
Remote Commands of the Spectrum Analyzer

Example
DISP:TRAC2 ON
Turns the trace on.
Characteristics
*RST value: ON for TRACe1, OFF for TRACe2
SCPI: conform

DISPlay[:WINDow]:TRACe<t>:MEMory[:STATe] <State>

This command turns the memory trace on and off.

Parameter
<State>
ON | OFF
Example
DISP:TRAC:MEM ON
Activates the memory trace.
Characteristics
*RST value: OFF
SCPI: device-specific

DISPlay[:WINDow]:TRACe<t>:MODE <TraceMode>

This command selects the trace mode.

If you are using the average, max hold or min hold trace mode, you can set the
number of measurements with [SENSe:]SWEep:COUNt <SweepCount>. Note that
synchronization to the end of the average count is possible only in single sweep
mode.
Parameter
<TraceMode>
AVERage | MAXHold | MINHold | VIEW | WRITe
You can turn off the trace with DISPlay[:WINDow]:TRACe<t>[:STATe]
<State>.
For more information see the operating manual, chapter "Trace Mode".
Example
SWE:CONT OFF
SWE:COUN 16
Turn on single sweep mode and sets the number of measurements to 16.
DISP:TRAC:MODE MAXH
Activates MAXHold mode for the trace.
INIT;*WAI
Starts the measurement and waits for the end of the 16 sweeps.

Operating Manual 1173.0966.12 - 07 156

R&S FSC Remote Control – Commands
Remote Commands of the Spectrum Analyzer

Characteristics
*RST value: WRITe
SCPI: device–specific

FORMat:BORDer <ByteOrder>

This command selects the format of binary data.

Parameters
<ByteOrder>
SWAPped The least significant byte is transferred first (little endian)
NORMal The most significant byte is transferred first (big endian)
Example
FORM:BORD NORM
Changes the byte order to normal mode
Characteristics
*RST value SWAPped
SCPI: conform

[SENSe:]DETector<t>[:FUNCtion] <Detector>

This command selects the detector.

Parameter
<Detector>
APEak | NEGative | POSitive | SAMPle | RMS
For more information see the operating manual, chapter "Detectors".
Example
DET POS
Sets the detector to "positive peak".
Characteristics
*RST value: POS
SCPI: conform

[SENSe:]DETector<t>[:FUNCtion]:AUTO <State>

This command couples and decouples the detector to the trace mode.
Parameter
<State>
ON | OFF

Operating Manual 1173.0966.12 - 07 157

R&S FSC Remote Control – Commands
Remote Commands of the Spectrum Analyzer

Example
DET:AUTO OFF
Turns off automatic detector selection.
Characteristics
*RST value: ON
SCPI: conform

TRACe[:DATA]? <Destination>

This command queries the trace data of the current measurement.

It also transfers data from a file to a particular trace.
With FORMat[:DATA] <DataFormat> command, you can set the data format.
Parameter
<Destination>
TRACe1 writes to or reads out trace 1
TRACe2 writes to or reads out trace 2
LIST reads out peak list of SEM measurements
Return value
The R&S FSC returns 631 values. Each value corresponds to one pixel of a trace.
The unit depends on the measurement and the unit you have set with
UNIT:POWer <Unit>.
Note:
If you use the auto peak detector, the command reads out positive peak values
only.
Example
TRAC:DATA? TRACE1
Reads out the data for trace 1
Characteristics
*RST value: -
SCPI: conform

FORMat[:DATA] <DataFormat>

This command selects the data format that is used for transmission of trace data
from the R&S FSC to the controlling computer.
Note that the command has no effect for data that you send to the R&S FSC. The
R&S FSC automatically recognizes the data it receives, regardless of the format.
Parameter
<DataFormat>

Operating Manual 1173.0966.12 - 07 158

R&S FSC Remote Control – Commands
Remote Commands of the Spectrum Analyzer

ASCii ASCii format, separated by commas

REAL,32 32-bit IEEE 754 floating-point numbers in the "definite length
block format"
In REAL,32 format, a string of return values would look like:
#42524<value 1><value 2>...<value n>
with

#4 Number of digits of the following number of data bytes (= 4 in this example)

2524 Number of following data bytes (2524, corresponds to the 631 sweep points of the
R&S FSC.

<value> 4-byte floating point value

Example
FORM ASC
Selects the ASCii data format.
Characteristics
*RST value: ASCii
SCPI: conform

8.2.6 Using Markers

● Markers and Delta Markers on page 159

● Marker Functions on page 168

8.2.6.1 Markers and Delta Markers

The following commands are for setting and controlling markers and deltamarkers.
In spectrum mode mode, the suffix <n> at CALCulate selects the trace.
The suffix <m> at MARKer is in the range {1..6} and selects the marker or deltamarker.

List of commands
● CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>[:STATe] <State> (p. 160)
● CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:AOFF (p. 160)
● CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:MAXimum[:PEAK] (p. 160)
● CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:MAXimum:NEXT (p. 161)
● CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:MINimum[:PEAK] (p. 161)
● CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:X <Coordinate> (p. 161)
● CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:X:RELative <Distance> (p. 162)
● CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:Y? (p. 162)
● CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>[:STATe] <State> (p. 163)
● CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:AOFF (p. 163)
● CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:MAXimum[:PEAK] (p. 164)
● CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:MAXimum:NEXT (p. 164)
● CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:MINimum[:PEAK] (p. 164)
● CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:X <Coordinate> (p. 165)

Operating Manual 1173.0966.12 - 07 159

R&S FSC Remote Control – Commands
Remote Commands of the Spectrum Analyzer

● CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:X:SLIMits[:STATe] <State> (p. 165)

● CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:X:SLIMits:LEFT <SearchLimit> (p. 166)
● CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:X:SLIMits:RIGHt <Searchlimit> (p. 166)
● CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:Y? (p. 167)

CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>[:STATe] <State>

This command turns delta markers on and off.

If you set the suffix at DELTamarker to 1, or use no suffix, the R&S FSC interprets
this as delta marker 2 because the first marker has to be a normal marker. If more
than one normal marker (2 to 6) are already active, the command turns these
marker into delta markers. If no delta marker is active yet, the command activates
the delta marker and positions it on the trace maximum.
Parameter
<State>
ON | OFF
Example
CALC:DELT3 ON
Turns delta marker 3 on or turn marker 3 into a delta marker.
Characteristics
RST value: OFF
SCPI: device–specific

CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:AOFF

This command turns off all active delta markers.

This command is an event and therefore has no query and no *RST value.
Example
CALC:DELT:AOFF
Turns off all delta markers.
Characteristics
RST value: –
SCPI: device–specific

CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:MAXimum[:PEAK]

This command positions a delta marker on the current trace maximum.

If necessary, the corresponding delta marker is activated first.
This command is an event and therefore has no *RST value and no query.
Example
CALC:DELT3:MAX
Moves delta marker 3 to the maximum peak.

Operating Manual 1173.0966.12 - 07 160

R&S FSC Remote Control – Commands
Remote Commands of the Spectrum Analyzer

Characteristics
RST value: –
SCPI: device–specific

CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:MAXimum:NEXT

This command positions a delta marker on the next smaller trace maximum.
If necessary, the corresponding delta marker is activated first.
This command is an event and therefore has no *RST value and no query.
Example
CALC:DELT2:MAX:NEXT
Moves delta marker 2 to the next smaller maximum peak.
Characteristics
RST value: –
SCPI: device–specific

CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:MINimum[:PEAK]

This command positions a delta marker on the current trace minimum.

If necessary, the corresponding delta marker is activated first.
This command is an event and therefore has no *RST value and no query.
Example
CALC:DELT3:MIN
Moves delta marker 3 to the trace minimum.
Characteristics
RST value: –
SCPI: device–specific

CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:X <Coordinate>

This command positions a delta marker on a particular coordinate on the horizontal

axis.
Note that it is possible to place the marker outside the visible trace. In that case,
this value is invalid.
If necessary, the corresponding delta marker is activated first.
Parameter
<Coordinate>
Numeric value that indicates the coordinate on the horizontal axis.
The range corresponds to the maximum span.
The unit depends on the measurement, e.g. Hz for measurements in the frequency
domain and seconds for measurements in the time domain.

Operating Manual 1173.0966.12 - 07 161

R&S FSC Remote Control – Commands
Remote Commands of the Spectrum Analyzer

Example
CALC:DELT:MOD REL
Delta marker positions are relative to marker 1.
CALC:DELT2:X 10.7MHz
Positions delta marker 2 10.7 MHz to the right of marker 1.
CALC:DELT2:X?
CALC:DELT2:X:REL?
Queries the absolute and relative position of delta marker 2.
Characteristics
RST value: –
SCPI: device–specific

CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:X:RELative <Distance>

This command positions a delta marker on a position relative to the reference

marker.
If necessary, the corresponding delta marker is activated first.
Parameter
<Distance>
Numeric value that defines the distance of the marker to the reference marker
The range depends on the current scaling of the horizontal axis.
The unit depends on the measurement, e.g. Hz for measurements in the frequency
domain and seconds for measurements in the time domain.
Example
CALC:DELT3:X:REL 5 kHz
Sets the delta marker at a distance of 5 kHz to the reference position.
Characteristics
RST value: –
SCPI: device–specific

CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:Y?

This command queries the vertical position of a delta marker. The result is always
a relative value in relation to marker 1.
If necessary, the corresponding delta marker is activated first.
To get a valid result, you have to perform a complete sweep with synchronization
to the sweep end between activating the delta marker and reading out the result.
This is only possible in single sweep mode.
Return value
<MarkerPosition>

Operating Manual 1173.0966.12 - 07 162

R&S FSC Remote Control – Commands
Remote Commands of the Spectrum Analyzer

In spectrum analyzer mode, the unit depends on the unit you have set and the
scaling of the vertical axis.

Parameter or measuring functions Output unit

DBM | DBPW | DBUV | DBMV | DBUA dB (lin/log)

WATT | VOLT | AMPere dB (lin), % (log)

Example
INIT:CONT OFF
CALC:DELT2 ON
Turns on single sweep mode and delta marker 2.
INIT;*WAI
Starts a sweep and waits for its end.
CALC:DELT2:Y?
Queries the position of delta marker 2.
Characteristics
RST value: –
SCPI: device–specific

CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>[:STATe] <State>

This command turns markers on and off.

If you do not use a suffix at MARKer, marker 1 is selected. If one or more delta
markers (2 to 6) are already active, the command turns these delta markers into
normal markers.
Parameter
<State>
ON | OFF
Example
CALC:MARK3 ON
Turns on marker 3.
Characteristics
*RST value: OFF
SCPI: device–specific

CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:AOFF

This command turns off all active markers, delta markers and active marker
measurement functions.
This command is an event and therefore has no query and no *RST value.

Operating Manual 1173.0966.12 - 07 163

R&S FSC Remote Control – Commands
Remote Commands of the Spectrum Analyzer

Example
CALC:MARK:AOFF
Switches off all markers.
Characteristics
*RST value: –
SCPI: device–specific

CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:MAXimum[:PEAK]

This command positions a marker on the current trace maximum.

If necessary, the corresponding marker is activated first.
This command is an event and therefore has no *RST value and no query.
Example
CALC:MARK2:MAX
Moves marker 2 to the maximum peak.
Characteristics
*RST value: –
SCPI: device–specific

CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:MAXimum:NEXT

This command positions a marker on the next smaller trace maximum.

If necessary, the corresponding marker is activated first.
This command is an event and therefore has no *RST value and no query.
Example
CALC:MARK2:MAX:NEXT
Moves marker 2 to the next smaller maximum peak.
Characteristics
*RST value: –
SCPI: device–specific

CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:MINimum[:PEAK]

This command positions a marker on the current trace minimum.

If necessary, the corresponding marker is activated first.
This command is an event and therefore has no *RST value and no query.
Example
CALC:MARK2:MIN
Moves marker 2 to the trace minimum.

Operating Manual 1173.0966.12 - 07 164

R&S FSC Remote Control – Commands
Remote Commands of the Spectrum Analyzer

Characteristics
*RST value: –
SCPI: device–specific

CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:X <Coordinate>

This command positions a marker on a particular coordinate on the horizontal axis.

If one or more delta markers (2 to 6) are already active, the command turns these
delta markers into normal markers.
Note that it is possible to place the marker outside the visible trace. In that case,
this value is invalid.
If necessary, the corresponding delta marker is activated first.
Parameter
<Coordinate>
Numeric value indicating the coordinate on the horizontal axis.
The range corresponds to the maximum span.
The unit in spectrum analyzer mode depends on the measurement, e.g. Hz for
measurements in the frequency domain and seconds for measurements in the time
domain.
Example
CALC:MARK2:X 10.7MHz
Positions marker 2 to frequency 10.7 MHz.
Characteristics
*RST value: –
SCPI: device–specific

CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:X:SLIMits[:STATe] <State>

This command turns marker search limits on and off.

If you perform a measurement in zero span, this command, this command limits
the evaluation range on the trace.
The numeric suffix at MARKer is irrelevant.
Parameter
<State>
ON | OFF
Example
See CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:X:SLIMits:RIGHt <Searchlimit>.
Characteristics
*RST value: OFF
SCPI: device–specific

Operating Manual 1173.0966.12 - 07 165

R&S FSC Remote Control – Commands
Remote Commands of the Spectrum Analyzer

CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:X:SLIMits:LEFT <SearchLimit>

This command defines the left limit of the marker search range.
To use the command, you first have to turn on search limits with
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:X:SLIMits[:STATe] <State>.
If you perform a measurement in zero span, this command, this command limits
the evaluation range on the trace.
The numeric suffix at MARKer is irrelevant.
Parameter
<SearchLimit>
Numeric value that sets the left marker search limit.
The value range corresponds to the maximum span.
The unit in spectrum analyzer mode depends on the measurement, e.g. Hz for
measurements in the frequency domain and seconds for measurements in the time
domain.
Example
See CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:X:SLIMits:RIGHt <Searchlimit>.
Characteristics
*RST value: – (is set to the left diagram border when switching on search limits)
SCPI: device–specific

CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:X:SLIMits:RIGHt <Searchlimit>

This command defines the right limit of the marker search range.
To use the command, you first have to turn on search limits with
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:X:SLIMits[:STATe] <State>.
If you perform a measurement in zero span, this command, this command limits
the evaluation range on the trace.
The numeric suffix at MARKer is irrelevant.
Parameter
<SearchLimit>
Numeric value that sets the right marker search limit.
The value range corresponds to the maximum span.
The unit depends on the measurement, e.g. Hz for measurements in the frequency
domain and seconds for measurements in the time domain.

Operating Manual 1173.0966.12 - 07 166

R&S FSC Remote Control – Commands
Remote Commands of the Spectrum Analyzer

Example
CALC:MARK:X:SLIM ON
CALC:MARK:X:SLIM:LEFT 10MHz
CALC:MARK:X:SLIM:RIGH 100MHz
Turns search limits on and defines a search range from 10 MHz to 100 MHz.
Characteristics
*RST value: – (is set to the right diagram border when switching on search limits)
SCPI: device–specific

CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:Y?

This command queries the absolute vertical position of a marker.

If necessary, the corresponding marker is activated first.
To get a valid result, you have to perform a complete sweep with synchronization
to the sweep end between activating the delta marker and reading out the result.
This is only possible in single sweep mode.
Return values
<MarkerPosition>
numeric value of the marker position
In spectrum mode, the unit depends on UNIT:POWer.
Example
INIT:CONT OFF
CALC:MARK2 ON
Turns on single sweep mode and marker 2.
INIT;*WAI
Starts a sweep and waits for the end.
CALC:MARK2:Y?
Queries the position of marker 2.
Characteristics
*RST value: –
SCPI: device–specific

Operating Manual 1173.0966.12 - 07 167

R&S FSC Remote Control – Commands
Remote Commands of the Spectrum Analyzer

8.2.6.2 Marker Functions

The following commands perform various kinds of analysis at the marker position.
The suffix <m> at MARKer is irrelevant, except where noted.

List of commands
● CALCulate:MARKer<m>:COUNt:FREQuency? (p. 168)
● CALCulate:MARKer<m>:COUNt[:STATe] <State> (p. 168)
● CALCulate:MARKer<m>:FREQuency:MODE <InputMode> (p. 169)
● CALCulate:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:CENTer (p. 169)
● CALCulate:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:DEModulation[:STATe] <State> (p. 170)
● CALCulate:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:DEModulation:HOLDoff <Time> (p. 170)
● CALCulate:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:DEModulation:SELect <Demodulation> (p.171)
● CALCulate:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:NDBDown <Distance> (p. 171)
● CALCulate:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:NDBDown:FREQuency? (p. 171)
● CALCulate:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:NDBDown:RESult? (p. 172)
● CALCulate:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:NDBDown:STATe <State> (p. 172)
● CALCulate:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:NOISe[:STATe] <State> (p. 172)
● CALCulate:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:NOISe:RESult? (p. 173)
● CALCulate:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:REFerence (p. 173)

CALCulate:MARKer<m>:COUNt:FREQuency?

This command performs a frequency measurement at the marker position and

returns the result.
To get a valid result, you have to perform a complete sweep with synchronization
to the sweep end to make sure that the R&S FSC actually reaches the frequency
you want to measure. This is only possible in single sweep mode.
Before you can use the command, you have to turn on the frequency counter with
CALCulate:MARKer<m>:COUNt[:STATe] <State>.
Example
See CALCulate:MARKer<m>:COUNt[:STATe] <State>.
Characteristics
*RST value: –
SCPI: device–specific

CALCulate:MARKer<m>:COUNt[:STATe] <State>

This command turns the frequency counter at the marker position on and off.
You can read out the result with CALCulate:MARKer<m>:COUNt:FREQuency?.
Frequency counting is possible only for one marker at a time. If it is activated for
another marker, it is automatically deactivated for the previous marker.

Operating Manual 1173.0966.12 - 07 168

R&S FSC Remote Control – Commands
Remote Commands of the Spectrum Analyzer

To get a valid result, you have to perform a complete sweep with synchronization
to the sweep end to make sure that the R&S FSC actually reaches the frequency
you want to measure. This is only possible in single sweep mode.
The suffix <m> selects the marker.
Parameter
<State>
ON | OFF
Example
INIT:CONT OFF
CALC:MARK ON
Turns on single sweep mode and marker 1.
CALC:MARK:COUN ON
Turns on the frequency counter for marker 1.
INIT;*WAI
CALC:MARK:COUN:FREQ?
Performs a measurement and queries the results of the frequency counter.
Characteristics
*RST value: OFF
SCPI: device–specific

CALCulate:MARKer<m>:FREQuency:MODE <InputMode>

This command selects the marker frequency display mode.

Parameter
<InputMode>
FREQuency sets the marker frequency mode to frequency input (Hz)
CHANnel sets the marker frequency mode to channel input (channel
number)
Example
CALC:MARK:FREQ:MODE FREQ
Selects the frequency display mode.
Characteristics
*RST value: FREQ
SCPI: device-specific

CALCulate:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:CENTer

This command matches the center frequency to the frequency of a marker

If you use a delta marker, the R&S FSC turns it into a normal marker.
The suffix <m> selects the marker.

Operating Manual 1173.0966.12 - 07 169

R&S FSC Remote Control – Commands
Remote Commands of the Spectrum Analyzer

This command is an event and therefore has no *RST value and no query.
Example
CALC:MARK1:FUNC:CENT
Matches the center frequency to the frequency of marker 1.
Characteristics
*RST value: -
SCPI: device-specific

CALCulate:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:DEModulation[:STATe] <State>

This command turns the audio demodulator on and off when the measurement hits
a marker position.
With a span greater than 0, you can define a hold time at the marker position with
CALCulate:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:DEModulation:HOLDoff <Time>.
In zero span the demodulation is on permanently.
Parameter
<State>
ON | OFF
Example
CALC:MARK3:FUNC:DEM ON
Switches on the demodulation for marker 3.
Characteristics
*RST value: OFF
SCPI: device–specific

CALCulate:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:DEModulation:HOLDoff <Time>

This command defines the hold time at the marker position for the demodulation
with span > 0.
Parameter
<Time>
Numeric value in the range from 10 ms to 500 s.
Example:
CALC:MARK:FUNC:DEM:HOLD 3s
Sets a hold time of 3 seconds.
Characteristics:
*RST value: – (DEModulation is set to OFF)
SCPI: device–specific

Operating Manual 1173.0966.12 - 07 170

R&S FSC Remote Control – Commands
Remote Commands of the Spectrum Analyzer

CALCulate:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:DEModulation:SELect <Demodulation>

This command selects the type of demodulation type for the audio demodulator.
Parameter
<Demodulation>
AM | FM
Example
CALC:MARK:FUNC:DEM:SEL FM
Selects FM demodulation.
Characteristics
*RST value: AM
SCPI: device–specific

CALCulate:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:NDBDown <Distance>

This command defines the distance of the n dB down markers to the reference
marker.
Parameter
<Distance>
Distance of the temporary markers to the reference marker in dB.
Example
See CALCulate:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:NDBDown:STATe <State>
Characteristics
*RST value: 3 dB
SCPI: device-specific

CALCulate:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:NDBDown:FREQuency?

This command queries the horizontal position of the n dB down markers.

Return value
<frequency1> absolute frequency of the n dB marker to the left of the
reference marker in Hz
<frequency1> absolute frequency of the n dB marker to the right of the
reference marker in Hz.
Example
See CALCulate:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:NDBDown:STATe <State>
Characteristics
*RST value: -
SCPI: device-specific

Operating Manual 1173.0966.12 - 07 171

R&S FSC Remote Control – Commands
Remote Commands of the Spectrum Analyzer

CALCulate:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:NDBDown:RESult?

This command queries the frequency spacing or bandwidth of the n dB down

markers.
Return value
<Bandwidth>
Bandwidth in Hz.
Example
See CALCulate:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:NDBDown:STATe <State>
Characteristics
*RST value: -
SCPI: device-specific

CALCulate:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:NDBDown:STATe <State>

This command turns the n dB Down marker function on and off.

Parameter
<State>
ON | OFF
Example
CALC:MARK:FUNC:NDBD:STAT ON
Turns on the n dB marker function.
CALC:MARK:FUNC:NDBD 3
Positions two temporary markers 3 dB below a reference marker.
CALC:MARK:FUNC:NDBD:FREQ?
Queries the frequency position of the n dB Down markers; would return e.g.
100000000,200000000
CALC:MARK:FUNC:NDBD:RES?
Queries the measurement result; would return e.g.
100000000
Characteristics
*RST value: OFF
SCPI: device-specific

CALCulate:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:NOISe[:STATe] <State>

This command turns the noise measurement for all markers on and off.
You can query the results of the noise power density at the marker position with
CALCulate:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:NOISe:RESult?.

Operating Manual 1173.0966.12 - 07 172

R&S FSC Remote Control – Commands
Remote Commands of the Spectrum Analyzer

Parameter
<State>
ON | OFF
Example
See CALCulate:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:NOISe:RESult?.
Characteristics
*RST value: OFF
SCPI: device–specific

CALCulate:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:NOISe:RESult?

This command queries the result of the noise measurement.

To get a valid result, you have to perform a complete sweep with synchronization
to the sweep end before reading out the result. This is only possible in single
sweep mode.
This command is an event and therefore has no *RST value and no query.
Return value
<NoiseLevel>
The unit depends on UNIT:POWer.
Example
INIT:CONT OFF
Turns on single sweep mode.
CALC:MARK2 ON
CALC:MARK2:FUNC:NOIS ON
Turns on marker 2 and assigns the noise measurement to that marker.
INIT;*WAI
CALC:MARK2:NOIS:RES?
Performs the measurement and queries the noise marker results.
Characteristics
*RST value: –
SCPI: device–specific

CALCulate:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:REFerence

This command matches the reference level to the power level of a marker
If you use a delta marker, the R&S FSC turns it into a normal marker.
This command is an event and therefore has no *RST value and no query.
Example
CALC:MARK1:FUNC:REF
Matches the reference level to the power level of marker 1.

Operating Manual 1173.0966.12 - 07 173

R&S FSC Remote Control – Commands
Remote Commands of the Spectrum Analyzer

Characteristics
*RST value: -
SCPI: device-specific

8.2.7 Using Display Lines and Limit Lines

8.2.7.1 Display Lines

The following commands define the position of the display line.

The suffix <n> at CALCulate is irrelevant.

List of commands
● CALCulate<n>:DLINe <Amplitude> (p. 174)
● CALCulate<n>:DLINe:STATe <State> (p. 174)

CALCulate<n>:DLINe <Amplitude>

This command defines the position of a display line.

Parameter
<Amplitude>
Numeric value with a variable range and unit.
You can use any unit you want, the R&S FSC then converts the unit to the
currently selected unit. If you omit a unit, the R&S FSC uses the currently selected
unit.
Example
CALC:DLIN –20dBm
Sets the display line threshold to -20 dBm.
Characteristics
*RST value: – (STATe to OFF)
SCPI: device–specific

CALCulate<n>:DLINe:STATe <State>

This command turns display lines on and off.

Parameter
<State>
ON | OFF
Example
CALC:DLIN:STAT OFF
Turns on the display line.

Operating Manual 1173.0966.12 - 07 174

R&S FSC Remote Control – Commands
Remote Commands of the Spectrum Analyzer

Characteristics
*RST value: OFF
SCPI: device–specific

8.2.7.2 Limit Lines

The following commands define limit lines and perform the corresponding limit checks.
The suffix <n> at CALCulate is irrelevant.
The suffix <k> at LIMit selects the limit line and is in the range <1…2>.

List of commands
● CALCulate<n>:LIMit<k>:BEEP[:STATe] <State> (p. 175)
● CALCulate<n>:LIMit<k>:COMMent? (p. 175)
● CALCulate<n>:LIMit<k>:DEFine (p. 176)
● CALCulate<n>:LIMit<k>:DELete (p. 177)
● CALCulate<n>:LIMit<k>:FAIL? (p. 177)
● CALCulate<n>:LIMit<k>:LOWer:SELect <LimitLine> (p. 177)
● CALCulate<n>:LIMit<k>:LOWer:THReshold <Level> (p. 178)
● CALCulate<n>:LIMit<k>:STATe <State> (p. 178)
● CALCulate<n>:LIMit<k>:UNIT:X? (p. 178)
● CALCulate<n>:LIMit<k>:UNIT[:Y]? (p. 179)
● CALCulate<n>:LIMit<k>:UPPer:SELect <LimitLine> (p. 179)
● CALCulate<n>:LIMit<k>:UPPer:THReshold <Level> (p. 179)

CALCulate<n>:LIMit<k>:BEEP[:STATe] <State>

This command turns the beeper that beeps if a limit line is violated on and off.
Parameter
<State>
ON | OFF
Example
CALC:LIM:BEEP ON
Activates the audio beep.
Characteristics
*RST value: OFF
SCPI: device-specific

CALCulate<n>:LIMit<k>:COMMent?

This command queries the description of a limit line.

This command is a query and therefore has no RST value.

Operating Manual 1173.0966.12 - 07 175

R&S FSC Remote Control – Commands
Remote Commands of the Spectrum Analyzer

Return value
<Comment>
String containing the description of the limit line.
Example
CALC:LIM:COMM?
Queries the description of limit line 1.
Characteristics
*RST value: -
SCPI: device-specific

CALCulate<n>:LIMit<k>:DEFine
<Name>,<Comment>,<Unit>,<Scale>,<Unit>,<x1>,<y1>[,<xn>,<yn>]

This command defines the shape of a limit line.

After you have defined the shape of the limit line you still have to activate it with
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<k>:UPPer:SELect <LimitLine> before it takes effect.
Parameters
<Name>
String containing the name of the limit line.
Note: if a limit line with the same name already exists, it will be overwritten.
<Comment>
String containing a comment for the limit line.
<X-unit>
Unit of the x-axis. HZ | S | M
<Scale>
Scale of the x-axis: ABS | REL
<Y-unit>
Unit of the y-axis: DB | DBM | DBUV | DBMV | DBUVM | DBUAM | VSWR | V | W
<x1>,<xn>
Data points on the x-axis.
Note: a limit line may consist of up to 100 horizontal data points.
<y1>,<yn>
Data points on the y-axis.
Example
CALC:LIM:DEF 'Line','Example',HZ,ABS,DBM,10000000,-10,
10000000,0,20000000,0
Defines a limit line with three data points.
Characteristics
*RST value: -
SCPI: device-specific

Operating Manual 1173.0966.12 - 07 176

R&S FSC Remote Control – Commands
Remote Commands of the Spectrum Analyzer

CALCulate<n>:LIMit<k>:DELete

This command deletes a limit line.

This command is an event and therefore has no *RST value and no query.
Example
CALC:LIM2:DEL
Deletes the second limit line
Characteristics
*RST value: -
SCPI: device-specific

CALCulate<n>:LIMit<k>:FAIL?

This command queries the result of a limit check.

To get a valid result, you have to perform a complete sweep with synchronization
to the sweep end before reading out the result. This is only possible in single
sweep mode.
Return value
0 for PASS and 1 for FAIL
Example
INIT;*WAI
CALC:LIM1:FAIL?
Performs a measurement and queries the result of the check for limit line 1.
Characteristics
*RST value: -
SCPI: conform

CALCulate<n>:LIMit<k>:LOWer:SELect <LimitLine>

This command selects the lower limit line.

This command is an event and therefore has no *RST value and no query.
Parameter
<LimitLine>
String containing the file name of the lower limit line.
Example
CALC:LIM:LOW:SEL 'GSM_Lower.rellim'
Selects the lower limit line.
Characteristics
*RST value:
SCPI: conform

Operating Manual 1173.0966.12 - 07 177

R&S FSC Remote Control – Commands
Remote Commands of the Spectrum Analyzer

CALCulate<n>:LIMit<k>:LOWer:THReshold <Level>

This command defines the level of a lower threshold limit line.

Parameter
<Level>
Numeric value whose unit depends on the unit you have currently selected for the
vertical axis.
Example
CALC:LIM:LOW:THR -10DBM
Defines a threshold of -10 dBm
Characteristics
*RST value: -
SCPI: device-specific

CALCulate<n>:LIMit<k>:STATe <State>

This command turns a limit check on and off.

You can query the result of the limit check with
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<k>:FAIL?.
Parameter
<State>
ON | OFF
Example
CALC:LIM:STAT ON
Switches on the limit check for limit line 1.
Characteristics
*RST value: OFF
SCPI: conform

CALCulate<n>:LIMit<k>:UNIT:X?

This command queries the horizontal unit of a limit line.

This command is a query and therefore has no *RST value.
Example
CALC:LIM:UNIT:X?
Queries the x-unit of the first limit line.
Characteristics
*RST value: -
SCPI: device-specific

Operating Manual 1173.0966.12 - 07 178

R&S FSC Remote Control – Commands
Remote Commands of the Spectrum Analyzer

CALCulate<n>:LIMit<k>:UNIT[:Y]?

This command queries the vertical unit of a limit line.

This command is a query and therefore has no *RST value.
Example
CALC:LIM1:UNIT?
Queries the y-unit of the first limit line.
Characteristics
*RST value: -
SCPI: device-specific

CALCulate<n>:LIMit<k>:UPPer:SELect <LimitLine>

This command selects the upper limit line.

This command is an event and therefore has no *RST value and no query.
Parameter
<LimitLine>
string containing the file name of the upper limit line
Example
CALC:LIM:UPP:SEL 'GSM_Upper.rellim'
Selects the upper limit line.
Characteristics
*RST value: -
SCPI: conform

CALCulate<n>:LIMit<k>:UPPer:THReshold <Level>

This command defines the level of an upper threshold limit line.

Parameter
<Level>
Numeric value whose unit depends on the unit you have currently selected for the
vertical axis.
Example
CALC:LIM:UPP:THR -10DBM
Defines a threshold of -10 dBm
Characteristics
*RST value: -
SCPI: device-specific

Operating Manual 1173.0966.12 - 07 179

R&S FSC Remote Control – Commands
Remote Commands of the Spectrum Analyzer

8.2.8 Configuring and Using Measurement Functions

The R&S FSC provides measurement functions that allow you to perform advanced
measurements and can also be controlled remotely.

General measurement functions:

● Working with Channel Tables on page 180

Power measurements:
● Power Measurements on page 182
● Measuring the Channel Power on page 186
● Measuring the Occupied Bandwidth on page 187
● TDMA Measurements on page 188
● Measuring the Adjacent Channel on page 189
● Measuring the Spectrum Emission Mask on page 204

Other measurements
● Measuring the Harmonic Distortion on page 200
● Measuring the AM Modulation Depth on page 203

8.2.8.1 Working with Channel Tables

Use the following commands to work with channel tables.

List of commands
● [SENSe:]CHANnel <ChannelNumber> (p. 180)
● [SENSe:]CHANnel:TABLe:SELect <ChannelTable> (p. 181)
● [SENSe]:CHANnel:TABLe:SELect:DOWNlink <ChannelTable> (p. 181)
● [SENSe]:CHANnel:TABLe:SElect:UPLink <ChannelTable> (p. 182)
● [SENSe]:CHANnel:TABLe:SET <Direction> (p. 182)

[SENSe:]CHANnel <ChannelNumber>

This command selects the channel to be analyzed.

You have to set the frequency mode with [SENSe:]FREQuency:INPut:MODE to
channel first.
Parameter
<ChannelNumber>
numeric value that selects the number of the channel to be analyzed
Example
See [SENSe:]CHANnel:TABLe:SELect <ChannelTable>.
Characteristics
*RST value:depends on the channel table
SCPI: conform

Operating Manual 1173.0966.12 - 07 180

R&S FSC Remote Control – Commands
Remote Commands of the Spectrum Analyzer

[SENSe:]CHANnel:TABLe:SELect <ChannelTable>

This command selects a channel table configured for the link direction you have
selected with [SENSe]:CHANnel:TABLe:SET <Direction>.
Note that if you have previously selected a channel table with
[SENSe]:CHANnel:TABLe:SELect:DOWNlink <ChannelTable> or
[SENSe]:CHANnel:TABLe:SElect:UPLink <ChannelTable>, this
command replaces that file.
Parameter
<ChannelTable>
String containing the file name of the channel table.
Example
CHAN:TABL:SET UP
Selects channel tsble selection for uplink signals.
CHAN:TABL:SEL 'TV China.CHNTAB'
Loads the channel table with the name 'TV China' for the uplink.
CHAN:TABL:SEL 'TV Italy.chntab'
or
CHAN:TABL:SEL:UPL 'TV Italy.chntab'
Both commands replace the uplink channel table 'TV China' with 'TV Italy'.
Downlink channel tables are not affected by the commands sent so far.
FREQ:INP:MODE CHAN
CHAN 10
Select a particular uplink channel (e.g. #10) instead of a (center) frequency.
To select an additional downlink channel table, use either:
CHAN:TABL:SET DOWN
CHAN:TABL:SEL 'TV Italy.chntab'
or
CHAN:TABL:SEL:DOWN 'TV Italy.chntab'
Characteristics
*RST value: ' '
SCPI: device-specific

[SENSe]:CHANnel:TABLe:SELect:DOWNlink <ChannelTable>

This command selects a channel table configured for downlink signals.

Parameter
<ChannelTable>
string containing the name of the channel table.
Example
See [SENSe:]CHANnel:TABLe:SELect <ChannelTable>.

Operating Manual 1173.0966.12 - 07 181

R&S FSC Remote Control – Commands
Remote Commands of the Spectrum Analyzer

Characteristics
*RST value: ' '
SCPI: device-specific

[SENSe]:CHANnel:TABLe:SElect:UPLink <ChannelTable>

This command selects a channel table configured for uplink signals.

Parameter
<ChannelTable>
string containing the name of the channel table.
Example
See [SENSe:]CHANnel:TABLe:SELect <ChannelTable>.
Characteristics
*RST value: ' '
SCPI: device-specific

[SENSe]:CHANnel:TABLe:SET <Direction>

This command selects the link direction for measurements with channel tables.
Parameter
<Direction>
DOWN Downlink
UP Uplink
Example
See [SENSe:]CHANnel:TABLe:SELect <ChannelTable>.
Characteristics
*RST value: UP
SCPI: device-specific

8.2.8.2 Power Measurements

The following commands configure power measurements. To perform the actual

measurement, use the commands described in section "Performing and Triggering
Measurements".

List of commands
● CALCulate:MARKer:FUNCtion:POWer:SELect <Measurement> (p. 183)
● CALCulate:MARKer:FUNCtion:POWer[:STATe] <State> (p. 183)
● CALCulate:MARKer:FUNCtion:POWer:PRESet <Standard> (p. 183)
● CALCulate:MARKer:FUNCtion:POWer:PRESet:CHECk? (p. 184)
● CALCulate:MARKer:FUNCtion:LEVel:ONCE (p. 184)
● CALCulate:MARKer:FUNCtion:POWer:RESult? <Measurement> (p. 185)

Operating Manual 1173.0966.12 - 07 182

R&S FSC Remote Control – Commands
Remote Commands of the Spectrum Analyzer

CALCulate:MARKer:FUNCtion:POWer:SELect <Measurement>

This command selects a power measurement and turns the measurement on.
Parameter
ACPower | Adjacent channel leakage ratio (ACLR)
MCACpower aka adjacent channel power or multi carrier adjacent channel
CPOWer Channel power measurement
OBANdwidth | Occupied bandwidth
OBWidth
TDMA TDMA power
Example
CALC:MARK:FUNC:POW:SEL CPOW
Selects the channel power measurement
Characteristics
*RST value: –
SCPI: device–specific

CALCulate:MARKer:FUNCtion:POWer[:STATe] <State>

This command turns a power measurement on and off.

You can select a power measurement with
CALCulate:MARKer:FUNCtion:POWer:SELect <Measurement>.
Parameter
ON Particular power measurement active
OFF Basic spectrum measurement
Example
CALC:MARK:FUNC:POW OFF
Switches off the power measurement.
Characteristics
*RST value: OFF
SCPI: device–specific

CALCulate:MARKer:FUNCtion:POWer:PRESet <Standard>

This command selects one of the predefined configurations for a

telecommunications standard. This command only works if you have turned on
power measurements with CALCulate:MARKer:FUNCtion:POWer[:STATe]
<State>.
The configuration for a standard is in line with the specifications and includes
parameters like weighting filter, channel bandwidth and spacing, resolution and
video bandwidth, as well as detector and sweep time.

Operating Manual 1173.0966.12 - 07 183

R&S FSC Remote Control – Commands
Remote Commands of the Spectrum Analyzer

Parameter
<Standard>
string containing the file name of the standard
Example
CALC:MARK:FUNC:POW:PRES '3GPP WCDMA.chpstd'
Selects the 3GPP WCDMA standard for channel power measurements.
Characteristics
*RST value: -
SCPI: device-specific

CALCulate:MARKer:FUNCtion:POWer:PRESet:CHECk?

This command checks if the current settings are in line with the settings defined by
the standard selected with CALCulate:MARKer:FUNCtion:POWer:PRESet
<Standard>.
Note that the command only checks those parameters that are defined by the
standard.
This command is a query and therefore has no *RST value.
Return value
0 R&S FSC settings violate a standard configuration
1 R&S FSC setting comply with the standard
Example
CALC:MARK:FUNC:POW:PRES:CHEC?
Queries compliance to the standard currently in use.
Characteristics
*RST value: -
SCPI: device-specific

CALCulate:MARKer:FUNCtion:LEVel:ONCE

This command adjusts the reference level to the measured signal power.
This automatic routine makes sure that the that the signal power level does not
overload the R&S FSC or limit the dynamic range by too small a S/N ratio.
To determine the best reference level, the R&S FSC aborts current measurements
and performs a series of test sweeps. After it has finished the test, it continues with
the actual measurement.
This command is an event and therefore has no *RST value and no query.
Example
CALC:MARK:FUNC:LEV:ONCE
Initiates an automatic level adjust routine.

Operating Manual 1173.0966.12 - 07 184

R&S FSC Remote Control – Commands
Remote Commands of the Spectrum Analyzer

Characteristics
*RST value: -
SCPI: device–specific

CALCulate:MARKer:FUNCtion:POWer:RESult? <Measurement>

This command queries the results of power measurements.

To get a valid result, you have to perform a complete sweep with synchronization
to the sweep end before reading out the result. This is only possible in single
sweep mode.
Before you can use this command, you have to select the power measurement
with CALCulate:MARKer:FUNCtion:POWer:SELect <Measurement> and
activate it with CALCulate:MARKer:FUNCtion:POWer[:STATe] <State>.
This command is a query and therefore has no *RST value.
Parameter and return value
ACPower | Returns the results for ACLR measurements
MCACpower aka adjacent channel power or multi carrier adjacent channel
The number of return values depends on the number of TX
and adjacent channel. The order of return values is:
● power of the transmission channel
● power of the lower adjacent channel
● power of the upper adjacent channel
● power of the lower alternate channel 1
● power of the upper alternate channel 2
● etc.
The unit of the return values depends on the scaling of the
vertical axis:
● logarithmic scaling returns the power in the currently
selected unit (see UNIT:POWer).
● linear scaling returns the power in W.
CPOWer Returns the results for channel power measurements
The return value is the power of the channel. The unit
depends on the scaling of the vertical axis:
● logarithmic scaling returns the power in the currently
selected unit (see UNIT:POWer).
● linear scaling returns the power in W.
OBANdwidth | Returns the results for measurements of the occupied
OBWidth bandwidth
The command returns the occupied bandwidth in Hz.
TDMA Returns the results for TDMA power measurements
The return value is the power of the signal. The unit depends
on the scaling of the vertical axis:
● logarithmic scaling returns the power in the currently
selected unit (see UNIT:POWer).
● linear scaling returns the power in W.

Operating Manual 1173.0966.12 - 07 185

R&S FSC Remote Control – Commands
Remote Commands of the Spectrum Analyzer

Example of occupied bandwidth measurement

POW:BAND 90PCT
Defines the occupied bandwidth (90%).
INIT:CONT OFF
INIT;*WAI
CALC:MARK:FUNC:POW:RES? OBW
Turns on single sweep mode, performs a measurement and queries the results.
Characteristics
*RST value: -
SCPI: device–specific

8.2.8.3 Measuring the Channel Power

The following commands configure channel power measurements. To perform the

actual measurement, use the commands described in section "Performing and
Triggering Measurements".
The suffix <m> at MARKer is irrelevant.

List of commands
● CALCulate:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:CPOWer:BANDwidth <Bandwidth> (p. 186)
● CALCulate:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:CPOWer:MODE <DisplayMode> (p. 186)
● CALCulate:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:CPOWer:UNIT <Unit> (p. 187)

CALCulate:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:CPOWer:BANDwidth <Bandwidth>

This command defines the channel bandwidth for channel power measurements.
Parameter
<Bandwidth>
Numeric value in Hz.
Example
CALC:MARK:FUNC:CPOW:BAND 4 MHZ
Sets the channel bandwidth to 4 MHz.
Characteristics
*RST value: 3.84 MHz
SCPI: device-specific

CALCulate:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:CPOWer:MODE <DisplayMode>

This command selects the display mode for channel power measurements.
Parameter
<DisplayMode>

Operating Manual 1173.0966.12 - 07 186

R&S FSC Remote Control – Commands
Remote Commands of the Spectrum Analyzer

CLR Clear/Write
MAX Max Hold
Example
CALC:MARK:FUNC:CPOW:MODE CLR
Selects clear/write trace mode
Characteristics
*RST value: CLR
SCPI: device-specific

CALCulate:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:CPOWer:UNIT <Unit>

This command selects the unit of the vertical axis for channel power
measurements.
Parameter
<Unit>
DBM | DBMV | DBUV | VOLT | WATT | V | W
Example
CALC:MARK:FUNC:CPOW:UNIT DBM
Sets the unit to dBm.
Characteristics
*RST value: dBm
SCPI: device-specific

8.2.8.4 Measuring the Occupied Bandwidth

The following commands configure the measurement of the Occupied Bandwidth. To

perform the actual measurement, use the commands described in section "Performing
and Triggering Measurements".
The suffix <m> at MARKer is irrelevant.

List of commands
● CALCulate:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:OBAN:BANDwidth <Bandwidth> (p. 187)
● CALCulate:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:OBAN:BANDwidth:PCT <OBW> (p. 188)

CALCulate:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:OBAN:BANDwidth <Bandwidth>

This command defines the channel bandwidth for occupied bandwidth

measurements.
Instead of OBANwidth, you can also use the alias OBWidth

Operating Manual 1173.0966.12 - 07 187

R&S FSC Remote Control – Commands
Remote Commands of the Spectrum Analyzer

Parameter
<Bandwidth
Numeric value in Hz.
Example
CALC:MARK:FUNC:OBW:BAND 1 MHZ
Sets the channel bandwidth to 1 MHz
Characteristics
*RST value: 3.84 MHz
SCPI: device-specific

CALCulate:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:OBAN:BANDwidth:PCT <OBW>

This command defines the percentage of the total power that defines the occupied
bandwidth.
Instead of OBANwidth, you can also use the alias OBWidth
Parameter
<Percentage>
Numeric value in the range from 10% to 99.9%.
Example
CALC:MARK:FUNC:OBW:BAND:PCT 95
Sets the power percentage to 95%
Characteristics
*RST value: 99%
SCPI: device-specific

8.2.8.5 TDMA Measurements

The following commands configure TDMA measurements. To perform the actual

measurement, use the commands described in section "Performing and Triggering
Measurements".
The suffix <m> at MARKer is irrelevant.

List of commands
● CALCulate:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:TDMA:BURSt <BurstLength> (p. 188)

CALCulate:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:TDMA:BURSt <BurstLength>

This command defines the burst length of the TDMA signal.

Parameter
<BurstLength>
Numeric value in seconds.

Operating Manual 1173.0966.12 - 07 188

R&S FSC Remote Control – Commands
Remote Commands of the Spectrum Analyzer

The value range depends on the current sweep time.

Example
CALC:MARK:FUNC:TDMA:BURS 80 US
Sets the burst length to 80 us.
Characteristics
*RST value: 470 us
SCPI: device-specific

8.2.8.6 Measuring the Adjacent Channel Leakage Ratio

The following commands configures Adjacent Channel Leakage Ratio (ACLR)

measurements. To perform the actual measurement, use the commands described in
section "Performing and Triggering Measurements".
The suffix <y> selects one of the 11 alternate channels. The range is <1…11>.
The suffix <k> at LIMit is irrelevant.
● Configuring and Performing the ACLR Measurement on page 189
● ACLR Limit Check on page 195

Configuring and Performing the ACLR Measurement

The following commands configure and perform the ACLR measurements.

List of commands
● [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:ACPairs <ChannelPairs> (p. 189)
● [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:BANDwidth[:CHANnel] <Bandwidth> (p. 190)
● [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:BANDwidth:ACHannel <Bandwidth> (p. 190)
● [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:BANDwidth:ALTernate<y> <Bandwidth> (p. 191)
● [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:MODE <PowerMode> (p. 191)
● [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:PRESet:RLEVel (p. 191)
● [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:REFerence:TXCHannel:AUTO <RefChannel> (p. 192)
● [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:REFerence:TXCHannel:MANual <RefChannel> (p. 192)
● [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:SPACing[:ACHannel] (p. 193)
● [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:SPACing:ALTernate<y> <Spacing> (p. 193)
● [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:SPACing:CHANnel<Tx> <Spacing> (p. 194)
● [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:TXCHannel:COUNt <TxChannels> (p. 194)

[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:ACPairs <ChannelPairs>

This command defines the number of pairs of adjacent channels.

Parameter
<ChannelPairs>
Numeric value in the range from 1 to 12.
The number corresponds to a pair of adjacent channels, one channel on the left
and one on the right of the transmission channel.

Operating Manual 1173.0966.12 - 07 189

R&S FSC Remote Control – Commands
Remote Commands of the Spectrum Analyzer

Example
See [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:TXCHannel:COUNt <TxChannels>
Characteristics
*RST value: 1
SCPI: device-specific

[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:BANDwidth[:CHANnel] <Bandwidth>

This command defines the channel bandwidth of the transmission channels.

Instead of BANDwidth, you can also use the alias BWIDth
Parameter
<Bandwidth>
Numeric value in Hz.
Example
See [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:TXCHannel:COUNt <TxChannels>
Characteristics
*RST value: 14 kHz
SCPI: device-specific

[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:BANDwidth:ACHannel <Bandwidth>

This command defines the channel bandwidth of the adjacent channel.

The adjacent channel is the first pair of channels next to the transmission
channels. If you set the channel bandwidth for these channels, the R&S FSC sets
the bandwidth of the alternate channels to the same value.
Instead of BANDwidth, you can also use the alias BWIDth
Parameter
<Bandwidth>
Numeric value in Hz.
Example
See [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:TXCHannel:COUNt <TxChannels>
Characteristics
*RST value: 14 kHz
SCPI: device-specific

Operating Manual 1173.0966.12 - 07 190

R&S FSC Remote Control – Commands
Remote Commands of the Spectrum Analyzer

[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:BANDwidth:ALTernate<y> <Bandwidth>

This command defines the bandwidth of the alternate channels.

If you set the channel bandwidth for the first alternate channel, the R&S FSC sets
the bandwidth of the other alternate channels to the same value. The command
works hierarchically: to set a bandwidth of the 10th and 8th channel, you have to
set the bandwidth of the 8th channel first.
Instead of BANDwidth, you can also use the alias BWIDth
Parameter
<Bandwidth>
Numeric value in Hz.
Example
See [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:TXCHannel:COUNt <TxChannels>
Characteristics
*RST value: 14 kHz
SCPI: device-specific

[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:MODE <PowerMode>

This command selects the way the R&S FSC displays the power of adjacent
channels.
The number of adjacent and alternate channels has to be greater than 0 for the
command to work.
Parameter
<PowerMode>
ABSolute shows the absolute power of all channels
RELative shows the power of adjacent and alternate channels in
relation to the transmission channel
Example
POW:ACH:MODE ABS
Shows absolute powers for all channels.
Characteristics
*RST value
SCPI: device-specific

[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:PRESet:RLEVel

This command adjusts the reference level to the measured signal power.
This automatic routine makes sure that the that the signal power level does not
overload the R&S FSC or limit the dynamic range by too small a S/N ratio.

Operating Manual 1173.0966.12 - 07 191

R&S FSC Remote Control – Commands
Remote Commands of the Spectrum Analyzer

To determine the best reference level, the R&S FSC aborts current measurements
and performs a series of test sweeps. After it has finished the test, it continues with
the actual measurement.
This command is an event and therefore has no *RST value and no query.
Example
POW:ACH:PRES:RLEV
Initiates an ACP measurement and adjusts the reference level.
Characteristics
*RST value: -
SCPI: device-specific

[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:REFerence:TXCHannel:AUTO <RefChannel>

This command automatically selects a reference channel for relative ACLR

measurements.
The number of transmission channels and adjacent / alternate channels has to be
greater than 0 for the command to work.
Parameter
<RefChannel>
MINimum transmission power with the lowest power
MAXimum transmission channel with the highest power
LHIGest lowest transmission channel for lower adjacent channels and
highest transmission channel for upper adjacent channels
Example
POW:ACH:REF:TXCH:AUTO MIN
Sets the TX channel with the lowest power as reference channel
Characteristics
*RST value
SCPI: device-specific

[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:REFerence:TXCHannel:MANual <RefChannel>

This command defines a reference channel for relative ACLR measurements.

The number of transmission channels and adjacent / alternate channels has to be
greater than 0 for the command to work.
Parameter
<RefChannel>
Numeric value from 1 to 12.
The actual value range depends on the number of active transmission channels.

Operating Manual 1173.0966.12 - 07 192

R&S FSC Remote Control – Commands
Remote Commands of the Spectrum Analyzer

Example
See [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:TXCHannel:COUNt <TxChannels>
Characteristics
*RST value: 1
SCPI: device-specific

[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:SPACing[:ACHannel]] <Spacing>

This command defines the spacing between the transmission channel and its
adjacent channel.
A change of the adjacent channel spacing causes a change in the spacing of all
alternate channels above the adjacent channel.
Parameter
<Spacing>
Numeric value in Hz.
Example
See [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:TXCHannel:COUNt <TxChannels>
Characteristics
*RST value: 14 kHz
SCPI: device-specific

[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:SPACing:ALTernate<y> <Spacing>

This command defines the spacing between alternate channels.

If you set the channel spacing for the first alternate channel, the R&S FSC sets the
bandwidth of the other alternate channels to the same value. The command works
hierarchically: to set a spacing of the 10th and 8th channel, you have to set the
spacing of the 8th channel first.
Parameter
<Spacing>
Numeric value in Hz.
Example
See [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:TXCHannel:COUNt <TxChannels>
Characteristics
*RST value: ALT1: 40 kHz; ALT2: 60 kHz; ALT3: 80 kHz etc.
SCPI: device-specific

Operating Manual 1173.0966.12 - 07 193

R&S FSC Remote Control – Commands
Remote Commands of the Spectrum Analyzer

[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:SPACing:CHANnel<Tx> <Spacing>

This command defines the spacing between transmission channels.

If you set the channel spacing for the first transmission channel, the R&S FSC sets
the bandwidth of the other transmission channels to the same value. The
command works hierarchically: to set a spacing between the 9th and 10th and 8th
th
and 9th channel, you have to set the spacing between the 8 and 9th channel first.
The suffix at CHANnel selects the transmission channel.
Parameter
<Spacing>
Numeric value in Hz.
Example
See [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:TXCHannel:COUNt <TxChannels>
Characteristics
*RST value: 20 kHz
SCPI: device-specific

[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:TXCHannel:COUNt <TxChannels>

This command defines the number of transmission channels.

The command is available for measurements with span > 0.
Parameter
<TxChannels>
Numeric value from 1 to 12.
Example
CALC:MARK:FUNC:POW:SEL CPOW
Selects the channel power measurement
POW:ACH:TXCH:COUN 2
Defines 2 transmission channels.
POW:ACH:ACP 2
Defines 2 pairs of neighboring channels to the left and right of the TX channel(s).
POW:ACH:SPAC:CHAN2 20KHZ
Defines a distance of 20 kHz between the first and the second Tx channel.
POW:ACH:BAND:CHAN2 120KHZ
Defines a bandwidth of 120 kHz for the second TX channel.
POW:ACH:REF:TXCH:MAN 2
Selects the second Tx channel as reference channel.
POW:ACH:SPAC 10KHZ
Defines a distance of 10 kHz from the TX channel to the adjacent channel.

Operating Manual 1173.0966.12 - 07 194

R&S FSC Remote Control – Commands
Remote Commands of the Spectrum Analyzer

POW:ACH:BAND:ACH 120KHZ
Defines a bandwidth of 120 kHz for the adjacent channel.
POW:ACH:SPAC:ALT 20KHZ
Defines a distance of 20 kHz from the adjacent to the first alternate channel.
POW:ACH:BAND:ALT 120KHZ
Defines a bandwidth of 120 kHz for the first alternate channel
Characteristics
*RST value: 1
SCPI: device-specific

ACLR Limit Check

The following commands configure and perform limit checks when measuring the
adjacent channel power.
The suffix <k> at LIMit is irrelevant.

List of commands
● CALCulate:LIMit<k>:ACPower[:STATe] <State> (p. 195)
● CALCulate:LIMit<k>:ACPower:ACHannel[:RELative] <Limit> (p. 196)
● CALCulate:LIMit<k>:ACPower:ACHannel[:RELative]:STATe <State> (p. 196)
● CALCulate:LIMit<k>:ACPower:ACHannel:ABSolute <Limit> (p. 197)
● CALCulate:LIMit<k>:ACPower:ACHannel:ABSolute:STATe <State> (p. 197)
● CALCulate:LIMit<k>:ACPower:ACHannel:RESult? (p. 197)
● CALCulate:LIMit<k>:ACPower:ALTernate<y>[:RELative] <Limit> (p. 198)
● CALCulate:LIMit<k>:ACPower:ALTernate<y>[:RELative]:STATe <State> (p. 198)
● CALCulate:LIMit<k>:ACPower:ALTernate<y>:ABSolute <Limit> (p. 199)
● CALCulate:LIMit<k>:ACPower:ALTernate<y>:ABSolute:STATe <State> (p. 199)
● CALCulate:LIMit<k>:ACPower:ALTernate<y>:RESult? (p. 200)

CALCulate:LIMit<k>:ACPower[:STATe] <State>

This command turns the limit check for ACLR measurements on and off.
You have to use
CALCulate:LIMit<k>:ACPower:ACHannel[:RELative]:STATe <State>
or CALCulate:LIMit<k>:ACPower:ALTernate<y>[:RELative]:STATe
<State> in combination with this command to select the channels the limit check
should be performed on.
Parameter
<State>
ON | OFF
Example
CALC:LIM:ACP ON
Activates the limit check

Operating Manual 1173.0966.12 - 07 195

R&S FSC Remote Control – Commands
Remote Commands of the Spectrum Analyzer

Characteristics
*RST value: OFF
SCPI: device-specific

CALCulate:LIMit<k>:ACPower:ACHannel[:RELative] <Limit>

This command defines the relative limit of the adjacent channels. The reference
value for the relative limit value is the measured channel power.
Note that the relative limit has no effect on the limit check if it is below the absolute
limit value (see CALCulate:LIMit<k>:ACPower:ACHannel:ABSolute
<Limit>). This mechanism allows automatic checking of the absolute basic
values of adjacent-channel power as defined in mobile radio standards.
Parameter
<Limit>
Numeric value in the range from 0 dB to 100 dB.
Example
CALC:LIM:ACP:ACH 30
Defines a limit of 30 dB.
Characteristics
*RST value: -
SCPI: device-specific

CALCulate:LIMit<k>:ACPower:ACHannel[:RELative]:STATe <State>

This command turns the relative limit check for the adjacent channels on and off.
You have to activate the general ACLR limit check before using this command with
CALCulate:LIMit<k>:ACPower[:STATe] <State> first.
Parameter
<State>
ON | OFF
Example
CALC:LIM:ACP:ACH:STAT ON
Activates the relative limit check.
Characteristics
*RST value: OFF
SCPI: device-specific

Operating Manual 1173.0966.12 - 07 196

R&S FSC Remote Control – Commands
Remote Commands of the Spectrum Analyzer

CALCulate:LIMit<k>:ACPower:ACHannel:ABSolute <Limit>

This command defines the absolute limit for the adjacent channels.
Note that the absolute limit has no effect on the limit check if it is below the relative
limit (see CALCulate:LIMit<k>:ACPower:ACHannel[:RELative]
<Limit>). This mechanism allows automatic checking of the absolute basic
values of adjacent-channel power as defined in mobile radio standards.
Parameter
<Limit>
Numeric value in the range from -200 dBm to 200 dBm.
Example
CALC:LIM:ACP:ACH:ABS -30
Sets the absolute limit to -30 dBm
Characteristics
*RST value: -
SCPI: device-specific

CALCulate:LIMit<k>:ACPower:ACHannel:ABSolute:STATe <State>

This command turns the absolute limit check for the adjacent channel on and off.
You have to activate the general ACLR limit check before using this command with
CALCulate:LIMit<k>:ACPower[:STATe] <State> first.
Parameter
<State>
ON | OFF
Example
CALC:LIM:ACP:ACH:ABS:STAT ON
Activates the absolute limit check.
Characteristics
*RST value: OFF
SCPI: device-specific

CALCulate:LIMit<k>:ACPower:ACHannel:RESult?

This command queries the result of the limit check of the adjacent channels.
To get a valid result, you have to perform a complete sweep with synchronization
to the sweep end before reading out the result. This is only possible in single
sweep mode.
This command is a query and therefore has no *RST value.

Operating Manual 1173.0966.12 - 07 197

R&S FSC Remote Control – Commands
Remote Commands of the Spectrum Analyzer

Return value
The return value consists of two values, one for the lower and one for the upper
adjacent channel.
FAILed limit check failed
PASSed limit check passed
Example
CALC:LIM:ACP:ACH:RES?
Queries the limit check results. The command would return, e.g.
FAILED,FAILED
Upper and lower adjacent channels violate a limit.
Characteristics
*RST value: -
SCPI: device-specific

CALCulate:LIMit<k>:ACPower:ALTernate<y>[:RELative] <Limit>

This command defines the relative limit of the alternate channels. The reference
value for the relative limit value is the measured channel power.
Note that the relative limit has no effect on the limit check if it is below the absolute
limit value (see CALCulate:LIMit<k>:ACPower:ALTernate<y>:ABSolute
<Limit>). This mechanism allows automatic checking of the absolute basic
values of adjacent-channel power as defined in mobile radio standards.
Parameter
<Limit>
Numeric value in the range from 0 dB to 100 dB.
Example
CALC:LIM:ACP:ALT3 30
Defines a limit of 30 dB for the third alternate channel.
Characteristics
*RST value: -
SCPI: device-specific

CALCulate:LIMit<k>:ACPower:ALTernate<y>[:RELative]:STATe <State>

This command turns the relative limit check for an alternate channels on and off.
You have to activate the general ACLR limit check before using this command with
CALCulate:LIMit<k>:ACPower[:STATe] <State> first.
Parameter
<State>
ON | OFF

Operating Manual 1173.0966.12 - 07 198

R&S FSC Remote Control – Commands
Remote Commands of the Spectrum Analyzer

Example
CALC:LIM:ACP:ALT3:STAT ON
Activates the relative limit check for the third alternate channel.
Characteristics
*RST value: OFF
SCPI: device-specific

CALCulate:LIMit<k>:ACPower:ALTernate<y>:ABSolute <Limit>

This command defines the absolute limit for the alternate channels.
Note that the absolute limit has no effect on the limit check if it is below the relative
limit (see CALCulate:LIMit<k>:ACPower:ALTernate<y>[:RELative]
<Limit>). This mechanism allows automatic checking of the absolute basic
values of adjacent-channel power as defined in mobile radio standards.
Parameters
<Limit>
Numeric value in the range from -200 dBm to 200 dBm.
Example
CALC:LIM:ACP:ALT3:ABS -30
Sets the absolute limit to -30 dBm for the third alternate channel.
Characteristics
*RST value: -
SCPI: device-specific

CALCulate:LIMit<k>:ACPower:ALTernate<y>:ABSolute:STATe <State>

This command turns the absolute limit check for an alternate channel on and off.
You have to activate the general ACLR limit check before using this command with
CALCulate:LIMit<k>:ACPower[:STATe] <State> first.
Parameter
<State>
ON | OFF
Example
CALC:LIM:ACP:ALT3:ABS:STAT ON
Activates the absolute limit check for the third alternate channel.
Characteristics
*RST value: OFF
SCPI: device-specific

Operating Manual 1173.0966.12 - 07 199

R&S FSC Remote Control – Commands
Remote Commands of the Spectrum Analyzer

CALCulate:LIMit<k>:ACPower:ALTernate<y>:RESult?

This command queries the result of the limit check of the alternate channels.
To get a valid result, you have to perform a complete sweep with synchronization
to the sweep end before reading out the result. This is only possible in single
sweep mode.
This command is a query and therefore has no *RST value.
Return value
The return value consists of two values, one for the lower and one for the upper
alternate channel.
FAILed limit check failed
PASSed limit check passed
Example
CALC:LIM:ACP:ALT2:RES?
Queries the limit check results for the second alternate channels. The command
would return, e.g.
FAILED,FAILED
Upper and lower alternate channels violate a limit.
Characteristics
*RST value: -
SCPI: device-specific

8.2.8.7 Measuring the Harmonic Distortion

The following commands configure Harmonic Distortion measurements. To perform the

actual measurement, use the commands described in section "Performing and
Triggering Measurements".
The numeric suffixes <n> and <m> at CALCulate and MARKer are irrelevant.

List of commands
● CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:HARMonics[:STATe] <State> (p. 201)
● CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:HARMonics:DISTortion? (p. 201)
● CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:HARMonics:LIST? (p. 201)
● CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:HARMonics:NHARmonics <Harmonics>
(p. 202)
● CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:HARMonics:PRESet (p. 202)

Operating Manual 1173.0966.12 - 07 200

R&S FSC Remote Control – Commands
Remote Commands of the Spectrum Analyzer

CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:HARMonics[:STATe] <State>

This command turns the harmonic distortion measurement on and off.

Parameter
<State>
ON | OFF
Example
See CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:HARMonics:PRESet.
Characteristics
*RST value: OFF
SCPI: device-specific

CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:HARMonics:DISTortion? TOTal

This command queries the total harmonic distortion of the signal.

To get a valid result, you have to perform a complete sweep with synchronization
to the sweep end before reading out the result. This is only possible in single
sweep mode.
This command is a query and therefore has no *RST value.
Parameter
TOTal
Return value
<Distortion%>,<DistortiondB>
Pair of values, one showing the THD in %, one in dB.
Example
See CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:HARMonics:PRESet.
Characteristics
*RST value: -
SCPI: device-specific

CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:HARMonics:LIST?

This command queries the position of the harmonics.

To get a valid result, you should perform a complete sweep in single sweep mode
before querying the results.
This command is a query and therefore has no *RST value.
Return value
Returns one value for every harmonic.

Operating Manual 1173.0966.12 - 07 201

R&S FSC Remote Control – Commands
Remote Commands of the Spectrum Analyzer

The first value is the absolute power of the first harmonic. The level unit depends
on the unit you have set with the UNIT:POWer command. The other values are
power levels relative to the first harmonic. The unit for these is dB.
The total number of return values depends on the number of harmonics you have
set with CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:HARMonics:NHARmonics
<Harmonics>.
Example
See CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:HARMonics:PRESet.
Characteristics
*RST value: -
SCPI: device-specific

CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:HARMonics:NHARmonics <Harmonics>

This command sets the number of harmonics. The valid range is from 1 to 6
harmonics.
Parameter
<Harmonics>
Numeric value in the range from 1 to 6.
Example
See CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:HARMonics:PRESet.
Characteristics
*RST value: 2
SCPI: device-specific

CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:HARMonics:PRESet

This command optimizes the settings for the harmonic distortion measurement.
This command is an event and therefore has no query and no *RST value.
Example
CALC:MARK:FUNC:HARM ON
Activates the harmonic distortion measurement.
CALC:MARK:FUNC:HARM:NHAR 4
Sets the number of harmonics to 4.
CALC:MARK:FUNC:HARM:PRES
Adjusts the settings of the measurement.
CALC:MARK:FUNC:HARM:LIST?
CALC:MARK:FUNC:HARM:DIST? TOT
Queries the position of the harmonics and the total harmonic distortion.
Characteristics
*RST value: -
SCPI: device-specific

Operating Manual 1173.0966.12 - 07 202

R&S FSC Remote Control – Commands
Remote Commands of the Spectrum Analyzer

8.2.8.8 Measuring the AM Modulation Depth

The following commands configure AM Modulation Depth measurements. To perform

the actual measurement, use the commands described in section "Performing and
Triggering Measurements".
The numeric suffixes <n> and <m> at CALCulate and MARKer are irrelevant.

List of commands
● CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:MDEPth[:STATe] <State> (p. 203)
● CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:MDEPth:RESult? (p. 203)

CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:MDEPth[:STATe] <State>

This command turns the AM Modulation Depth measurement on and off.

The numeric suffixes at CALCulate and MARKer are irrelevant.
Parameter
<State>
ON | OFF
Example
CALC:MARK:FUNC:MDEP ON
Activates the harmonic distortion measurement.
Characteristics
*RST value: OFF
SCPI: device-specific

CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:MDEPth:RESult?

This command queries the results of the AM modulation depth measurement.

This command is a query and therefore has no *RST value.
Return value
<ModulationDepth>
Modulation depth in %.
Example
CALC:MARK:FUNC:MDEP:RES?
Queries the AM modulation depth.
Characteristics
*RST value: -
SCPI: device-specific

Operating Manual 1173.0966.12 - 07 203

R&S FSC Remote Control – Commands
Remote Commands of the Spectrum Analyzer

8.2.8.9 Measuring the Spectrum Emission Mask

The following commands configure Spectrum Emission Mask (SEM) measurements.

To perform the actual measurement, use the commands described in section
"Performing and Triggering Measurements".

List of commands
● [SENSe:]ESPectrum:PRESet[:STANdard] <Standard> (p. 204)
● [SENSe:]ESPectrum:PRESet:SETTings (p. 204)
● [SENSe:]SWEep:MODE <State> (p. 205)

[SENSe:]ESPectrum:PRESet[:STANdard] <Standard>

This command loads one of the predefined spectrum emission masks for a
telecommunications standard.
Parameter
<Standard>
String containing the file name of the spectrum emission mask.
Example
ESP:PRES 'W-CDMA 3GPP.semstd'
Loads the SEM for 3GPP WCDMA.
Characteristics
*RST value: -
SCPI: device-specific

[SENSe:]ESPectrum:PRESet:SETTings ONCE

This command optimizes the settings for the SEM measurement.

This command is an event and therefore has no query and no *RST value.
Parameter
ONCE
Example
ESP:PRES:SET ONCE
Initializes an adjustment of the settings.
Characteristics
*RST value: -
SCPI: device-specific

Operating Manual 1173.0966.12 - 07 204

R&S FSC Remote Control – Commands
Remote Commands of the Spectrum Analyzer

[SENSe:]SWEep:MODE <State>

This command turns the spectrum emission mask measurement on and off.
Parameter
AUTO turns on spectrum mode
ESPectrum turns on SEM measurements
LIST turns on spurious emission measurements
Example
SWE:MODE ESP
Starts the SEM measurement.
Characteristics
*RST value: AUTO
SCPI: device-specific

Operating Manual 1173.0966.12 - 07 205

R&S FSC Remote Control – Commands
Remote Commands of the Network Analyzer Mode

8.3 Remote Commands of the Network Analyzer Mode

The chapter provides information on remote commands that configure and perform
two-port measurements with the tracking generator. These commands are available in
network analyzer mode only.

Contents
Configuring the Horizontal Axis on page 206
Configuring the Vertical Axis on page 206
Setting the Bandwidths on page 209
Performing and Triggering the Measurement on page 209
Working with Traces on page 209
Using Markers and Deltamarkers on page 210
Configuring the Measurement on page 214

8.3.1 Configuring the Horizontal Axis

The following commands configure the horizontal axis of the active display.

List of commands
● [SENSe:]FREQuency:CENTer <Frequency> (p. 135)
● [SENSe:]FREQuency:CENTer:STEP <StepSize> (p. 136)
● [SENSe:]FREQuency:CENTer:STEP:LINK <StepSizeCoupling> (p. 136)
● [SENSe:]FREQuency:SPAN <Span> (p. 138)
● [SENSe:]FREQuency:SPAN:FULL (p. 139)
● [SENSe:]FREQuency:STARt <StartFrequency> (p. 139)
● [SENSe:]FREQuency:STOP <StopFrequency> (p. 139)
For a detailed description of the commands refer to "Configuring the Horizontal Axis" in
spectrum mode.

8.3.2 Configuring the Vertical Axis

The following commands configure the level axis (y-axis) and level parameters of the
active display.
The suffix <n> at DISPlay is irrelevant.

List of commands
● DISPlay<n>:MAGNitude:REFerence <RefValue> (p. 207)
● DISPlay<n>:MAGNitude:REFerence:POSition <RefPosition> (p. 207)
● DISPlay<n>:MAGNitude:Y:SCALe <DisplayRange> (p. 207)
● DISPlay<n>:MAGNitude:Y:SPACing <Scaling> (p. 208)
● INPut:ATTenuation <Attenuation> (p. 143)
● INPut:ATTenuation:AUTO <State> (p. 143)
● INPut:ATTenuation:MODE <AttenuationMode> (p. 143)
● INPut:IMPedance <Impedance> (p. 144)

Operating Manual 1173.0966.12 - 07 206

R&S FSC Remote Control – Commands
Remote Commands of the Network Analyzer Mode

● SOURce:TG:ATTenuation <TGAttenuation> (p. 208)

● UNIT:POWer <Unit> (p. 145)
For a detailed description of commands not described below refer to "Configuring the
Vertical Axis" in spectrum analyzer mode.

DISPlay<n>:MAGNitude:REFerence <RefValue>

This command sets the reference value for the magnitude measurement format.
Parameter
<RefValue>
Numeric value in the range from -80 dB to 30 dB.
Example
DISP:MAGN:REF -10
Sets the reference level to -10 dB
Characteristics
*RST value: 0 dB
SCPI: device-specific

DISPlay<n>:MAGNitude:REFerence:POSition <RefPosition>

This command defines the position of the reference value on the display for the
magnitude measurement format.
Each step shifts the reference position one grid line up or down.
Parameter
<RefPosition>
Numeric value in the range from 0 to 10.
Example
DISP:MAGN:REF:POS 5
Sets the reference to the center of the display (i.e. the fifth grid line from the
bottom).
Characteristics
*RST value: 10
SCPI: device-specific

DISPlay<n>:MAGNitude:Y:SCALe <DisplayRange>

This command defines the display range of the vertical axis for the magnitude
measurement format.
Note that you have to set a logarithmic scaling before you can use this command
with DISPlay<n>:MAGNitude:Y:SPACing <Scaling>.

Operating Manual 1173.0966.12 - 07 207

R&S FSC Remote Control – Commands
Remote Commands of the Network Analyzer Mode

Parameter
<DisplayRange>
Numeric value in the range from 1 dB to 150 dB.
The number you enter is rounded up to the next possible display range. For
example, if you enter 9, the R&S FSC automatically sets the display range to 10.
Example
DISP:MAGN:Y:SCAL 50 DB
Sets the display range of the y-axis to 50 dB
Characteristics
*RST value: 100 dB
SCPI: device-specific

DISPlay<n>:MAGNitude:Y:SPACing <Scaling>

This command selects the scaling of the vertical axis for the magnitude
measurement format.
Parameter
<Scaling>
LOGarithmic logarithmic scaling (dB)
LINear linear scaling (%)
Example
DISP:MAGN:Y:SPAC LIN
Switches the y-axis to linear scaling
Characteristics
*RST value: LOGarithmic
SCPI: device-specific

SOURce:TG:ATTenuation <TGAttenuation>

This command sets the output level of the tracking generator.

Parameter
<TGAttenuation>
Numeric value in the range from 0 to 50 dB.
Entering an output level of, e.g., 20 dB results in an output level of -20 dBm.
Example
SOUR:TG:ATT 50
Sets the attenuation to 50 dB and therefore an output level of –50 dBm

Operating Manual 1173.0966.12 - 07 208

R&S FSC Remote Control – Commands
Remote Commands of the Network Analyzer Mode

Characteristics
*RST value: 0 dB
SCPI: device-specific

8.3.3 Setting the Bandwidths

The following commands configure the filter bandwidths of the R&S FSC. Note that
both groups of commands (BANDwidth and BWIDth) are the same.

List of commands
● [SENSe:]BANDwidth|BWIDth[:RESolution] <ResBW> (p. 146)
● [SENSe:]BANDwidth|BWIDth[:RESolution]:AUTO <State> (p. 147)
For a detailed description of commands refer to "Setting the Bandwidths" in spectrum
analyzer mode.

8.3.4 Performing and Triggering the Measurement

The following commands configure the sweep.

List of commands
● *WAI (p. 134)
● ABORt (p. 148)
● INITiate[:IMMediate] (p. 148)
● INITiate:CONTinuous <SweepMode> (p. 149)
● [SENSe:]SWEep:COUNt <SweepCount> (p. 149)
● [SENSe:]SWEep:POINts? (p. 150)
● [SENSe:]SWEep:TIME <SweepTime> (p. 150)
● [SENSe:]SWEep:TIME:AUTO <State> (p. 150)
● TRIGger[:SEQuence]:HOLDoff[:TIME] <TriggerDelay> (p. 152)
● TRIGger[:SEQuence]:SLOPe <TriggerSlope> (p. 153)
● TRIGger[:SEQuence]:SOURce <TriggerSource> (p. 154)
For a detailed description of commands refer to "Performing and Triggering
Measurements" in spectrum analyzer mode.

8.3.5 Working with Traces

The following commands set up the trace and the various functions associated with it,
e.g. the selection of the detector.

List of commands
● DISPlay[:WINDow]:TRACe<t>:MEMory[:STATe] <State> (p. 156)
● DISPlay[:WINDow]:TRACe<t>:MODE <TraceMode> (p. 156)
● FORMat[:DATA] <DataFormat> (p. 158)
● FORMat:BORDer <ByteOrder> (p. 157)

Operating Manual 1173.0966.12 - 07 209

R&S FSC Remote Control – Commands
Remote Commands of the Network Analyzer Mode

● [SENSe:]DETector<t>[:FUNCtion] <Detector> (p. 157)

● [SENSe:]DETector<t>[:FUNCtion]:AUTO <State> (p. 157)
● TRACe[:DATA]? (p. 210)
For a detailed description of commands not described here refer to "Working with
Traces" in spectrum analyzer mode.

TRACe[:DATA]?

This command reads out the trace data of the current measurement.
With the FORMat[:DATA] <DataFormat> command, you can set the data
format.
Parameter
The available parameters depend on the format of the result display.
Display of one S-parameter
TRACE1 queries the data of the currently displayed data
Return value
The R&S FSC returns 631 values. Each value corresponds to one pixel of a trace.
The result and unit depends on the measurement format.
Example
TRAC:DATA? TRACE1
Reads out the data for trace 1.
Characteristics
*RST value: -
SCPI: conform

8.3.6 Using Markers and Deltamarkers

8.3.6.1 Markers and Deltamarkers

The following commands are for setting and controlling markers and deltamarkers. If
not otherwise noted, the numeric suffix <1...6> at MARKer or DELTamarker select the
marker to be controlled.
The suffix <n> at CALCulate selects the measurement screen in dual trace mode and
is in the range <1…2>.
The suffix <m> at MARKer selects the marker and is in the range <1…6>.

List of commands
● CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>[:STATe] <State> (p. 160)
● CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:AOFF (p. 160)
● CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:MAXimum[:PEAK] (p. 160)

Operating Manual 1173.0966.12 - 07 210

R&S FSC Remote Control – Commands
Remote Commands of the Network Analyzer Mode

● CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:MAXimum:NEXT (p. 161)

● CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:MINimum[:PEAK] (p. 161)
● CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:X <Coordinate> (p. 161)
● CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:X:RELative <Distance> (p. 162)
● CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:Y? (p. 162)
● CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>[:STATe] <State> (p. 163)
● CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:AOFF (p. 163)
● CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:MAXimum[:PEAK] (p. 164)
● CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:MAXimum:NEXT (p. 164)
● CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:MINimum[:PEAK] (p. 164)
● CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:X <Coordinate> (p. 165)
● CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:X:SLIMits[:STATe] <State> (p. 165)
● CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:X:SLIMits:LEFT <SearchLimit> (p. 166)
● CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:X:SLIMits:RIGHt <Searchlimit> (p. 166)
● CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:Y? (p. 211)
For a detailed description of commands not described below refer to "Using Markers"
in spectrum analyzer mode.

CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:Y?

This command queries the measurement results at the marker position.

If necessary, the corresponding marker is activated first.
To get a valid result, you have to perform a complete sweep with synchronization
to the sweep end between activating the delta marker and reading out the result.
This is only possible in single sweep mode.
Return value
NORMal <value> = trace value
Example
INIT:CONT OFF
CALC:MARK2 ON
Turns on single sweep mode and marker 2.
INIT;*WAI
CALC:MARK2:Y?
Performs a measurement and queries the marker position.
Characteristics
*RST value: –
SCPI: device–specific

Operating Manual 1173.0966.12 - 07 211

R&S FSC Remote Control – Commands
Remote Commands of the Network Analyzer Mode

8.3.6.2 Marker Functions

The following commands perform various kinds of analysis at the marker position.
The suffix <n> at DISPlay selects the measurement screen in dual trace mode and is
in the range <1…2>.

List of commands
● DISPlay<n>:IMPedance:REFerence:POSition <Impedance> (p. 212)
● DISPlay<n>:ZOOM:AREA[:STAT] <State> (p. 212)
● DISPlay<n>:ZOOM:FACTor <ZoomFactor> (p. 213)
● DISPlay<n>:ZOOM:X <HorizShift> (p. 213)
● DISPlay<n>:ZOOM:Y <VerticalShift> (p. 213)

DISPlay<n>:IMPedance:REFerence:POSition <Impedance>

This command sets the reference impedance for the smith chart measurement
format. The impedance can be between 1mΩ and 10 kΩ.
Parameter
<Impedance>
Numeric value in the rnage from 1 mΩ to 10 kΩ.
Example
DISP:IMP:REF:POS 75 OHM
Sets the reference impedance to 75 Ohm.
Characteristics
*RST value: 50
SCPI: device-specific

DISPlay<n>:ZOOM:AREA[:STAT] <State>

This command turns the marker zoom function in a Smith chart on and off.
Parameter
<State>
ON | OFF
Example
DISP:ZOOM:AREA ON
Activates the marker zoom function.
Characteristics
*RST value: OFF
SCPI: device-specific

Operating Manual 1173.0966.12 - 07 212

R&S FSC Remote Control – Commands
Remote Commands of the Network Analyzer Mode

DISPlay<n>:ZOOM:FACTor <ZoomFactor>

This command sets the zoom factor of the marker zoom function in a Smith chart.
Parameter
<ZoomFactor>
2|4|8
Example
DISP:ZOOM:FACT 4
Sets the zoom factor to 4
Characteristics
*RST value: -
SCPI: device-specific

DISPlay<n>:ZOOM:X <HorizShift>

This command shifts the zoom window horizontally in the Smith chart.
'0%' marks the center on the horizontal axis.
Parameter
<HorizShift>
Numeric value in the range from -50 % to 50 %.
Example
DISP:ZOOM:X 10
Shift the zoom window 10% to the right.
Characteristics
*RST value: 0
SCPI: device-specific

DISPlay<n>:ZOOM:Y <VerticalShift>

This command shifts the zoom window vertically in the Smith chart.
'0%' marks the center on the vertical axis.
Parameter
<VerticalShift>
Numeric value in the range from -50 % to 50 %.
Example
DISP:ZOOM:Y -25
Shifts the zoom window 25% down.
Characteristics
*RST value: 0
SCPI: device-specific

Operating Manual 1173.0966.12 - 07 213

R&S FSC Remote Control – Commands
Remote Commands of the Network Analyzer Mode

8.3.7 Configuring the Measurement

This chapter provides information on how to configure two-port measurements with the
tracking generator. The structure follows the order of the actual operation sequence
used when performing a measurement:
● Calibrating the Measurement on page 214
To perform the actual measurement, use the commands described in section
"Performing and Triggering the Measurement".

Commands independent of the operating mode

Note that some of the commands for configuring two-port measurements are also valid
for other operating modes. If a command is available in another mode, it is indicated by
the list in the respective section.

8.3.7.1 Calibrating the Measurement

The following commands query and control calibration for two-port measurements.

List of commands
● CALibration:MODE? (p. 214)
● CALibration:STATus? (p. 215)
The suffix <p> selects the measurement port. It is in the range <1…2>.

CALibration:MODE?

This command queries if the current measurement is calibrated.

This command is a query and therefore has no *RST value.
Return value
0 not calibrated
1 calibrated
Example
CAL:MODE?
Queries the calibration state.
Characteristics
*RST value: -
SCPI: device-specific

Operating Manual 1173.0966.12 - 07 214

R&S FSC Remote Control – Commands
Remote Commands of the Network Analyzer Mode

CALibration:STATus?

This command queries if the R&S FSC is fully calibrated for the current
measurement.
This command is a query and therefore has no *RST value.
Return value
NORMalized full factory or user calibration
APPRoximate approximate calibration: measurement uncertainty must be
anticipated
Example
CAL:STAT?
Queries the calibration status of the R&S FSC.
Characteristics
*RST value: -
SCPI: device-specific

Operating Manual 1173.0966.12 - 07 215

R&S FSC Remote Control – Commands
Remote Commands of the Power Meter

8.4 Remote Commands of the Power Meter

The chapter provides information on remote commands that configure and perform
power measurements with the power sensor. These commands are available in power
meter mode only.

Availability of remote commands for Power Sensor measurements

Note that the listed remote commands take effect only if a power sensor is connected.

8.4.1 Setting the Frequency

The following chapter describes commands necessary to define frequency settings.

List of commands
● [SENSe:]PMETer:FREQuency <Frequency> (p. 216)

[SENSe:]PMETer:FREQuency <Frequency>

This command sets the frequency of the power sensor.

Parameter
<Frequency>
Numeric value in Hz.
The available value range is specified in the data sheet.
Example
PMET:FREQ 500 MHZ
Sets the power sensor's frequency to 500 MHz
Characteristics
*RST value: -
SCPI: device-specific

8.4.2 Configuring Power Level Readout

The following chapter describes commands that configure the power level readout.

List of commands
● CALCulate:PMETer:RELative[:MAGNitude] <RefValue> (p. 217)
● CALCulate:PMETer:RELative[:MAGNitude]:AUTO (p. 217)
● CALCulate:PMETer:RELative[:MAGNitude]:OFFSet <Offset> (p. 217)
● UNIT<z>:PMETer:POWer <Unit> (p. 218)

Operating Manual 1173.0966.12 - 07 216

R&S FSC Remote Control – Commands
Remote Commands of the Power Meter

CALCulate:PMETer:RELative[:MAGNitude] <RefValue>

This command sets the reference value for relative measurements.

Parameter
<RefValue>
Numeric value in dBm.
Example
CALC:PMET:REL 30
The the reference value to 30 dBm.
Characteristics
*RST value: -
SCPI: device-specific

CALCulate:PMETer:RELative[:MAGNitude]:AUTO ONCE

This command sets the current measurement result as the reference level for
relative measurements.
This command is an event and therefore has no *RST value and no query.
Parameter
ONCE
Example
CALC:PMET:REL ONCE
Characteristics
*RST value: -
SCPI: device-specific

CALCulate:PMETer:RELative[:MAGNitude]:OFFSet <Offset>

This command sets an offset for the reference value.

Parameter
<Offset>
Numeric value in dB.
Example
CALC:PMET:REL -10
Characteristics
*RST value: -
SCPI: device-specific

Operating Manual 1173.0966.12 - 07 217

R&S FSC Remote Control – Commands
Remote Commands of the Power Meter

UNIT<z>:PMETer:POWer <Unit>

This command selects the unit of the power sensor.

The suffix <z>at UNIT has the following effects:
Unit 1 Power unit
Unit 2 not available.
Parameter
<Unit>
DBM | WATT | W | DB | VSWR
Note on the parameter DB: when applied to UNIT1, the power is relative to the
reference level, when applied to UNIT2, the return loss is displayed.
Note on the parameter VSWR: the parameter is only available if applied to UNIT2.
Example
UNIT1:PMET:POW DBM
Sets the unit to dBm.
Characteristics
*RST value: -
SCPI: device-specific

8.4.3 Performing Measurements with the Power Sensor

The following chapter describes all commands that are available for performing power
measurements with the power sensor.
● CALibration:PMETer:ZERO:AUTO (p. 218)
● FETCh<z>:PMETer? (p. 219)

8.4.3.1 Zeroing of the Power Sensor

CALibration:PMETer:ZERO:AUTO ONCE

This commands starts to zero the power sensor.

This command is an event and therefore has no *RST value and no query.
Parameter
ONCE
Example
CAL:PMET:ZERO:AUTO ONCE
Starts to zero the power meter.

Operating Manual 1173.0966.12 - 07 218

R&S FSC Remote Control – Commands
Remote Commands of the Power Meter

Characteristics
*RST value: -
SCPI: device-specific

8.4.3.2 Reading Out Measurement Results

FETCh<z>:PMETer?

This command queries the results of measurements with the power sensor.
Return value

FETC1:PMET? power in dBm

FETC2:PMET? n/a
Example
FETC2:PMET?
Returns nothing.
Characteristics
*RST value: -
SCPI: device-specific

Operating Manual 1173.0966.12 - 07 219

R&S FSC Remote Control – Commands
File Management

8.5 File Management

The following commands perform various tasks in the context of file management.
These commands are independent from the operating mode.

List of commands
● MMEMory:CATalog? (p. 220)
● MMEMory:CATalog:DIRectories? (p. 221)
● MMEMory:CDIRectory <Directory> (p. 221)
● MMEMory:COPY <SourceFile>,<DestinationFile> (p. 221)
● MMEMory:DATA <FileName>[,<BlockData>] (p. 222)
● MMEMory:DELete <File> (p. 223)
● MMEMory:FILE <File> (p. 223)
● MMEMory:FILE:DATE <FileName>,<Date> (p. 223)
● MMEMory:FILE:TIME <FileName>,<Time> (p. 224)
● MMEMory:INIT (p. 224)
● MMEMory:LOAD:STATe 1,<FileName> (p. 225)
● MMEMory:MDIRectory <Directory> (p. 225)
● MMEMory:MOVE <SourceFile>,<NewFileName> (p. 225)
● MMEMory:RDIRectory <Directory> (p. 226)
● MMEMory:STORe:STATe 1,<FileName> (p. 226)

MMEMory:CATalog?

This command queries the files of the current directory.

You can select directories with MMEMory:CDIRectory <Directory>.
This command is a query and therefore has no *RST value.
Return value
<UsedDiskSpace>,<FreeDiskSpace>,<FileName_1>,<SizeFile_1><Modification
DateFile_1>,<ModificationTimeFile_1>,…,<FileName_n>,<SizeFile_n>
<ModificationDateFile_n>, <ModificationTimeFile_n>
Example
MMEM:CDIR '\Public\Limit Lines'
Opens directory 'Limit Lines'
MMEM:CAT?
Returns all files in \Public\Limit Lines
Characteristics
*RST value: -
SCPI: conform

Operating Manual 1173.0966.12 - 07 220

R&S FSC Remote Control – Commands
File Management

MMEMory:CATalog:DIRectories?

This command queries the directories of the current directory.

This command is a query and therefore has no *RST value.
Return value
<UsedMemory>,<FreeMemory>,<DirName_1>,<ModificationDateDir_1>,
<ModificationTimeDir_1>,…,<DirName_n>,<ModificationDateDir_n>,
<ModificationTimeDir_n>
Example
MMEM:CDIR '\Public'
Opens directory \Public.
MMEM:CAT:DIR?
Returns all directories in the \Public directory
Characteristics
*RST value: -
SCPI: device-specific

MMEMory:CDIRectory <Directory>

This command changes the current directory.

Parameter
<Directory>
String containing the path to another directory.
Example
MMEM:CDIR '\Public'
Opens directory \Public.
Characteristics
*RST value: -
SCPI: conform

MMEMory:COPY <SourceFile>,<DestinationFile>

This command copies one or more files to another directory.

This command is an event and therefore has no *RST value and no query.
Parameter
<SourceFile>
String containing the path and file name of the source file.
<DestinationFile>
String containing the path and name of the destination file.

Operating Manual 1173.0966.12 - 07 221

R&S FSC Remote Control – Commands
File Management

Example
MMEM:COPY '\Public\Standards\cdmaOne.obwstd','\USB\cdma.std'
Copies the cdmaOne standard file to a memory stick.
Characteristics
*RST value: -
SCPI: conform

MMEMory:DATA <FileName>[,<BlockData>]

This command writes block data into a file. The delimiter must be set to EOI to
obtain error-free data transfer.
When you query the contents of a file, you can save them in a file on the remote
control computer.
The command is useful for reading stored settings files or trace data from the
instrument or for transferring them to the instrument.
Parameter
<FileName>
String containing the path and file name.
<BlockData>
Data block with the structure
# hash sign
<number> length of the length information
<number> length information of the binary data (number of bytes)
<data> binary data with the indicated number of bytes
Example
MMEM:NAME '\Public\User\Testfile.txt'
Creates a new file called 'Testfile.txt'.
MMEM:DATA '\Public\User\Testfile.txt',#220Contents of the
file
The parameter mean:
- '\Public\...' selects the target file
- #2: hash sign and length of the length information (20 bytes = 2 digits)
- 20: indicates the number of subsequent binary data bytes
- Contents of the file: store 20 binary bytes (characters) to the file
MMEM:DATA? '\Public\User\Testfile.txt'
Transfers the contents of the file 'Testfile.txt' to the control computer.
Characteristics
*RST value: -
SCPI: conform

Operating Manual 1173.0966.12 - 07 222

R&S FSC Remote Control – Commands
File Management

MMEMory:DELete <File>

This command deletes a file.

Parameter
<File>
String containing the path and file name of the file to delete.
Example
MMEM:DEL '\Public\Screen Shots\Screen0001.png'
Deletes the file Screen0001.png.
Characteristics
*RST value: -
SCPI: conform

MMEMory:FILE <File>

This command creates a file.

Parameter
<File>
String containing the file name.
Example
MMEM:FILE 'TEST.TXT'
Creates the file TEST.TXT
Characteristics
*RST value: -
SCPI: conform

MMEMory:FILE:DATE <FileName>,<Date>

This command sets the date of a file.

Parameter
<FileName>
String containing the path and file name.
<Date>
Numeric values indicating the date
You have to enter the date as comma separated values after the string with the file
name. The sequence is year,month,day.
The available value range is 1980...2099, 1...12, 1...31
Example
MMEM:FILE:DATE '\Public\Screen
Shots\Screen0001.png',2006,04,01
Sets the date to April, 1st, 2006.

Operating Manual 1173.0966.12 - 07 223

R&S FSC Remote Control – Commands
File Management

MMEM:FILE:DATE? '\Public\Screen Shots\Screen0001.png'

Returns the modification date of the file Screen0001.png.
Characteristics
*RST value: -
SCPI: conform

MMEMory:FILE:TIME <FileName>,<Time>

This command sets the time of a file. The sequence of entry is hour, minute,
second.
Parameter
<FileName>
String containing the path and file name.
<Time>
Numeric values indicating the time.
You have to enter the time as comma separated values after the string with the file
name. The sequence is hour,minute,second.
The available value range is 0...23, 0...59, 0...59.
Example
MMEM:FILE:TIME '\Public\Screen Shots\Screen0006.png',11,04,00
Sets the time to 11:04:00
Characteristics
*RST value: -
SCPI: conform

MMEMory:INIT

This command formats the indicated drive.

Note
Formatting deletes all data stored on the memory drive.
This command is an event and therefore has no *RST value and no query.
Example:
MMEM:INIT
Formats and deletes all data from the drive.
Characteristics:
*RST value: -
SCPI: conform

Operating Manual 1173.0966.12 - 07 224

R&S FSC Remote Control – Commands
File Management

MMEMory:LOAD:STATe 1,<FileName>

This command loads the settings from a *.set file.

Parameter
<FileName>
String containing the path and file name.
Example
MMEM:LOAD:STAT 1,'\Public\Datasets\Dataset001.set'
Loads the settings from the file Dataset001.
Characteristics
*RST value: -
SCPI: conform

MMEMory:MDIRectory <Directory>

This command creates a new directory.

This command is an event and therefore has no *RST value and no query.
Parameter
<Directory>
String containing the path and new directory name.
Example
MMEM:MDIR '\Public\USER'
Creates the a directory called 'User'
Characteristics
*RST value: -
SCPI: device-specific

MMEMory:MOVE <SourceFile>,<NewFileName>

This command renames files, if <file_destination> contains no path. Otherwise the

file is moved to the indicated path and stored under the file name specified there.
This command is an event and therefore has no *RST value and no query.
Parameter
<SourceFile>
String containing the path and file name of the source file.
<DestinationFile>
String containing the path and name of the destination file.
Example
MMEM:MOVE '\Public\Screen
Shots\Screen0002.png','\Public\Screen Shots\Screen0001.png'
Renames Screen0002.png to Screen0001.png

Operating Manual 1173.0966.12 - 07 225

R&S FSC Remote Control – Commands
File Management

MMEM:MOVE '\Public\Screen
Shots\Screen0001.png','\Public\Test\Pic1.png'
Moves file Screen0006.png to the 'Test' folder and renames the file Pic1.png
Characteristics
*RST value: -
SCPI: conform

MMEMory:RDIRectory <Directory>

This command deletes the indicated directory. The directory name includes the
path and may also include the drive name. The path name complies with DOS
conventions.
This command is an event and therefore has no *RST value and no query.
Parameter
<Directory>
String containing the path of the directory to delete.
Example
MMEM:RDIR '\Public\Screen Shots\
Deletes the directory 'Screen Shots'.
Characteristics
*RST value: -
SCPI: device-specific

MMEMory:STORe:STATe 1,<FileName>

This command stores the current device settings in a *set file.

This command is an event and therefore has no *RST value and no query.
Parameter
1,<FileName>
String containing the path and name of the destination file.
Example
MMEM:STOR:STAT 1,'DATASET001.SET'
Saves the current device settings in the file DATASET001.SET.
Characteristics
*RST value: -
SCPI: conform

Operating Manual 1173.0966.12 - 07 226

R&S FSC Remote Control – Commands
Making and Storing Screenshots

8.6 Making and Storing Screenshots

The following commands manage screenshots.
These commands are independent from the operating mode.

List of commands
● DISPlay:WINDow:STORe (p. 227)
● HCOPy:DEVice:LANGuage (p. 227)
● HCOPy[:IMMediate] (p. 228)
● MMEMory:NAME <FileName> (p. 228)

DISPlay:WINDow:STORe

This command makes a screenshot of the current display contens in png or jpg
format and stores it on the R&S ZVH internal memory.
You can select a file name for the screenshot in png format with MMEMory:NAME
<FileName> and select the file format of the screenshot with
HCOPy:DEVice:LANGuage.
This command is an event and therefore has no *RST value and no query.
Example
HCOP:DEV:LANG PNG
MMEM:NAME '\Public\Screen Shots\Test.png'
DISP:WIND:STOR
Makes and stores a screenshot of the current screen in a file 'Test.png'.
Characteristics
*RST value: -
SCPI: device-specific

HCOPy:DEVice:LANGuage

This command selects the file format for screenshots.

Parameter
PNG | JPG
Example
HCOP:DEV:LANG PNG
Selects the png format for screenhots.
Characteristics
*RST value: -
SCPI: device-specific

Operating Manual 1173.0966.12 - 07 227

R&S FSC Remote Control – Commands
Configuring Data Capture

HCOPy[:IMMediate]

This command makes a screenshot of the current trace and stores it on the
R&S FSC internal memory.
This command is an event and therefore has no *RST value and no query.
Example
MMEM:NAME '\Public\Screenshots\Test.png'
Defines the file name of the screenshot.
HCOP
Makes and stores a screenshot of the current screen.
Characteristics
*RST value: -
SCPI: device-specific

MMEMory:NAME <FileName>

This command defines the path and file name that the R&S FSH uses for storing
screenshots (see HCOPy[:IMMediate]). The path and file name comply with
DOS conventions.
This command is an event and therefore has no *RST value and no query.
Parameter
<FileName>
String containing the file name.
Example
MMEM:NAME 'Public\Screeshots\Test.png'
Stores the screenshot on the in the corresponding directory on the R&S ZVH.
Characteristics
*RST value: -
SCPI: device-specific

8.7 Configuring Data Capture

The following commands configure the data capture.
These commands are independent from the operating mode.

List of commands
● SYSTem:CAPTure:COUNter <Counter> (p. 229)
● SYSTem:CAPture:MODE <MODE> (p. 229)

Operating Manual 1173.0966.12 - 07 228

R&S FSC Remote Control – Commands
Configuring Data Capture

SYSTem:CAPTure:COUNter <Counter>

This command defines the start of the file name counter.

The counter numbers the files stored when you capture data (screenshots,
datasets etc.).
Parameter
<Counter>
String containing the number with which to start numbering files.
Example
SYST:CAPT:COUN '0100'
Starts numbering files with 0100, e.g. Measurement0100.png.
Characteristics
*RST value: '0000'
SCPI: device-specific

SYSTem:CAPture:MODE <MODE>

This command selects the data types that the R&S FSC saves when you capture
the current measurement data.
Parameter
<Mode>
SCReen Saves a screenshot
DATaset Saves a dataset
BOTH Saves a screenshot and a dataset
Example
SYST:CAPT:MODE BOTH
Captures both a screenshot and a dataset of the current measurement.
Characteristics
*RST value: SCReen
SCPI: device-specific

Operating Manual 1173.0966.12 - 07 229

R&S FSC Remote Control – Commands
Configuring the Instrument

8.8 Configuring the Instrument

The following commands configure general instrument settings. These commands are
independent from the operating mode.

Contents
Mode Selection on page 230
Display Configuration on page 231
Audio Settings on page 232
Setting up a Network Connection on page 233
System Settings on page 236

8.8.1 Mode Selection

This chapter describes all commands that select the operating mode of the R&S FSC.

List of commands
● INSTrument[:SELect] <OperatingMode> (p. 230)
● INSTrument:NSELect <OperatingMode> (p. 230)

INSTrument[:SELect] <OperatingMode>

This command selects the operating mode.

Parameter
<OperatingMode>

NAN network analyzer

PM power meter

SANalyzer spectrum analyzer

Example
INST SAN
Selects spectrum analyzer mode.
Characteristics
*RST value: ACT
SCPI: conform

INSTrument:NSELect <OperatingMode>

This command selects the operating mode.

Parameter

1 spectrum analyzer

2 network analyzer

5 power meter

Operating Manual 1173.0966.12 - 07 230

R&S FSC Remote Control – Commands
Configuring the Instrument

Example
INST:NSEL 1
Selects spectrum analyzer mode.
Characteristics
*RST value: 4
SCPI: conform

8.8.2 Display Configuration

This chapter describes commands to set up the display of the R&S FSC via remote
control.

List of Commands
● DISPlay:CMAP <ColorScheme> (p. 231)
● DISPlay:CMAP:DEFault (p. 231)
● DISPlay:DATE:FORMat <DateFormat> (p. 232)

DISPlay:CMAP <ColorScheme>

This command sets the color scheme of the display.

Parameter
<ColorScheme>
COLor color
BW black & white
PF printer friendly
Example
DISP:CMAP BW
Sets the screen colors to black and white
Characteristics
*RST value: COLor
SCPI: conform

DISPlay:CMAP:DEFault

This command sets the display to the default state.

This command is an event and therefore has no query and no *RST value.
Example
DISP:CMPA:DEF
Restores the original color scheme

Operating Manual 1173.0966.12 - 07 231

R&S FSC Remote Control – Commands
Configuring the Instrument

Characteristics
*RST value: -
SCPI: conform

DISPlay:DATE:FORMat <DateFormat>

This command sets the display date format.

Parameter
<DateFormat>
DDMMyyyy | MMDDyyyy
Example
DISP:DATE:FORM DDMMyyyy
Characteristics
*RST value: DDMMyyyy
SCPI: device-specific

8.8.3 Audio Settings

This chapter describes all commands to control the audio functions of the R&S FSC.

List of commands
● SYSTem:AUDio:VOLume <Volume> (p. 232)
● SYSTem:BEEPer:VOLume <Volume> (p. 233)
● SYSTem:BEEPer:KEY:VOLume <Volume> (p. 233)

SYSTem:AUDio:VOLume <Volume>

This command sets the volume of the internal speaker.

Parameter
<Volume>
Numeric value in the range from 0 to 1
Example
SYST:AUD:VOL 0.40
Sets the volume to 40%
Characteristics
*RST value: 0.3 (30%)
SCPI: device-specific

Operating Manual 1173.0966.12 - 07 232

R&S FSC Remote Control – Commands
Configuring the Instrument

SYSTem:BEEPer:VOLume <Volume>

This command sets the volume of the system beeper.

Parameter
<Volume>
Numeric value in the range from 0 to 1
Example
SYST:BEEP:VOL 0.50
Sets the volume of the beeper to 50%
Characteristics
*RST value: 0.6 (60%)
SCPI: conform

SYSTem:BEEPer:KEY:VOLume <Volume>

This command sets the volume of the keyboard click noise.

Parameter
<Volume>
Numeric value in the range from 0 to 1
Example
SYST:BEEP:KEY:VOL 0.10
Sets of keyboard clicking volume to 10%
Characteristics
*RST value: 0.3 (30%)
SCPI: conform

8.8.4 Setting up a Network Connection

This chapter describes all commands that are used if the R&S FSC is part of a
network.

List of commands
● SYSTem:COMMunicate:LAN:ETHernet? (p. 234)
● SYSTem:COMMunicate:LAN:SUBMask <SubnetMask> (p. 234)
● SYSTem:COMMunicate:SOCKet:ADDRess <IPAddress> (p. 234)
● SYSTem:COMMunicate:SOCKet:DHCP[:STATe] <State> (p. 235)
● SYSTem:COMMunicate:SOCKet:PORT <Port> (p. 235)

Operating Manual 1173.0966.12 - 07 233

R&S FSC Remote Control – Commands
Configuring the Instrument

SYSTem:COMMunicate:LAN:ETHernet?

This command queries the MAC address of the R&S FSC.

This command is a query and therefore has no *RST value.
Example
SYST:COMM:LAN:ETH?
Returns the MAC address
Characteristics
*RST value: -
SCPI: device-specific

SYSTem:COMMunicate:LAN:SUBMask <SubnetMask>

This command sets the subnet mask of the R&S FSC.

Parameter
<SubnetMask>
String containing the subnet mask ('x.x.x.x').
Example
SYST:COMM:LAN:SUBM '255.255.255.0'
Sets the subnet mask address to 255.255.255.0
Characteristics
*RST value: 255.255.255.0
SCPI: device-specific

SYSTem:COMMunicate:SOCKet:ADDRess <IPAddress>

This command sets the IP address of the R&S FSC.

Parameter
<IPAddress>
String containing the IP address ('x.x.x.x').
Example
SYST:COMM:SOCK:ADDR '172.76.68.30'
Sets the IP address of the R&S FSC to 172.76.68.30
Characteristics
*RST value: 172.76.68.24
SCPI: device-specific

Operating Manual 1173.0966.12 - 07 234

R&S FSC Remote Control – Commands
Configuring the Instrument

SYSTem:COMMunicate:SOCKet:DHCP[:STATe] <State>

This command turns the Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) on and off.
Parameter
<State>
ON | OFF
Example
SYST:COMM:SOCK:DHCP ON
Activates DHCP.
Characteristics
*RST value: ON
SCPI: device-specific

SYSTem:COMMunicate:SOCKet:PORT <Port>

This command sets the port number for the connection.

Parameter
<Port>
Port number
Example
SYST:COMM:SOCK:PORT 1000
Sets the port number to 1000
Characteristics
*RST value: 5555
SCPI: device-specific

Operating Manual 1173.0966.12 - 07 235

R&S FSC Remote Control – Commands
Configuring the Instrument

8.8.5 System Settings

This chapter describes all commands that define or query general system settings.

List of commands
● INPut:IMPedance:PAD <MatchingPad> (p. 236)
● [SENSe:]ROSCilator:SOURce <RefSource> (p. 237)
● SYSTem:BNC<1...2>:MODE <BNCFunction> (p. 237)
● SYSTem:DATE <Date> (p. 238)
● SYSTem:ERRor[:NEXT]? (p. 238)
● SYSTem:ERRor:ALL? (p. 238)
● SYSTem:ERRor:COUNt? (p. 240)
● SYSTem:ERRor:CODE[:NEXT]? (p. 239)
● SYSTem:ERRor:CODE:ALL? (p. 239)
● SYSTem:HELP:HEADers? (p. 240)
● SYSTem:HELP:SYNTax? (p. 240)
● SYSTem:LANGuage:CATalog? (p. 241)
● SYSTem:POWer:SOURce? (p. 241)
● SYSTem:POWer:STATus? (p. 242)
● SYSTem:PRESet (p. 242)
● SYSTem:PRESet:FACTory (p. 242)
● SYSTem:PRESet:MODE <Mode> (p. 242)
● SYSTem:PRESet:USER <Preset> (p. 243)
● SYSTem:SHUTdown (p. 243)
● SYSTem:TIME <Time> (p. 243)
● SYSTem:TZONee <TimeShift> (p. 244)
● SYSTem:VERSion? (p. 244)

INPut:IMPedance:PAD <MatchingPad>

This command selects the matching pad connected to the R&S FSC.
Parameter
<MatchingPad>
RAM | RAZ | HZTE
Example
INPut:IMP 75;PAD RAZ
Selects 75 Ω input impedance and the R&S RAZ as the matching pad.
Characteristics
*RST value: -
SCPI: device-specific

Operating Manual 1173.0966.12 - 07 236

R&S FSC Remote Control – Commands
Configuring the Instrument

[SENSe:]ROSCilator:SOURce <RefSource>

This command selects the source of the frequency reference oscillator.

If you use an external reference signal, make sure to connect the signal to the Ext
Ref BNC connector of the R&S FSC.
Parameter
<RefSource>
INTernal internal reference
EXTernal external reference
Example
ROSC:SOUR EXT
Activates external source as reference signal.
Characteristics
*RST value: -
SCPI: device-specific

SYSTem:BNC<1...2>:MODE <BNCFunction>

This command configures the BNC sockets.

The numeric suffix at BNC selects the BNC socket you want to configure.
Parameter
<BNCFunction>
REFerence input for external reference signal (BNC1)
TRIGger input for external trigger (BNC1)
IF3 IF output (BNC2)
Example
SYST:BNC2:MODE TRIG
Sets the seconds BNC socket to trigger input.
Characteristics
*RST value: BNC 1: TRIGger, BNC 2: IF3
SCPI: device-specific

Operating Manual 1173.0966.12 - 07 237

R&S FSC Remote Control – Commands
Configuring the Instrument

SYSTem:DATE <Date>

This command sets the date for the internal calendar.

Parameter
<Date>
Numeric value indicating the date
You have to enter the date as comma separated values after the string with the file
name. The sequence is year,month,day.
The available value range is 1980...2099, 1...12, 1...31
Example
SYST:DATE 2000,6,1
Sets the date to 1/6/2000
Characteristics
*RST value: -
SCPI: conform

SYSTem:ERRor[:NEXT]?

This command queries the oldest entry in the error queue and deletes it.
This command is a query and therefore has no *RST value.
Return value
<error number>,<error description>
<error number> number that contains information about the error
negative number: error as defined in the SCPI standard
positive number: error that is specific to the R&S FSC
<error description> string containing a short error description
If the error queue is empty, the command returns 0,'no error'.
Example
STAT:ERR?
Characteristics
*RST value: -
SCPI: conform

SYSTem:ERRor:ALL?

This command queries the complete error queue.

This command is a query and therefore no *RST value.
Return value
<error number>,<error description>

Operating Manual 1173.0966.12 - 07 238

R&S FSC Remote Control – Commands
Configuring the Instrument

<error number> number that contains information about the error

negative number: error as defined in the SCPI standard
positive number: error that is specific to the R&S FSC
<error description> string containing a short error description
The number of values depends on the length of the queue.
If the error queue is empty, the command returns 0,'no error'.
Example
SYST:ERR:ALL?
Characteristics
*RST value: -
SCPI: device-specific

SYSTem:ERRor:CODE[:NEXT]?

This command queries the code of the next error in the error queue.
This command is a query and therefore has no *RST value.
Return value
<error number>
number that contains information about the error
Negative number: error as defined in the SCPI standard
Positive number: error that is specific to the R&S FSC
If the error queue is empty, the command returns 0.
Example
STAT:ERR:CODE?
Characteristics
*RST value: -
SCPI: conform

SYSTem:ERRor:CODE:ALL?

This command queries the complete error queue.

This command is a query and therefore no *RST value.
Return value
<error number>
number that contains information about the error
Negative number: error as defined in the SCPI standard
Positive number: error that is specific to the R&S FSC
The number of values depends on the length of the queue.
If the error queue is empty, the command returns 0,'no error'.

Operating Manual 1173.0966.12 - 07 239

R&S FSC Remote Control – Commands
Configuring the Instrument

Example
SYST:ERR:CODE:ALL?
Characteristics
*RST value: -
SCPI: device-specific

SYSTem:ERRor:COUNt?

This command queries the number of errors currently in the error queue.
This command is a query and therefore no *RST value.
Return value
<numeric_value>
number of the errors in the queue
Example
SYST:ERR:COUN?
Characteristics
*RST value: -
SCPI: device-specific

SYSTem:HELP:HEADers?

This command returns a list of all available remote control commands.

This command is a query and therefore no *RST value.
Example
SYST:HELP:HEAD?
Returns the syntax of all available commands.
Characteristics
*RST value: -
SCPI: conform

SYSTem:HELP:SYNTax?

This command returns the full syntax of the specified command.

This command is a query and therefore no *RST value.
Parameter
<Command>
String containing the command you want to query
Example
SYST:HELP:SYNT? 'SYST:ERR?'
Returns the full syntax. In this case: 'SYSTem:ERRor[:NEXT]'.

Operating Manual 1173.0966.12 - 07 240

R&S FSC Remote Control – Commands
Configuring the Instrument

Characteristics
*RST value: -
SCPI: device-specific

SYSTem:LANGuage <Language>

This command sets the language of the R&S FSC user interface. You can query a
list of available languages with SYSTem:LANGuage:CATalog?.
Parameter
<Language>
string containing the language
Example
SYST:LANG 'english'
Sets the system language to English
Characteristics
*RST value: -
SCPI: conform

SYSTem:LANGuage:CATalog?

This command lists all languages available for the user interface.
This command is a query and therefore no *RST value.
Example
SYST:LANG:CAT?
Characteristics
*RST value: -
SCPI: device-specific

SYSTem:POWer:SOURce?

This command queries the current R&S FSC power source.

This command is a query and therefore has no *RST value.
Return values
ADAP R&S FSC is powered by the AC power supply
BATT R&S FSC is powered by the battery
Example
SYST:POW:SOUR?
Characteristics
*RST value: -
SCPI: conform

Operating Manual 1173.0966.12 - 07 241

R&S FSC Remote Control – Commands
Configuring the Instrument

SYSTem:POWer:STATus?

This command queries the remaining power of the battery.

This command is a query and therefore has no *RST value.
Return values
Numeric value in the range from 0 to 100 %.
Example
SYST:POW:STAT?
Example
SYST:POW:STAT?
Characteristics
*RST value: -
SCPI: conform

SYSTem:PRESet

Resets the R&S FSC to its default state or a state defined by the user, depending
on SYSTem:PRESet:MODE.
This command is an event and therefore has no *RST value and no query.
Example
SYST:PRES
Characteristics
*RST value: -
SCPI: conform

SYSTem:PRESet:FACTory

This command initiates an instrument reset back to factory settings.

This command is an event and therefore has no query and no *RST value.
Example
SYST:PRES:FACT
Resets the R&S FSC to its factory settings.
Characteristics
*RST value: -
SCPI: device-specific

SYSTem:PRESet:MODE <Mode>

This command selects the preset mode.

Parameter
<Mode>

Operating Manual 1173.0966.12 - 07 242

R&S FSC Remote Control – Commands
Configuring the Instrument

DEFault default preset state

USER user defined preset state
Example
SYST:PRES:MODE USER
Selects a user defined preset.
Characteristics
*RST value: -
SCPI: conform

SYSTem:PRESet:USER <Preset>

This command selects a file containing a user defined preset state.

Parameter
<Preset>
filename of the user defined preset state
Characteristics
*RST value: -
SCPI: conform

SYSTem:SHUTdown

This command turns the R&S FSC off.

This command is an event and therefore has no *RST value and no query.
Example
SYST:SHUT
Turns the R&S FSC off.
Characteristics
*RST value: -
SCPI: conform

SYSTem:TIME <Time>

This command sets the internal clock.

Parameter
<Time>
Numeric value indicating the time
You have to enter the time as comma separated values after the string with the file
name. The sequence is hour,minute,second.
The available value range is 0...23, 0...59, 0...59.

Operating Manual 1173.0966.12 - 07 243

R&S FSC Remote Control – Commands
Configuring the Instrument

Example
SYST:TIME 12,30,30
Characteristics
*RST value: -
SCPI: conform

SYSTem:TZONee <TimeShift>

This command defines a shift of the system time to select another time zone.
Parameter
<TimeShift>
Numeric vakue indicating the time shift.
You have to enter the time shift as comma separated value. The equence is
hour,minute.
The available value range is 0…23, 0…59.
Example
SYST:TZON 01,00
Shifts the time an hour ahead
Characteristics
*RST value: 0,0
SCPI: device-specific

SYSTem:VERSion?

This command queries the SCPI version the remote control is based on.
This command is a query and therefore has no *RST value.
Return value
1999.0
Example
SYST:VERS?
Characteristics
*RST value: -
SCPI: conform

Operating Manual 1173.0966.12 - 07 244

R&S FSC Remote Control – Commands
Status Reporting System

8.9 Status Reporting System

The status reporting system stores all information on the present operating state of the
instrument, and on errors which have occurred. This information is stored in the status
registers and in the error queue. The status registers and the error queue can be
queried via Ethernet.
The information is of a hierarchical structure. The register status byte (STB) defined in
IEEE 488.2 and its associated mask register service request enable (SRE) form the
uppermost level. The STB receives its information from the standard event status
register (ESR) which is also defined in IEEE 488.2 with the associated mask register
standard event status enable (ESE) and registers STATus:OPERation and
STATus:QUEStionable which are defined by SCPI and contain detailed information on
the instrument.
The output buffer contains the messages the instrument returns to the controller. It is
not part of the status reporting system but determines the value of the MAV bit in the
STB.

8.9.1 Structure of an SCPI Status Register

Each standard SCPI register consists of 5 parts which each have a width of 16 bits and
have different functions. The individual bits are independent of each other, i.e. each
hardware status is assigned a bit number that applies to all five parts. For example, bit
0 of the STATus:OPERation register is assigned to the calibration status of the
R&S FSC. Bit 15 (the most significant bit) is set to zero for all parts. Thus the contents
of the register parts can be processed by the controller as positive integer.

15 14 13 12 CONDition Part 3 2 1 0

15 14 13 12 PTRansition Part 3 2 1 0
15 14 13 12 NTRansition Part 3 2 1 0

15 14 13 12 EVENt Part 3 2 1 0
to higher order register

& & & & & & & & & & & & & & &
& = logical AND
+ Sum bit
+ = logical OR
15 14 13 12 ENABle Part 3 2 1 0 of all bits

Figure 8-1: The status-register model

8.9.1.1 CONDition part

The CONDition part is directly written into by the hardware or the sum bit of the next
lower register. Its contents reflects the current instrument status. This register part can
only be read, but not written into or cleared. Its contents is not affected by reading.

Operating Manual 1173.0966.12 - 07 245

R&S FSC Remote Control – Commands
Status Reporting System

8.9.1.2 PTRansition part

The Positive-TRansition part acts as an edge detector. When a bit of the CONDition
part is changed from 0 to 1, the associated PTR bit decides whether the EVENt bit is
set to 1.
PTR bit =1: the EVENt bit is set.
PTR bit =0: the EVENt bit is not set.
This part can be written into and read at will. Its contents is not affected by reading.

8.9.1.3 NTRansition part

The Negative-TRansition part also acts as an edge detector. When a bit of the
CONDition part is changed from 1 to 0, the associated NTR bit decides whether the
EVENt bit is set to 1.
NTR-Bit = 1: the EVENt bit is set.
NTR-Bit = 0: the EVENt bit is not set.
This part can be written into and read at will. Its contents is not affected by reading.
With these two edge register parts the user can define which state transition of the
condition part (none, 0 to 1, 1 to 0 or both) is stored in the EVENt part.

8.9.1.4 EVENt part

The EVENt part indicates whether an event has occurred since the last reading, it is
the "memory" of the condition part. It only indicates events passed on by the edge
filters. It is permanently updated by the instrument. This part can only be read by the
user. Reading the register clears it. This part is often equated with the entire register.

8.9.1.5 ENABle part

The ENABle part determines whether the associated EVENt bit contributes to the sum
bit (see below). Each bit of the EVENt part is ANDed with the associated ENABle bit
(symbol '&'). The results of all logical operations of this part are passed on to the sum
bit via an OR function (symbol '+').
ENABle-Bit = 0: the associated EVENt bit does not contribute to the sum bit
ENABle-Bit = 1: if the associated EVENT bit is "1", the sum bit is set to "1" as well.
This part can be written into and read by the user at will. Its contents is not affected by
reading.

Operating Manual 1173.0966.12 - 07 246

R&S FSC Remote Control – Commands
Status Reporting System

8.9.1.6 Sum bit

As indicated above, the sum bit is obtained from the EVENt and ENABle part for each
register. The result is then entered into a bit of the CONDition part of the higher-order
register.
The instrument automatically generates the sum bit for each register. Thus an event,
e.g. a PLL that has not locked, can lead to a service request throughout all levels of the
hierarchy.

The service request enable register SRE defined in IEEE 488.2 can be taken as
ENABle part of the STB if the STB is structured according to SCPI. By analogy, the
ESE can be taken as the ENABle part of the ESR.

8.9.2 Overview of the Status Register

The following figure shows the status registers used by the R&S FSC.

Figure 8-2: Overview of the status registers

Operating Manual 1173.0966.12 - 07 247

R&S FSC Remote Control – Commands
Status Reporting System

8.9.3 Status Byte (STB) & Service Request Enable Register (SRE)

The STB is already defined in IEEE 488.2. It provides a rough overview of the
instrument status by collecting the pieces of information of the lower registers. It can
thus be compared with the CONDition part of an SCPI register and assumes the
highest level within the SCPI hierarchy. A special feature is that bit 6 acts as the sum
bit of the remaining bits of the status byte.
The STATUS BYTE is read using the command "*STB?" or a serial poll.
The STB is linked to the SRE. The latter corresponds to the ENABle part of the SCPI
registers in its function. Each bit of the STB is assigned a bit in the SRE. Bit 6 of the
SRE is ignored. If a bit is set in the SRE and the associated bit in the STB changes
from 0 to 1, a service request (SRQ) is generated, which triggers an interrupt in the
controller if this is appropriately configured and can be further processed there. The
SRE can be set using the command "*SRE" and read using the command "*SRE?"
Table 8-1: Meaning of the bits used in the Status Byte

Bit No. Meaning

0 to 1 Not used

2 Error Queue not empty

The bit is set when an entry is made in the error queue.
If this bit is enabled by the SRE, each entry of the error queue generates a service request. Thus an error
can be recognized and specified in greater detail by polling the error queue. The poll provides an
informative error message. This procedure is to be recommended since it considerably reduces the
problems involved with remote control.

3 QUEStionable status sum bit

The bit is set if an EVENt bit is set in the QUEStionable: status register and the associated ENABle bit is
set to 1.
A set bit indicates a questionable instrument status, which can be specified in greater detail by polling the
QUEStionable status register.

4 MAV bit (message available)

The bit is set if a message is available in the output buffer which can be read.
This bit can be used to enable data to be automatically read from the instrument to the controller.

5 ESB bit
Sum bit of the event status register. It is set if one of the bits in the event status register is set and enabled
in the event status enable register.
Setting of this bit indicates a serious error which can be specified in greater detail by polling the event
status register.

6 MSS bit (master status summary bit)

The bit is set if the instrument triggers a service request. This is the case if one of the other bits of this
registers is set together with its mask bit in the service request enable register SRE.

7 OPERation status register sum bit

The bit is set if an EVENt bit is set in the OPERation status register and the associated ENABle bit is set to
1.
A set bit indicates that the instrument is just performing an action. The type of action can be determined by
polling the OPERation status register.

Operating Manual 1173.0966.12 - 07 248

R&S FSC Remote Control – Commands
Status Reporting System

8.9.4 Event Status Register (ESR) and Event Status Enable Register
(ESE)

The ESR is defined in IEEE 488.2. It can be compared with the EVENt part of a SCPI
register. The event status register can be read out using command *ESR?.
The ESE is the associated ENABle part. It can be set using the command *ESE and
read using the command *ESE?.
Table 8-2: Meaning of the bits in the event status register

Bit No. Meaning

0 Operation Complete
This bit is set on receipt of the command *OPC exactly when all previous commands have been executed.

1 Not used

2 Query Error
This bit is set if either the controller wants to read data from the instrument without having sent a query, or if it
does not fetch requested data and sends new instructions to the instrument instead. The cause is often a query
which is faulty and hence cannot be executed.

3 Device-dependent Error
This bit is set if a device-dependent error occurs. An error message with a number between -300 and -399 or a
positive error number, which denotes the error in greater detail, is entered into the error queue.

4 Execution Error
This bit is set if a received command is syntactically correct but cannot be performed for other reasons. An error
message with a number between -200 and -300, which denotes the error in greater detail, is entered into the
error queue.

5 Command Error
This bit is set if a command is received, which is undefined or syntactically incorrect. An error message with a
number between -100 and -200, which denotes the error in greater detail, is entered into the error queue.

6 Not used

7 Power On (supply voltage on)

This bit is set on switching on the instrument.

Operating Manual 1173.0966.12 - 07 249

R&S FSC Remote Control – Commands
Status Reporting System

8.9.4.1 STATus:OPERation Register

In the CONDition part, this register contains information on which actions the
instrument is being executing or, in the EVENt part, information on which actions the
instrument has executed since the last reading. It can be read using the commands
STATus:OPERation:CONDition? or STATus:OPERation[:EVENt]?.
Table 8-3: Meaning of the bits in the STATus:OPERation register

Bit No. Meaning

0 CALibrating
This bit is set as long as the instrument is performing a calibration.

1 to 14 Not used

15 This bit is always 0

8.9.4.2 STATus:QUEStionable Register

This register contains information about indefinite states which may occur if the unit is
operated without meeting the specifications. It can be read using the commands
STATus:QUEStionable: CONDition? and STATus:QUEStionable[:EVENt]?.
Table 8-4: Meaning of bits in STATus:QUEStionable register

Bit No. Meaning

0 to 1 These bits are not used

2 BATTERY LOW
If the instrument is running without any external power supply and the charging level of the internal battery is
approximately lower than 5% this bit is set to indcate that the system will be shut down automatically in approx. 5
minutes.

3 Not used

4 TEMPerature
This bit is set if a questionable temperature occurs.

5 to 8 Not used

9 LIMit (device-specific)
This bit is set if a limit value is violated

10 CALibration
The bit is set if a measurement is performed unaligned (label UNCAL)

11 to 14 Not used

15 This bit is always 0.

Operating Manual 1173.0966.12 - 07 250

R&S FSC Remote Control – Commands
Status Reporting System

8.9.4.3 STATus:QUEStionable:FREQuency Register

This register contains information about the reference frequency. It can be read using
the commands STATus:QUEStionable:LIMit:FREQuency? and
STATus:QUEStionable:FREQuency[:EVENt]?.
Table 8-5: Meaning of bits in STATus:QUEStionable:FREQuency register

Bit No. Meaning

0 to 7 Not used

8 EXTernal REFerence
This bit is set if an external reference is used.

9 to 14 Not used

15 This bit is always 0.

8.9.4.4 STATus:QUEStionable:LIMit Register

This register contains information about the observance of limit lines. It can be read
using the commands STATus:QUEStionable:LIMit:CONDition? and
STATus:QUEStionable:LIMit[:EVENt]?.
Table 8-6: Meaning of bits in STATus:QUEStionable:LIMit register

Bit No. Meaning

0 LIMit 1 FAIL
This bit is set if limit line 1 is violated.

1 LIMit 2 FAIL
This bit is set if limit line 2 is violated.

2 to 14 Not used

15 This bit is always 0.

8.9.4.5 STATus:QUEStionable:POWer Register

This register contains information about possible overload states. It can be read using
the commands STATus:QUEStionable:POWer:CONDition? and
STATus:QUEStionable:POWer[:EVENt]?.
Table 8-7: Meaning of bits in STATus:QUEStionable:POWer register

Bit No. Meaning

0 to 1 Not used

2 IF_Overload
This bit is set if the IF path is overloaded. ’IFOVL’ is displayed.

3 to 14 Not used

15 This bit is always 0.

Operating Manual 1173.0966.12 - 07 251

R&S FSC Remote Control – Commands
Status Reporting System

8.9.5 Application of the Status Reporting Systems

In order to be able to effectively use the status reporting system, the information
contained there must be transmitted to the controller and further processed there.
There are several methods which are represented in the following.

8.9.5.1 Service Request

Under certain circumstances, the instrument can send a service request (SRQ) to the
controller. Usually this service request initiates an interrupt at the controller, to which
the control program can react appropriately. As evident from Fig. 1-4, an SRQ is
always initiated if one or several of bits 2, 3, 4, 5 or 7 of the status byte are set and
enabled in the SRE. Each of these bits combines the information of a further register,
the error queue or the output buffer. The ENABle parts of the status registers can be
set so that arbitrary bits in an arbitrary status register initiate an SRQ. In order to make
use of the possibilities of the service request effectively, all bits should be set to "1" in
enable registers SRE and ESE.

Example
Use of the command *OPC to generate an SRQ at the end of a sweep
CALL InstrWrite(analyzer, "*ESE 1")
'Set bit 0 in the ESE (Operation Complete)
CALL InstrWrite(analyzer, "*SRE 32")
'Set bit 5 in the SRE (ESB)?
After its settings have been completed, the instrument generates an SRQ.
The SRQ is the only possibility for the instrument to become active on its own. Each
controller program should set the instrument in a way that a service request is initiated
in the case of malfunction. The program should react appropriately to the service
request.

8.9.5.2 Serial Poll

In a serial poll, just as with command *STB, the status byte of an instrument is queried.
However, the query is realized via interface messages and is thus clearly faster. The
serial-poll method has already been defined in IEEE 488.1 and used to be the only
standard possibility for different instruments to poll the status byte. The method also
works with instruments which do not adhere to SCPI or IEEE 488.2.
The VISUAL BASIC command for executing a serial poll is IBRSP(). Serial poll is
mainly used to obtain a fast overview of the state of several instruments connected to
the controller.

Operating Manual 1173.0966.12 - 07 252

R&S FSC Remote Control – Commands
Status Reporting System

8.9.5.3 Query by Means of Commands

Each part of any status register can be read by means of queries. The individual
commands are listed in the description of the STATus Subsystem. The returned value
is always a number that represents the bit pattern of the queried register. This number
is evaluated by the controller program.
Queries are usually used after an SRQ in order to obtain more detailed information on
the cause of the SRQ.

8.9.5.4 Error Queue Query

Each error state in the instrument leads to an entry in the error queue. The entries of
the error queue are detailed plain-text error messages that can be displayed via
manual operation using the setup menu or queried via remote control using the
command SYSTem:ERRor?. Each call of SYSTem:ERRor? provides one entry from
the error queue. If no error messages are stored there any more, the instrument
responds with 0, "No error".
The error queue should be queried after every SRQ in the controller program as the
entries describe the cause of an error more precisely than the status registers.
Especially in the test phase of a controller program the error queue should be queried
regularly since faulty commands from the controller to the instrument are recorded
there as well.

Operating Manual 1173.0966.12 - 07 253

R&S FSC Remote Control – Commands
Status Reporting System

8.9.6 Reset Values of the Status Reporting System

Table 8-8 contains the different commands and events causing the status reporting
system to be reset. None of the commands, except *RST and SYSTem:PRESet,
influences the functional instrument settings. In particular, DCL does not change the
instrument settings.
Table 8-8: Resetting the status reporting system

Event Switching on supply

voltage DCL,SDC

Power-On-Status-Clear (Device Clear, *RST or STATus:PRESet *CLS

Selected Device SYSTem:PRESet
Clear)

Effect 0 1

Clear STB,ESR  yes    yes

Clear SRE,ESE  yes    

Clear PPE  yes    

Clear EVENt parts of the  yes    yes

registers

Clear ENABle parts of all  yes   yes 

OPERation and
QUEStionable registers;
Fill ENABle parts of all
other registers with "1".

Fill PTRansition parts with  yes   yes 

"1";
Clear NTRansition parts

Clear error queue yes yes    yes

Clear output buffer yes yes yes 1) 1) 1)

Clear command processing yes yes yes   

and input buffer

1) Every command being the first in a program message, i.e., immediately following a
<PROGRAM MESSAGE TERMINATOR> clears the output buffer.

Operating Manual 1173.0966.12 - 07 254

R&S FSC Remote Control – Commands
Status Reporting System

8.9.7 Remote Commands of the Status Reporting System

The following commands control the status-reporting system. *RST does not influence
the status registers.
The OPERation status register contains information about the calibration status of the
instrument.
The QUEStionable status register contains information about the status of the
reference and local oscillator, possible overloads of the instrument and the status of
limit checks and limit margins.
The commands are independent from the operating mode.

List of commands
● STATus:PRESet (p. 255)
● STATus:QUEue[:NEXT] (p. 256)
● STATus:OPERation[:EVENt]? (p. 256)
● STATus:OPERation:CONDition? (p. 256)
● STATus:OPERation:ENABle <SumBit> (p. 256)
● STATus:OPERation:NTRansition <SumBit> (p. 257)
● STATus:OPERation:PTRansition <SumBit> (p. 257)
● STATus:QUEStionable[:EVENt]? (p. 257)
● STATus:QUEStionable:CONDition? (p. 258)
● STATus:QUEStionable:ENABle <SumBit> (p. 258)
● STATus:QUEStionable:NTRansition <SumBit> (p. 258)
● STATus:QUEStionable:PTRansition <SumBit> (p. 259)

STATus:PRESet

This command resets the edge detectors and ENABle parts of all registers to a
defined value. All PTRansition parts are set to FFFFh, i.e. all transitions from 0 to 1
are detected. All NTRansition parts are set to 0, i.e. a transition from 1 to 0 in a
CONDition bit is not detected. The ENABle part of the STATus:OPERation and
STATus:QUEStionable registers are set to 0, i.e. all events in these registers are
not passed on.
Example
STAT:PRES
Characteristics
*RST value: -
SCPI: conform

Operating Manual 1173.0966.12 - 07 255

R&S FSC Remote Control – Commands
Status Reporting System

STATus:QUEue[:NEXT]

This command returns the earliest entry to the error queue and deletes it.
Positive error numbers indicate device-specific errors, negative error numbers are
error messages defined by SCPI. If the error queue is empty, the error number 0,
"no error", is returned. This command is identical with the command
SYSTem:ERRor.
Example
STAT:QUE?
Characteristics
*RST value: –
SCPI: conform

STATus:OPERation[:EVENt]?

This command reads out the EVENt section of the OPERation register.
The command at the same time deletes the contents of the EVENt section.
Characteristics
*RST value: -
SCPI: conform

STATus:OPERation:CONDition?

This command reads out the CONDition section of the OPERation register.
The command does not delete the contents of the EVENt section.
Characteristics
*RST value: -
SCPI: conform

STATus:OPERation:ENABle <SumBit>

This command controls the ENABle part of the OPERation register.

The ENABle part allows true conditions in the EVENt part of the status register to
bereported in the summary bit. If a bit is 1 in the enable register and its associated
event bit transitions to true, a positive transition will occur in the summary bit
reported to the next higher level.
Parameter
<SumBit>
0 to 65535
Characteristics
*RST value: -
SCPI: conform

Operating Manual 1173.0966.12 - 07 256

R&S FSC Remote Control – Commands
Status Reporting System

STATus:OPERation:NTRansition <SumBit>

This command controls the Negative TRansition part of the OPERation register.
Setting a bit causes a 1 to 0 transition in the corresponding bit of the associated
register. The transition also writes a 1 into the associated bit of the corresponding
EVENt register.
Parameter
<SumBit>
0 to 65535
Characteristics
*RST value: -
SCPI: conform

STATus:OPERation:PTRansition <SumBit>

This command controls the Positive TRansition part of the OPERation register.
Setting a bit causes a 0 to 1 transition in the corresponding bit of the associated
register. The transition also writes a 1 into the associated bit of the corresponding
EVENt register.
Parameter
<SumBit>
0 to 65535
Characteristics
*RST value: -
SCPI: conform

STATus:QUEStionable[:EVENt]?
STATus:QUEStionable:FREQuency[:EVENt]?
STATus:QUEStionable:LIMit[:EVENt]?
STATus:QUEStionable:POWer[EVENt]?

This command reads out the EVENt section of the QUEStionable register.
The command at the same time deletes the contents of the EVENt section.
Characteristics
*RST value: -
SCPI: conform

Operating Manual 1173.0966.12 - 07 257

R&S FSC Remote Control – Commands
Status Reporting System

STATus:QUEStionable:CONDition?
STATus:QUEStionable:FREQuency:CONDition?
STATus:QUEStionable:LIMit:CONDition?
STATus:QUEStionable:POWer:CONDition?

This command reads out the CONDition section of the QUEStionable register.
The command does not delete the contents of the EVENt section.
Characteristics
*RST value: -
SCPI: conform

STATus:QUEStionable:ENABle <SumBit>
STATus:QUEStionable:FREQuency:ENABle <SumBit>
STATus:QUEStionable:LIMit:ENABle <SumBit>
STATus:QUEStionable:POWer:ENABle <SumBit>

This command controls the ENABle part of the QUEStionable register.

The ENABle part allows true conditions in the EVENt part of the status register to
bereported in the summary bit. If a bit is 1 in the enable register and its associated
event bit transitions to true, a positive transition will occur in the summary bit
reported to the next higher level.
Parameter
<SumBit>
0 to 65535
Characteristics
*RST value: -
SCPI: conform

STATus:QUEStionable:NTRansition <SumBit>
STATus:QUEStionable:FREQuency:NTRansition <SumBit>
STATus:QUEStionable:LIMit:NTRansition <SumBit>
STATus:QUEStionable:POWer:NTRansition <SumBit>

This command controls the Negative TRansition part of the QUEStionable register.
Setting a bit causes a 1 to 0 transition in the corresponding bit of the associated
register. The transition also writes a 1 into the associated bit of the corresponding
EVENt register.
Parameter
<SumBit>
0 to 65535

Operating Manual 1173.0966.12 - 07 258

R&S FSC Remote Control – Commands
Status Reporting System

Example
STAT:QUES:NTR 65535
Characteristics
*RST value: -
SCPI: conform

STATus:QUEStionable:PTRansition <SumBit>
STATus:QUEStionable:FREQuency:PTRansition <SumBit>
STATus:QUEStionable:LIMit:PTRansition <SumBit>
STATus:QUEStionable:POWer:PTRansition <SumBit>

This command control the Positive TRansition part of the QUEStionable register.
Setting a bit causes a 0 to 1 transition in the corresponding bit of the associated
register. The transition also writes a 1 into the associated bit of the corresponding
EVENt register.
Parameter
<SumBit>
0 to 65535
Characteristics
*RST value: -
SCPI: conform

Operating Manual 1173.0966.12 - 07 259

R&S FSC Remote Control – Commands
Status Reporting System

Alphabetical List of Remote Commands

*CLS ................................................................................................................. 132
*ESE ................................................................................................................. 132
*ESR? ............................................................................................................... 132
*IDN? ................................................................................................................ 133
*IST? ................................................................................................................. 133
*OPC ................................................................................................................. 133
*OPT? ............................................................................................................... 133
*RST ................................................................................................................. 133
*SRE ................................................................................................................. 134
*STB? ............................................................................................................... 134
*TRG ................................................................................................................. 134
*TST?................................................................................................................ 134
*WAI.................................................................................................................. 134

[SENSe:]BANDwidth|BWIDth:VIDeo <VideoBW>............................................ 147

[SENSe:]BANDwidth|BWIDth:VIDeo:AUTO <State> ....................................... 147
[SENSe:]BANDwidth|BWIDth[:RESolution] <ResBW> .................................... 146
[SENSe:]BANDwidth|BWIDth[:RESolution]:AUTO <State> ............................. 147
[SENSe:]CHANnel <ChannelNumber> ............................................................ 180
[SENSe:]CHANnel:TABLe:SELect <ChannelTable> ....................................... 181
[SENSe:]CORRection:TRANsducer<c>:SELect <TransducerFactor> ............ 145
[SENSe:]CORRection:TRANsducer<c>:UNIT? ............................................... 145
[SENSe:]CORRection:TRANsducer<c>[:STATe] <State> ............................... 144
[SENSe:]DETector<t>[:FUNCtion] <Detector>................................................. 157
[SENSe:]DETector<t>[:FUNCtion]:AUTO <State> ........................................... 157
[SENSe:]ESPectrum:PRESet:SETTings ONCE .............................................. 204
[SENSe:]ESPectrum:PRESet[:STANdard] <Standard> ................................... 204
[SENSe:]FREQuency:CENTer <Frequency> ................................................... 135
[SENSe:]FREQuency:CENTer:STEP <StepSize> ........................................... 136
[SENSe:]FREQuency:CENTer:STEP:LINK <StepSizeCoupling>.................... 136
[SENSe:]FREQuency:INPut:MODE <InputMode> ........................................... 137
[SENSe:]FREQuency:MODE <OperationMode> ............................................. 137
[SENSe:]FREQuency:OFFSet <FrequencyOffset>.......................................... 138
[SENSe:]FREQuency:SPAN <Span> ............................................................... 138
[SENSe:]FREQuency:SPAN:AUTO <State>.................................................... 138
[SENSe:]FREQuency:SPAN:FULL .................................................................. 139
[SENSe:]FREQuency:STARt <StartFrequency>.............................................. 139
[SENSe:]FREQuency:STOP <StopFrequency>............................................... 139
[SENSe:]PMETer:FREQuency <Frequency> ................................................... 216
[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:ACPairs <ChannelPairs> .................................... 189
[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:BANDwidth:ACHannel <Bandwidth> .................. 190
[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:BANDwidth:ALTernate<y> <Bandwidth> ............ 191
[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:BANDwidth[:CHANnel] <Bandwidth> .................. 190
[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:MODE <PowerMode> ......................................... 191
[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:PRESet:RLEVel .................................................. 191
[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:REFerence:TXCHannel:AUTO <RefChannel> ... 192
[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:REFerence:TXCHannel:MANual <RefChannel> 192
[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:SPACing:ALTernate<y> <Spacing>.................... 193
[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:SPACing:CHANnel<Tx> <Spacing> ................... 194
[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:SPACing[:ACHannel]] <Spacing> ....................... 193

Operating Manual 1173.0966.12 - 07 260

R&S FSC Remote Control – Commands
Status Reporting System

[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:TXCHannel:COUNt <TxChannels>..................... 194

[SENSe:]ROSCilator:SOURce <RefSource> ................................................... 237
[SENSe:]SWEep:COUNt <SweepCount> ........................................................ 149
[SENSe:]SWEep:EGATe <State> .................................................................... 151
[SENSe:]SWEep:EGATe:HOLDoff <GateDelay> ............................................ 151
[SENSe:]SWEep:EGATe:LENGth <GateLength> ............................................ 152
[SENSe:]SWEep:EGATe:TIME <SweepTime> ................................................ 152
[SENSe:]SWEep:MODE <State> ..................................................................... 205
[SENSe:]SWEep:POINts? ................................................................................ 150
[SENSe:]SWEep:TIME <SweepTime> ............................................................. 150
[SENSe:]SWEep:TIME:AUTO <State> ............................................................ 150
[SENSe]:CHANnel:TABLe:SELect:DOWNlink <ChannelTable> ..................... 181
[SENSe]:CHANnel:TABLe:SElect:UPLink <ChannelTable> ............................ 182
[SENSe]:CHANnel:TABLe:SET <Direction> .................................................... 182

ABORt ............................................................................................................... 148

CALCulate:LIMit<k>:ACPower:ACHannel:ABSolute <Limit>........................... 197

CALCulate:LIMit<k>:ACPower:ACHannel:ABSolute:STATe <State> ............. 197
CALCulate:LIMit<k>:ACPower:ACHannel:RESult? ......................................... 197
CALCulate:LIMit<k>:ACPower:ACHannel[:RELative] <Limit> ......................... 196
CALCulate:LIMit<k>:ACPower:ACHannel[:RELative]:STATe <State> ............ 196
CALCulate:LIMit<k>:ACPower:ALTernate<y>:ABSolute <Limit> .................... 199
CALCulate:LIMit<k>:ACPower:ALTernate<y>:ABSolute:STATe <State> ....... 199
CALCulate:LIMit<k>:ACPower:ALTernate<y>:RESult? ................................... 200
CALCulate:LIMit<k>:ACPower:ALTernate<y>[:RELative] <Limit>................... 198
CALCulate:LIMit<k>:ACPower:ALTernate<y>[:RELative]:STATe <State> ..... 198
CALCulate:LIMit<k>:ACPower[:STATe] <State> ............................................. 195
CALCulate:MARKer:FUNCtion:LEVel:ONCE................................................... 184
CALCulate:MARKer:FUNCtion:POWer:PRESet <Standard> .......................... 183
CALCulate:MARKer:FUNCtion:POWer:PRESet:CHECk? ............................... 184
CALCulate:MARKer:FUNCtion:POWer:RESult? <Measurement> .................. 185
CALCulate:MARKer:FUNCtion:POWer:SELect <Measurement> .................... 183
CALCulate:MARKer:FUNCtion:POWer[:STATe] <State> ................................ 183
CALCulate:MARKer<m>:COUNt:FREQuency? ............................................... 168
CALCulate:MARKer<m>:COUNt[:STATe] <State> .......................................... 168
CALCulate:MARKer<m>:FREQuency:MODE <InputMode> ........................... 169
CALCulate:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:CENTer ................................................... 169
CALCulate:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:CPOWer:BANDwidth <Bandwidth> ........ 186
CALCulate:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:CPOWer:MODE <DisplayMode> ............ 186
CALCulate:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:CPOWer:UNIT <Unit> ............................. 187
CALCulate:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:DEModulation:HOLDoff <Time> ............. 170
CALCulate:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:DEModulation:SELect <Demodulation> . 171
CALCulate:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:DEModulation[:STATe] <State> .............. 170
CALCulate:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:NDBDown <Distance> ............................ 171
CALCulate:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:NDBDown:FREQuency? ......................... 171
CALCulate:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:NDBDown:RESult? ................................. 172
CALCulate:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:NDBDown:STATe <State>...................... 172
CALCulate:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:NOISe:RESult? ....................................... 173
CALCulate:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:NOISe[:STATe] <State> .......................... 172
CALCulate:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:OBAN:BANDwidth <Bandwidth>............. 187
CALCulate:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:OBAN:BANDwidth:PCT <OBW>............. 188
CALCulate:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:REFerence .............................................. 173
CALCulate:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:TDMA:BURSt <BurstLength> ................. 188
CALCulate:MATH:STATe <State> ................................................................... 155

Operating Manual 1173.0966.12 - 07 261

R&S FSC Remote Control – Commands
Status Reporting System

CALCulate:MATH[:EXPRession][:DEFine] <Expression> ............................... 154

CALCulate:MATH<t>:COPY:MEMory .............................................................. 155
CALCulate:PMETer:RELative[:MAGNitude] <RefValue> ................................ 217
CALCulate:PMETer:RELative[:MAGNitude]:AUTO ONCE .............................. 217
CALCulate:PMETer:RELative[:MAGNitude]:OFFSet <Offset> ........................ 217
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:AOFF ......................................................... 160
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:MAXimum:NEXT ....................................... 161
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:MAXimum[:PEAK] ..................................... 160
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:MINimum[:PEAK] ...................................... 161
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:X <Coordinate> ......................................... 161
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:X:RELative <Distance> ............................. 162
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:Y? .............................................................. 162
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>[:STATe] <State> ....................................... 160
CALCulate<n>:DLINe <Amplitude> ................................................................. 174
CALCulate<n>:DLINe:STATe <State> ............................................................. 174
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<k>:BEEP[:STATe] <State>............................................. 175
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<k>:COMMent? ................................................................ 175
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<k>:DEFine ...................................................................... 176
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<k>:DELete ...................................................................... 177
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<k>:FAIL?......................................................................... 177
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<k>:LOWer:SELect <LimitLine> ...................................... 177
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<k>:LOWer:THReshold <Level> ...................................... 178
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<k>:STATe <State> ......................................................... 178
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<k>:UNIT:X? .................................................................... 178
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<k>:UNIT[:Y]? .................................................................. 179
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<k>:UPPer:SELect <LimitLine> ....................................... 179
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<k>:UPPer:THReshold <Level> ...................................... 179
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:AOFF ................................................................. 163
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:HARMonics:DISTortion? TOTal ........ 201
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:HARMonics:LIST? ............................ 201
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:HARMonics:NHARmonics <Harmonics>
.......................................................................................................................... 202
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:HARMonics:PRESet ......................... 202
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:HARMonics[:STATe] <State> ........... 201
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:MDEPth:RESult? .............................. 203
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:MDEPth[:STATe] <State> ................. 203
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:MAXimum:NEXT ................................................ 164
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:MAXimum[:PEAK] .............................................. 164
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:MINimum[:PEAK] ............................................... 164
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:X <Coordinate> .................................................. 165
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:X:SLIMits:LEFT <SearchLimit> ......................... 166
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:X:SLIMits:RIGHt <Searchlimit> ......................... 166
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:X:SLIMits[:STATe] <State> ................................ 165
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:Y? ....................................................................... 167
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:Y? ....................................................................... 211
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>[:STATe] <State> ................................................ 163

CALibration:MODE? ......................................................................................... 214

CALibration:PMETer:ZERO:AUTO ONCE ....................................................... 218
CALibration:STATus? ....................................................................................... 215

DISPlay:CMAP <ColorScheme> ...................................................................... 231

DISPlay:CMAP:DEFault ................................................................................... 231
DISPlay:DATE:FORMat <DateFormat> ........................................................... 232
DISPlay:WINDow:STORe ................................................................................ 227

Operating Manual 1173.0966.12 - 07 262

R&S FSC Remote Control – Commands
Status Reporting System

DISPlay[:WINDow]:TRACe<t>:MEMory[:STATe] <State> ............................... 156

DISPlay[:WINDow]:TRACe<t>:MODE <TraceMode> ...................................... 156
DISPlay[:WINDow]:TRACe<t>:Y:SPACing <Scaling> ..................................... 141
DISPlay[:WINDow]:TRACe<t>:Y[:SCALe] <DisplayRange> ............................ 141
DISPlay[:WINDow]:TRACe<t>:Y[:SCALe]:ADJust ........................................... 140
DISPlay[:WINDow]:TRACe<t>:Y[:SCALe]:RLEVel <ReferenceLevel> ........... 141
DISPlay[:WINDow]:TRACe<t>:Y[:SCALe]:RLEVel:OFFSet <Offset>.............. 142
DISPlay[:WINDow]:TRACe<t>:Y[:SCALe]:RPOSition <ReferencePosition> ... 142
DISPlay[:WINDow]:TRACe<t>[:STATe] <State> ............................................. 155
DISPlay<n>:IMPedance:REFerence:POSition <Impedance> ......................... 212
DISPlay<n>:MAGNitude:REFerence <RefValue> ........................................... 207
DISPlay<n>:MAGNitude:REFerence:POSition <RefPosition> ........................ 207
DISPlay<n>:MAGNitude:Y:SCALe <DisplayRange> ....................................... 207
DISPlay<n>:MAGNitude:Y:SPACing <Scaling>............................................... 208
DISPlay<n>:ZOOM:AREA[:STAT] <State> ...................................................... 212
DISPlay<n>:ZOOM:FACTor <ZoomFactor> .................................................... 213
DISPlay<n>:ZOOM:X <HorizShift> .................................................................. 213
DISPlay<n>:ZOOM:Y <VerticalShift> ............................................................... 213

FETCh<z>:PMETer? ........................................................................................ 219

FORMat:BORDer <ByteOrder> ........................................................................ 157

FORMat[:DATA] <DataFormat> ....................................................................... 158

HCOPy:DEVice:LANGuage.............................................................................. 227
HCOPy[:IMMediate] .......................................................................................... 228

INITiate:CONTinuous <SweepMode> .............................................................. 149

INITiate[:IMMediate] ......................................................................................... 148

INPut:ATTenuation <Attenuation> ................................................................... 143

INPut:ATTenuation:AUTO <State> .................................................................. 143
INPut:ATTenuation:MODE <AttenuationMode>............................................... 143
INPut:GAIN:STATe <State> ............................................................................. 144
INPut:IMPedance <Impedance> ...................................................................... 144
INPut:IMPedance:PAD <MatchingPad> ........................................................... 236

INSTrument:NSELect <OperatingMode> ......................................................... 230

INSTrument[:SELect] <OperatingMode> ......................................................... 230

MMEMory:CATalog:DIRectories? .................................................................... 221

MMEMory:CATalog? ........................................................................................ 220
MMEMory:CDIRectory <Directory> .................................................................. 221
MMEMory:COPY <SourceFile>,<DestinationFile> .......................................... 221
MMEMory:DATA <FileName>[,<BlockData>] .................................................. 222
MMEMory:DELete <File> ................................................................................. 223
MMEMory:FILE <File> ...................................................................................... 223
MMEMory:FILE:DATE <FileName>,<Date> .................................................... 223
MMEMory:FILE:TIME <FileName>,<Time> ..................................................... 224
MMEMory:INIT.................................................................................................. 224
MMEMory:LOAD:STATe 1,<FileName> .......................................................... 225
MMEMory:MDIRectory <Directory> ................................................................. 225
MMEMory:MOVE <SourceFile>,<NewFileName> ........................................... 225
MMEMory:NAME <FileName> ......................................................................... 228
MMEMory:RDIRectory <Directory> .................................................................. 226

Operating Manual 1173.0966.12 - 07 263

R&S FSC Remote Control – Commands
Status Reporting System

MMEMory:STORe:STATe 1,<FileName> ........................................................ 226

SOURce:TG:ATTenuation <TGAttenuation> ................................................... 208

STATus:OPERation:CONDition? ..................................................................... 256

STATus:OPERation:ENABle <SumBit> ........................................................... 256
STATus:OPERation:NTRansition <SumBit> .................................................... 257
STATus:OPERation:PTRansition <SumBit> .................................................... 257
STATus:OPERation[:EVENt]? .......................................................................... 256
STATus:PRESet ............................................................................................... 255
STATus:QUEStionable:CONDition? ................................................................ 258
STATus:QUEStionable:ENABle <SumBit> ...................................................... 258
STATus:QUEStionable:FREQuency:CONDition? ............................................ 258
STATus:QUEStionable:FREQuency:ENABle <SumBit> ................................. 258
STATus:QUEStionable:FREQuency:NTRansition <SumBit> .......................... 258
STATus:QUEStionable:FREQuency:PTRansition <SumBit> .......................... 259
STATus:QUEStionable:FREQuency[:EVENt]? ................................................ 257
STATus:QUEStionable:LIMit:CONDition? ........................................................ 258
STATus:QUEStionable:LIMit:ENABle <SumBit> ............................................. 258
STATus:QUEStionable:LIMit:NTRansition <SumBit> ...................................... 258
STATus:QUEStionable:LIMit:PTRansition <SumBit> ...................................... 259
STATus:QUEStionable:LIMit[:EVENt]? ............................................................ 257
STATus:QUEStionable:NTRansition <SumBit> ............................................... 258
STATus:QUEStionable:POWer:CONDition?.................................................... 258
STATus:QUEStionable:POWer:ENABle <SumBit> ......................................... 258
STATus:QUEStionable:POWer:NTRansition <SumBit> .................................. 258
STATus:QUEStionable:POWer:PTRansition <SumBit> .................................. 259
STATus:QUEStionable:POWer[EVENt]? ......................................................... 257
STATus:QUEStionable:PTRansition <SumBit> ............................................... 259
STATus:QUEStionable[:EVENt]? ..................................................................... 257
STATus:QUEue[:NEXT] ................................................................................... 256

SYSTem:AUDio:VOLume <Volume> ............................................................... 232

SYSTem:BEEPer:KEY:VOLume <Volume> .................................................... 233
SYSTem:BEEPer:VOLume <Volume> ............................................................. 233
SYSTem:BNC<1...2>:MODE <BNCFunction> ................................................. 237
SYSTem:CAPTure:COUNter <Counter> ......................................................... 229
SYSTem:CAPture:MODE <MODE> ................................................................. 229
SYSTem:COMMunicate:LAN:ETHernet? ......................................................... 234
SYSTem:COMMunicate:LAN:SUBMask <SubnetMask> ................................. 234
SYSTem:COMMunicate:SOCKet:ADDRess <IPAddress> .............................. 234
SYSTem:COMMunicate:SOCKet:DHCP[:STATe] <State> .............................. 235
SYSTem:COMMunicate:SOCKet:PORT <Port> .............................................. 235
SYSTem:DATE <Date> .................................................................................... 238
SYSTem:ERRor:ALL? ...................................................................................... 238
SYSTem:ERRor:CODE:ALL?........................................................................... 239
SYSTem:ERRor:CODE[:NEXT]? ..................................................................... 239
SYSTem:ERRor:COUNt? ................................................................................. 240
SYSTem:ERRor[:NEXT]? ................................................................................. 238
SYSTem:HELP:HEADers? ............................................................................... 240
SYSTem:HELP:SYNTax? ................................................................................ 240
SYSTem:LANGuage <Language> ................................................................... 241
SYSTem:LANGuage:CATalog? ....................................................................... 241
SYSTem:POWer:SOURce? ............................................................................. 241
SYSTem:POWer:STATus? .............................................................................. 242

Operating Manual 1173.0966.12 - 07 264

R&S FSC Remote Control – Commands
Status Reporting System

SYSTem:PRESet ............................................................................................. 242

SYSTem:PRESet:FACTory .............................................................................. 242
SYSTem:PRESet:MODE <Mode> ................................................................... 242
SYSTem:PRESet:USER <Preset> ................................................................... 243
SYSTem:SHUTdown ........................................................................................ 243
SYSTem:TIME <Time> .................................................................................... 243
SYSTem:TZONee <TimeShift> ........................................................................ 244
SYSTem:VERSion? .......................................................................................... 244

TRACe[:DATA]? <Destination> ........................................................................ 158

TRACe[:DATA]? ............................................................................................... 210

TRIGger[:SEQuence]:HOLDoff[:TIME] <TriggerDelay> ................................... 152

TRIGger[:SEQuence]:LEVel:VIDeo <TriggerLevel> ........................................ 153
TRIGger[:SEQuence]:SLOPe <TriggerSlope> ................................................. 153
TRIGger[:SEQuence]:SOURce <TriggerSource> ............................................ 154

UNIT:POWer <Unit> ......................................................................................... 145

UNIT<z>:PMETer:POWer <Unit> .................................................................... 218

Operating Manual 1173.0966.12 - 07 265

 R&S FSC Index

Index
Abort measurement ......................................................... 148 state ............................................................................... 91
ACLR ............................................................................... 189 Calibration method............................................................. 92
absolute results .............................................................. 39 Calibration procedure......................................................... 92
adjacent channel............................................................. 36 Center frequency ................................................. 48, 86, 135
channel bandwidth .......................................................... 37 CF step size....................................................................... 48
channel spacing.............................................................. 37 Channel bandwidth
limit check ............................................................... 40, 195 ACLR.............................................................................. 37
measurement configuration............................................. 36 channel power ................................................................ 24
measurement settings..................................................... 34 occupied bandwidth ........................................................ 28
normalization .................................................................. 39 Channel power................................................................... 22
reference channel ........................................................... 39 adjust level ..................................................................... 24
relative results ................................................................ 39 channel bandwidth .......................................................... 24
standard ......................................................................... 36 display mode .................................................................. 25
transmission channel ...................................................... 36 reference level ................................................................ 24
Adjacent channel ............................................................... 36 span ............................................................................... 24
Adjacent Channel Leakage Ratio (ACLR) .......................... 33 standard ......................................................................... 23
Adjacent channel spacing ................................................ 193 trace mode ................................................................... 186
Adjacent channels ........................................................... 189 unit ......................................................................... 25, 187
Adjust level Channel power measurement .......................................... 186
channel power ................................................................ 24 Channel selection ............................................................ 180
occupied bandwidth ........................................................ 28 Channel spacing ........................................................ 37, 193
TDMA power................................................................... 31 Channel table .............................................................. 80, 96
Adjust settings Channel table selection.................................................... 181
AM modulation depth ...................................................... 47 Clear / write ....................................................................... 63
harmonic distortion ......................................................... 45 Color scheme .................................................................. 231
Alternate channel spacing ................................................ 193 Common commands ........................................................ 132
Alternate channels ........................................................... 191 Continuous sweep ............................................................. 59
AM demodulator ................................................................ 75 Contiuous sweep ............................................................. 149
AM modulation depth ................................................. 46, 203 Conventions......................................................................... 7
adjust settings................................................................. 47 Correction data .................................................................. 90
threshold......................................................................... 47 Cursor keys ....................................................................... 11
Amplitude..................................................................... 51, 94 Data capture .................................................................... 228
Attenuation ................................................................ 53, 143 Data format ...................................................................... 158
Attenuation coupling ........................................................ 143 Data management ..................................................... 14, 220
Attenuation mode............................................................. 143 Date ................................................................................. 238
Audio demodulation ......................................................... 170 Delay time.......................................................................... 61
time ................................................................................ 75 Delta marker .................................................................... 160
volume ............................................................................ 76 deactivation .................................................................. 160
Audio demodulator ............................................................. 75 horizontal position ......................................................... 161
Auto low noise/distortion .................................................... 53 vertical position ............................................................. 162
Auto peak .......................................................................... 64 Deltamarker ....................................................................... 68
Average trace .................................................................... 63 Detector ..................................................................... 64, 157
Averaging time ................................................................... 88 Display............................................................................. 231
Bandwidth .......................................................................... 55 Display elements ................................................................. 8
ACLR ............................................................................ 190 Display line ................................................................ 76, 174
adjacent channels ......................................................... 190 Display mode ..................................................................... 25
alternate channels ........................................................ 191 Display range................................................ 52, 96, 141, 208
channel power .............................................................. 186 group delay ................................................................... 141
occupied bandwidth ...................................................... 187 magnitude..................................................................... 207
resolution ................................................................ 55, 146 Error queue...................................................................... 238
video ....................................................................... 57, 147 External trigger .................................................................. 60
Battery ............................................................................. 242 Factory calibration ............................................................. 91
Beeper ....................................................................... 79, 232 File .................................................................................. 220
BNC ................................................................................. 237 File management ............................................................... 14
Burst length ............................................................... 31, 188 Firmware ........................................................................... 21
Calibration ................................................................. 90, 214 FM demodulator................................................................. 75

Operating Manual 1173.0966.12 - 07 267

 R&S FSC Index

Free run ............................................................................. 60 deactivation .................................................................. 163

Frequency delta marker ................................................................... 69
counter ........................................................................... 73 distance .......................................................................... 74
mode .............................................................................. 80 functions ......................................................................... 73
offset .............................................................................. 49 horizontal position ......................................................... 165
power meter.................................................................. 216 list ................................................................................... 69
range .............................................................................. 50 position ..................................................................... 69, 74
settings ..................................................................... 48, 86 removal........................................................................... 71
span auto...................................................................... 138 search limit ..................................................................... 72
start/stop......................................................................... 50 search limits.................................................................. 165
Frequency counter ........................................................... 168 selection ......................................................................... 70
Frequency domain ........................................................... 137 type ................................................................................ 70
Frequency mode .............................................................. 137 vertical position ............................................................. 167
Frequency mode (marker)................................................ 169 zoom ............................................................................ 212
Frequency offset .............................................................. 138 Marker list
Frequency span ............................................................... 138 AM modulation depth ...................................................... 47
Frequency step size ......................................................... 136 harmonic distortion ......................................................... 45
Frequency step size coupling ........................................... 136 Mathematics ...................................................................... 67
Full span .................................................................... 50, 139 Max hold ............................................................................ 63
Gate delay ....................................................................... 151 Max peak ........................................................................... 64
Gate length ...................................................................... 152 Measurement..................................................................... 58
Gate settings ..................................................................... 62 abort ............................................................................. 148
Gated sweep ............................................................... 60, 61 ACLR...................................................................... 33, 189
Gated trigger.................................................................... 151 AM modulation depth .............................................. 46, 203
Gateway .......................................................................... 233 audio demodulation ........................................................ 75
Hardcopy ......................................................................... 227 channel power ........................................................ 22, 186
Harmonic distortion .................................................... 44, 200 frequency counter ........................................................... 73
adjust settings................................................................. 45 harmonic distortion ................................................. 44, 200
harmonics ....................................................................... 45 n dB down ...................................................................... 74
harmonics list.................................................................. 45 noise............................................................................. 172
THD ................................................................................ 45 noise power density ........................................................ 73
Horizontal axis ................................................................... 48 occupied bandwidth ................................................ 26, 187
Impedance .................................................. 55, 144, 212, 236 power sensor .................................................................. 86
Input scalar.............................................................................. 93
cancellation..................................................................... 10 selection ....................................................................... 183
characters ......................................................................... 9 spectrum analyzer .......................................................... 22
confirmation .................................................................... 10 spectrum emission mask ........................................ 41, 204
numbers ........................................................................... 9 start .............................................................................. 148
Input attenuation .............................................................. 143 TDMA ........................................................................... 188
Instrument setup ................................................................ 12 TDMA power................................................................... 30
Key transmission scalar ......................................................... 93
Ampt (NA)....................................................................... 94 Measurement results ....................................................... 185
Ampt (SA) ....................................................................... 51 Measurement setup ........................................................... 12
BW ................................................................................. 55 Memory trace..................................................................... 67
Freq (SA) ........................................................................ 48 Menus................................................................................ 98
Marker ............................................................................ 68 general ........................................................................... 98
Meas (NA) ................................................................ 90, 93 network analyzer .......................................................... 105
Meas (PM) ...................................................................... 86 power meter ................................................................. 108
Meas (SA) ...................................................................... 22 spectrum analysis ......................................................... 100
MKR -> ........................................................................... 68 Min hold ............................................................................. 63
Sweep ............................................................................ 58 Min peak ............................................................................ 64
Trace .............................................................................. 63 Mode ............................................................................... 230
LAN ................................................................................. 233 Multiple traces ................................................................... 66
Language......................................................................... 241 n dB down.................................................................. 74, 172
Last span ........................................................................... 51 Network ........................................................................... 233
Limit check......................................................................... 79 Network analysis................................................................ 89
ACLR ...................................................................... 40, 195 Noise measurement ......................................................... 172
Limit lines............................................................. 77, 97, 175 Noise power....................................................................... 73
Marker ................................................................. 68, 96, 163 Normalization (NA) ............................................................ 90
automatic positioning ...................................................... 70 Normalization (SA)............................................................. 39

Operating Manual 1173.0966.12 - 07 268

 R&S FSC Index

Number of harmonics......................................................... 45 RMS .................................................................................. 65

Occupied bandwidth .................................................. 26, 187 Rotary knob ....................................................................... 10
adjust level ..................................................................... 28 Sample .............................................................................. 65
channel bandwidth .......................................................... 28 Saving ............................................................................. 220
power percentage ........................................................... 29 Scalar measurement .......................................................... 89
reference level ................................................................ 28 Scale adjust ..................................................................... 140
span ............................................................................... 29 Scaling......................................................................... 52, 96
standard ......................................................................... 27 horizontal axis................................................................. 48
Offset Screen layout....................................................................... 8
frequency........................................................................ 49 ACLR.............................................................................. 33
reference level ................................................................ 53 AM modulation depth ...................................................... 47
Operating mode ............................................................... 230 channel power ................................................................ 23
network analyzer............................................................. 89 file manager .................................................................... 15
spectrum analyzer .......................................................... 22 harmonic distortion ......................................................... 44
Option occupied bandwidth ........................................................ 26
K42 ............................................................................... 206 power meter ................................................................... 85
K45 ............................................................................... 206 spectrum emission mask ................................................ 42
Power (system) ................................................................ 241 TDMA power................................................................... 30
Power meter ...................................................................... 84 w/ active markers ............................................................ 68
Power percentage ...................................................... 29, 188 Screenshot ................................................................ 13, 227
Power sensor ..................................................................... 85 Search limits ...................................................................... 72
averaging time ................................................................ 88 Secondary transducer ........................................................ 81
errors .............................................................................. 86 Single sweep ............................................................. 59, 149
reference level ................................................................ 87 Smith chart
unit ................................................................................. 87 zoom ............................................................................ 212
zeroing............................................................................ 87 Softkey
Preamplifier ............................................................... 55, 144 new marker..................................................................... 69
Preset ................................................................ 12, 133, 242 Softkeys............................................................................. 98
Preview dataset ................................................................. 19 general ........................................................................... 98
Primary transducer............................................................. 81 network analyzer .......................................................... 105
R&S FSCView power meter ................................................................. 108
ACLR .............................................................................. 34 spectrum analysis ......................................................... 100
creating standards ................................... 23, 27, 31, 36, 42 Span .......................................................................... 50, 138
spectrum emission mask ................................................ 41 channel power ................................................................ 24
RBW .................................................................................. 55 occupied bandwidth ........................................................ 29
Reference channel ............................................................. 39 Spectrum analyzer ............................................................. 22
Reference frequency.......................................................... 74 Spectrum emission mask ........................................... 41, 204
Reference impedance ...................................................... 212 adjust settings................................................................. 43
Reference level .......................................................... 51, 141 result table ...................................................................... 43
adjustment ............................................................ 184, 191 standard ......................................................................... 42
channel power ................................................................ 24 Standard
occupied bandwidth ........................................................ 28 ACLR.............................................................................. 36
offset .............................................................................. 53 channel power ................................................................ 23
power meter.................................................................. 217 occupied bandwidth ........................................................ 27
power sensor .................................................................. 87 spectrum emission mask ................................................ 42
TDMA power................................................................... 31 TDMA power................................................................... 31
transducer ...................................................................... 82 Standard compliance check ............................................. 184
Reference level offset ...................................................... 142 Standard selection ................................................... 183, 204
Reference position ............................................... 52, 95, 142 Start frequency ................................................................ 139
magnitude..................................................................... 207 Start measurement .......................................................... 148
Reference value................................................................. 94 Start/stop frequency ........................................................... 50
magnitude..................................................................... 207 Step size............................................................................ 48
power meter.................................................................. 217 Stop frequency................................................................. 139
Resolution bandwidth........................................... 55, 58, 146 Sweep ......................................................................... 58, 64
Restoring ......................................................................... 220 Sweep count .................................................................... 149
Result table Sweep mode.............................................................. 59, 149
spectrum emission mask ................................................ 43 Sweep number............................................................. 59, 63
Results .............................................................158, 185, 210 Sweep points ................................................................... 150
power meter.................................................................. 219 Sweep time .........................................................58, 150, 152
RF attenuation ................................................................... 53 Synchronization ................................................................. 14

Operating Manual 1173.0966.12 - 07 269

 R&S FSC Index

TDMA burst length ........................................................... 188 Transmission channel ........................................................ 36

TDMA measurement ........................................................ 188 Transmission channels .................................................... 194
TDMA power ...................................................................... 30 Trigger ....................................................................... 60, 154
adjust level ..................................................................... 31 gate .............................................................................. 151
burst length ..................................................................... 31 Trigger delay.............................................................. 61, 152
reference level ................................................................ 31 Trigger level ....................................................................... 61
standard ......................................................................... 31 Trigger slope.................................................................... 153
THD ................................................................................... 45 Trigger source ................................................................. 154
Threshold Unit ............................................................................ 53, 145
AM modulation depth ...................................................... 47 channel power ................................................................ 25
Time ................................................................................ 243 power sensor .......................................................... 87, 218
Time domain ...................................................30, 51, 60, 137 transducer ...................................................................... 82
Total harmonic distortion .................................................... 45 User interface ...................................................................... 8
Trace ................................................................................. 63 VBW .................................................................................. 57
Trace (second)................................................................... 66 Vertical axis ................................................................. 51, 94
Trace average.................................................................... 63 Video bandwidth ........................................................ 57, 147
Trace math ...................................................................... 154 Video trigger ...................................................................... 60
Trace mathematics ............................................................ 67 Video trigger level ............................................................ 153
Trace memory............................................................ 67, 156 View trace .......................................................................... 63
Trace mode ....................................................................... 63 Volume ...................................................................... 76, 232
Trace read out ......................................................... 158, 210 X axis................................................................................. 48
Trace selection .......................................................... 66, 155 Y axis........................................................................... 51, 94
Tracking generator ..................................................... 89, 208 Zero span .......................................................................... 51
Transducer .......................................................... 55, 81, 144 Zeroing ...................................................................... 87, 218
unit ................................................................................. 82 ZVHView
Transducer factor unit ...................................................... 145 channel table ............................................................ 80, 96
Transducer selection........................................................ 145 limit lines................................................................... 77, 97

Operating Manual 1173.0966.12 - 07 270